Home

DIALux Version 4.7

1. 239 391 Illumination Class Wizard Main Users and Other SOS srt cha eet ain aaron eat ae ai Sie 240 392 Illumination Class Wizard Main Weather Type 240 393 Illumination Class Wizard Interchanges 241 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 335 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 394 Illumination Class Wizard Traffic Flow of Motorised MCNICIOS aataracoooteran aa 241 395 Illumination Class Wizard Conflict Zone 242 396 Illumination Class Wizard Complexity of Field of VISO eea daca on durnaiaatasihdaa N 242 397 Illumination Class Wizard Degree of Navigational DIFA O an a a 243 398 Illumination Class Wizard Brightness of STOUNA Siiran 243 399 Illumination Class Wizard Final dialogue 244 400 Importing your OWN R table ccceseesesssereeeeeees 244 401 Selecting an R table and inserting this in DIALux 245 402 Insert street arrangement via The Guide 246 403 Insert street arrangement Vid MENU nssr 246 404 Insert street arrangement via right mouse button 247 405 Insert Street Arrangement Luminaire 00 247 406 Insert Street Arrangement Boom properties and po
2. Se Fig 355 Insert Standard Street via menu or from The Guide DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 221 DIALux Version 4 7 The Guide a x Indoor Lighting Outdoor Lighting Street Lighting Edit street aq Insert Standard Jy gm Edit street elements Fig 356 Insert Standard Street via The Guide You can calculate your projects also by means of our quick street planning wizard see also chapter Working with Wizards Quick Street Planning W izard Click with the left mouse button on DIALux Wizards in the WELCOME window in order to use this wizard Se TE sij a aS anp Er aan el ete e n eg ee ee iN a a Delis lee ieu yrr lirs Fe m Emn e L g a Fig 357 DIALux wizards Quick street planning wizard If you do not see the WELCOME dialogue any more you will find the wizards in the menu File gt Wizards File Edit View CAD Pick L New Gy Open Close Save As Import gt Export gt L cy Print Settings Print Preview Last Projects Open Exit Ctri N Ctri O Fig 358 Wizards via Menu This wizard guides you through the quick planning for streets DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 222 DIALux Version 4 7 iekcome fo the Cusack Fimnang Wind for Sirens Th miry gein ee eee Ped ee ee ee ee ro Te ee eo HON a Tp a r elie of rele Pee ee Cg Laing Se To ee ee Fig 359 Startup dialogue for street
3. Split 4lign and distribute H Copy Along a Line Cur Ea Copy Paste Delete Adjust Brightness Fig 276 Object context menu DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 177 In the 3D View Pull rubber band lines Scale in one dimension Pull rubber band corners Scale in three dimensions DIALux Version 4 7 In the 3D view you can scale the object in the X Y or Z direction by clicking and pulling one of the rubber band lines of the selected object However if you click on one of the selected corner points you simultaneously scale in all directions In 2D views you can only scale in one dimension Combining and Saving Objects If you have inserted multiple objects in the CAD which together you wish to treat as an arrangement or to save as anew custom piece of furniture it is recommended to combine these objects in advance Objects need not touch to be combined They can also be positioned independently in the room Fig 277 Combining Objects To combine objects select them and select Combine from the context menu To save objects select them and select Save as from the context menu Important DIALux only loads furniture saved in the DIALux Furniture directory into the furniture tree The user can create subdirectories beneath the Furniture directory If you have received furniture files in the SAT file format SAT from the manufacturers you can save these in t
4. bber jogo kas 1 E EE w Fig 250 Sun and shadow visualisation At the top left of the Inspector there are two sliders With these the date and time can be changed on a real time basis and the path of the incidence light in the room can be simulated Settings in the calculation dialogue Before starting the calculation you have the possibility to select the scenes to be calculated in the calculation window Other settings are available Thus you can select additional calculation options and operations DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 163 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 251 Calculation dialogue DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 164 If you have a three button mouse the Move option is assigned to the mouse button in the middle If you have a wheel mouse you can Zoom by turning the wheel and Move by pressing it Various options are available when roaming through a scene DIALux Version 4 7 Working in the 3D View Setup the 3D View It is possible to roam through a planned scene to closely evaluate the results The observer s position can also be inside a room This is especially valuable when planning large rooms with a lot of furniture Fig 252 Evaluating a staircase from the upper storey The following tools from left can be used to change the position in the 3D view Fig 253 Toolbar for switching between modes e Select Objects when this mode
5. DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 301 Important You can open the separate POV Ray help with F1 while POV Ray is running DIALux Version 4 7 Raytracer For raytracing DIALux uses the external programme POV Ray If you want to have more detailed information about POV Ray and the possible settings you can use the F1 key to open the POV Ray help Background DIALux automatically copies POV Ray onto the PC The software will be installed when the user for the first time starts to calculate a photorealistic image The setup installs the standard version of POV Ray 3 6 This software is freeware and available at www povray org Additionally DIALux installs an adapted version of the povengine exe into the DIALux directory The major difference between the DIALux version and the original version of POV Ray is that the DIALux version can handle real photometry of luminaires The measured light distribution of a luminaire is used to define the distribution of light The original version can only handle ideal light sources like spot and ambient light Whenever the DIALux user wants to edit the POV Ray files it is important to use the pvengine exe in the DIALux directory e g C Program Files DIALux pvengine exe Otherwise the pov file can not be interpreted You can continue to work with POV Ray to edit the scene generated with DIALux All functions of POV Ray are available For further editing you must use the program
6. DIALux Version 4 7 arises as to the options there are to define the quantity and also the distribution of the calculation points in the grid With DIALux there are three possible ways to make adjustments to the calculation points You will find all the methods in the Inspector under the tab Calculation grid in the sub item Number of Calculation Points Projektmanager Name Geometry Calculation Grid Measuring a gt Number of Calculation Points Automatic O Manual 9 Ya Distance mu LIH m S AE Im Align Paints to the Edge C Horizontal vertical Fig 326 M ethods for defining calculation points Automatic This is the recommended setting if there are no specific requirements With this method DIA Lux distributes the grid points uniformly over the whole calculation grid Manual DIALux distributes the calculation points uniformly with this method too but in accordance with your specific default settings with regard to the x and y coordinates Distance With this method you are free to define the distances between the individual grid points yourself Afterwards DIALux calculates the optimal number of grid points In addition to these options you can also decide whether the grid points are positioned at the edges of the horizontal and or vertical axes You can decide on the settings in the tab Calculation grid under Align Points to the Edge Either vertical
7. Fig 274 Pick grid settings Colours of the Pick grids Scale or rotate An object is either in scale or in rotate mode After selecting an object it is initially in rotate mode To change between the two modes you can either open the context menu by doing a right click or and this is new you can hit the tabulator key to change between these modes DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 176 Please note The red rotation point enables a rotation around the red axis likewise the blue and the green rotation points enable rotations around the blue and green axes respectively DIALux Version 4 7 Rotating Objects If objects are to be rotated they must be selected first Then they can be modified numerically in the Property Page or graphically in the CAD view Click on one of the three axes rotation points There is a pick grid for rotations as well Angle Pick Fig 275 Rotating objects Objects are rotated around their own coordinate origin This is indicated by the arrow cross and by the point of intersection of the three axes If multiple objects are selected to be rotated together they are rotated around the centre of the encompassing cube Scaling Objects Objects can be scaled along one two or three axes This can be done either in the Property Pages or in the CAD To go to the scale mode in the CAD open the object s context menu right click and select the Scale option 3 i Rotate Combine
8. Hoole 0 56 4 0 93 a fio Note New values directly from manufacturer Umi aires Total Planing value 1553 lx 1746 lx New 2608 x 2045 Ix Fig 92 User defined maintenance factors For those maintenance factors which you have selected LM F or and LLM F the lamp type or luminaire type is selected on User defined Now you can insert directly the factors and a relevant remark On this Property Page you also have the overview for maintained and initial illuminance of the whole lighting system as well as this special arrangement Therefore you are able to optimize the maintenance plan with regard to the number of luminaires and maintenance work With another arrangement in the same room the values of the whole illuminance and those of the respective arrangement of course vary DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 71 DIALux Version 4 7 a 15 File Edit wiew CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Gutpuk w DEHA A Farg Bx sma LaISIB fo Bpk e Projektmanager Luminous emittance Luminous emittance 2 Lall Maintenance interval Every 3 0 years gt Luminaire type Indirect luminaire a E Replacement interval lamps in pears 20 Lamp type Tri phosphorus fluoresce i Individual replacement of defective lamps Edit individual factors manually MF D RSh D LMF J LLMF J LSF fost El ass x 0 86 fi 00 Note New values directly from manufacturer Umi aires Total Planing value 1530 lx 1723 be New 2608 I
9. You will find settings options in the Inspector of your floodlight illumination Luminaire Mounting Height Arrangement Ilu gt Luminaire DIAL 21 Compar Wandfluter F r Minira Product image Light distribution curve Fig 164 Settings options in the project manager DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 114 DIALux Version 4 7 Arranging floodlighting As mentioned before it is possible to make a selection for mirroring floodlighting in the tab Arrangement in the project manager This can be done vertically horizontally or by a combination of the two In the latter case it improves illumination uniformity of the scene Vertical mirroring i a qt horizontal mirroring Vertical horizontal a mI rOrng Fig 165 Mirroring options for floodlight illumination Under the tab Arrangement you can also determine the number of luminaires This quantity is the same as the number of illumination points in Illumination Points tab of the floodlight arrangement Focal points With the tab Illumination Points it is possible at this stage to add additional illumination points which results in a corresponding increase in the number of luminaires According to the DIALux standard the illumination points of the luminaires are aligned to the position of origin of the sports complex with the aid of the coordinates x y and z they can be changed manua
10. ccccceseeeeeeseeseeeeteseeeeeeeteeens 34 33 3D view Of a TOOM siesta ccc esha raat T 35 34 Ground plan view of a r00M s sssssrrseessrrrreesrrrreeesn 35 35 RIONE MOUSE DUO Macna 36 36 3D CAD window context MenU ssseeeesssrrrrrrrrrrree 36 37 Ground plan view context MENU sssssserrreerrrreerrrreen 36 38 Context menu of a selected object esseere 37 39 Project Manager oca aR a A 38 40 Plugin Tree Luminaire selection 39 Al The User Database sessssnrresreessrnrrrrrressrrrrrrerens 40 42 Explorer context menu whilst DIA Lux 4 7 is running 41 43 Starting a lamp Plugin in DIALUX cccccseseeeerseeeees 42 44 DIALux lamp demo database cccsccssseeereeeeseesaeess 42 45 The Furniture tree ccccccccscsseeceeeseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeess 44 AO Tne Colour Meina a 45 4 FOUDUCTAD niea A 46 AG OUUDUE TICS siscsctatersscnea mentale cenaisatieraaqnidelentidenant ins 46 49 Save a 3D rendering aS jpg file 47 50 The GUdE noras a a 47 51 Display guide WINdOW ssssssesssrrreresrrnnesrrrrresrrrreeerrns 48 52 Property Page of the selected room in the Inspector 49 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 328 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig F
11. ovengine exe that is stored in the directory C Programs Files DIALux You cannot use the original POV Ray software POV Ray Settings within DIALux The most important settings for the raytracing with POV Ray can be made in DIALux For the standard use of the photorealistic visualisation these settings are adequate Expert users can use all the features of POV Ray by loading the pov file made with DIALux into the editor of POV Ray Photo Realistic Images with Raytracing Raytracing means that the light beams from your own point of view with respect to mirroring transparency and roughness of surfaces are followed Basic Settings The newest version of the Raytracer POV Ray 3 6 is integrated in DIALux This is substantially quicker and can choose the right brightness settings independently For the visualizations with POV Ray the spectral distributions of the lamps and the colour filter as well as the dimming level for the control groups are handed over DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 302 Additional settings are possible in the Quick preference tab DIALux Version 4 7 automatically In the menu file Export you find the option Raytracing with POV Ray which opens a dialogue where the usually recommended settings are selected In the quick preference tab you can define the basic settings for your first applications Experienced users might change options for Indirect Calculation Brightness Preferences and Image
12. ssh Sa iba TE i u um Fig 232 Emergency lighting Modify escape route The surface is placed on the floor but you can move it around freely After placing these escape route object s a luminaire has to be selected With a right click on the escape route a luminaire arrangement of single luminaires can be placed above the escape route ee m Edit Escape Route Insert Escape Route Lighting Align and distribute Copy Along a Line Cut Copy g Delete Set DWG or DXF origin here Selection hidden Fig 233 Emergency lighting Insert escape route lighting You can select the luminaries you want to use you can define the luminous flux which LEO to be used if there is more than one and you can define a desired illuminance level to be reached on the escape route The maximum distances for the first luminaries and between the luminaries are calculated and used for the positioning of the luminaries Also you can select if there should be luminaries in the positions of the kinks of the DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 152 DIALux Version 4 7 escape route If necessary there can be more than one escape route and luminaries arrangement in a room SEE ee ee es oF EE i oe aias 9G ja Leaz ls sR poA EE i Pe O je e ep me ia ee Fe ii ree Lissi ee ee a mm s EF ia T jin Lo A N i OE ire rie reer p a H 4 i t r a is ar r d ami g a ma ae ee fiz i i fa i a TE i im fer Fh e
13. DIALux Version 4 7 gn ar gn Eai ge m Fig 434 Luminance diagram for evaluation of omni directional glare control Tabular Presentation of Photometric Data of Luminaires The light intensity and the luminance are also presented in tabular form The steps C levels and Gamma angles can be adjusted in the Property Page i j ol eee Ge ee pai ae Ji lls A aias i E peraji a j lt oi ch i i emer ee rte pee Bee ees ee pete TE E 0 i us J7 Ki l i 05 S001 atir 7 Lara arc Table immm Tak Lo ET ma hin Lei i i E foe ET CY OF C oe or CS reas ED Ba EG Sp EG ENG i ry EF Fea Pe ee Oe OO r nm Ti kt Dt fs F FLEET i g i z db B g E Ee J Ei a4 Tie A I HF E E E E E E q um Of aw oe I E im Em on aw a r E i E HZC COU g mF ji Fiii Ww p i im i Pipe ija l ala a Fig 435 Light intensity table Tabular Presentation of Exterior Scenes DIALux can create a summary which contains a ground plan with luminaires and furniture and their coordinates With the Property Page you can adjust the scale details and coordinates DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 266 DIALux Version 4 7 EE pE aira i E paji i a i E m i E ah i a ee ee ee hated 5 re Scara 1 Panning daia aj Te EF bE i lon mme poba o im i ee Ema h i a a a LEE m a l a FEJE ee i e i qmr T ari F a Lal La F iay likis b Tii
14. Fig 467 Energy evaluations in The Guide DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 286 DIALux Version 4 7 Energy evaluation rooms with and without links to DIA Lux rooms As mentioned before you can create energy evaluation rooms with a link to a DIALux room but also without such a link Hama 2a Edt Room Geometry Fiat dygn ahari Int hfi pere lest oa u TE aad view Fe hy Flee Mingi Level Syme F3 Dume Pls us ep aiit a Ge Corridor fElevator E E Codere hoon Ge t fice 3 Fig 468 Create an energy evaluation room with a link to a DIALux room E Frojekt 1 Hm Luminaires Used EE Energy Evaluation Delete Fig 469 Create an energy evaluation room without a link to a DIALux room In the first case an energy evaluation room Is created that is linked to the corresponding DIALux room In the second case an energy evaluation room is created that is not linked to any DIALux room Cinergy Evalusion Roo rathout Link to 4 DIAL fe Energy Evian inom without Link be a LALE Rbi Riau Lines to the Follosing DIAL rogn Reame 1 f The results of each indvidual energy evaluation room can The repi of each indhicaal erengy enraluation room can How often shoud this noom be bahen into account bow often chould thi roam ba Lakan ino encoun Court i Count E a Ca rojet J E Lag Propel 1 a h Luminaines Used Sh Lua e Used ol a ieg Eater gj Brengy Evin iD ikain Zone 1 3 E Utes Fo
15. Furthermore there are some parameters only for daylight supplied assessment zones a Gehl Gupte Dpi Feed T lkr Geekery skt Lg yey F aot aa Cae ot ial bing pea Ce iaraa Ti Amir Digt Tapert J a a C Lamm Lined g ie j a s E hem Tore 1 Bi Bime g me iriban jeier bme ira imni B meri Sow lr vl vate Da E B Lik Tore i E Fm a tie biel oo toot Fig 475 One property page of a daylight supplied assessment zone Some only for special daylight sources Times Control Occupancy Daylight Fa ades P jes Control Occupancy Daylight Rooflights 4 gt Classification of daylight penetration For vertical fa ades Classification of daylight penetration For rooflights Middle 6 gt DC gt 4 v Reset Weak 4 gt D gt 2 Y Daylight quotient building shell opening approximation Daylight Quotient Approximation acc Standard 2 5 acc norm 4 2 Effective light transmission Factor 0 52 Maintenance 300 v kx Dect Maintenance 300 w Ix Reset Orientation Type Horizontal from room geometry Latitude 51 22 From location of the project Slope angle type 0 from room geometry Fig 476 Property pages for assessment zones that are daylight supplied by windows respectively roof lights Assessment zones of unlinked energy evaluation rooms have additional parameters since direct input of energy consumption is possible DIAL
16. Hemicnherical Fig 330 Pre setting the calculation of the calculation grid Gradients By gradient is meant a rate of change of value between a specific measuring point and measuring points directly surrounding it The gradient supplies information about the difference in illuminance between this and the measuring points in the immediate vicinity Only calculation grids with a uniform and as a rule quadratic grid require gradients of illuminance In the Inspector under the tab Gradients you can activate gradients and their output define the corresponding limit value and also define the distance for the gradient grid By default in DIALux a gradient lies on a measuring or calculation point depending on whether you use a measuring grid in addition to a calculation grid g Grid Calculation Gradients Display RealTime 4 Calculate Gradients Limit Values For Gradients In the respective outputs only the gradients are output thak exceed this limit value Distance For Gradient Grid 5 000 m The gradients are always calculated For this distance no matter how great the point distance in the calculation grid is Fig 331 Setting limit values for gradients The limit value set prevents loss of image quality in camera or image recordings This value should not exceed 20 for camera recorded events or 55 for non camera recorded events DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 206 DIALux Version 4
17. If you have an older PC it is advisable to select the Automatically change to wireframe display when moving within the CAD views option If you move within the CAD while this option is activated the room display is updated smoothly following the mouse movement After the mouse button is released the entire scene is displayed again Thus the calculation time is reduced and you can work with DIALux without disturbing jerking on the screen Hint By default the upper setting is activated If you have an efficient PC it is worthwhile trying the deactivated function We suggest you use OpenGL mode if possible If you want the X Y and Z coordinate arrows to be visible in the 3D view switch the Coordinate arrows visible in 3D option on Since DIALux 4 1 you can hide the north arrow in 0 position In the Output tab you can adjust general settings for your output that appears on the relevant pages You can specify font sizes and line thickness of the outputs in the Output tab Here you can modify the output footer and the logo For the logo please click on the three point button besides the field Logo and then select the file in the opening window which contains your logo DIALux opens bitmaps BM P or JPG s DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 57 DIALux Version 4 7 DIALux 4 7 Standard Values Global CAD Window Output Contact Energy Evaluation Window Rooflights Fealiaeainieenesst Output
18. Objects MJ Active DLXFURN sie oe Dee Legend Active DLXDESCR romaine aane BOS Escape routes Active DLXEM Value chart Active DLXVAL Sport Faciities Active OLXSPA Calculation Grid Active DLXUDG Flood light arrows e Active DLXFLOOD Isolines active DLXISO Objects in deactivated layers can be switched bo visible again in your CAD program at any time Fig 451 Selection of the current layers and designations DWG and DXF Export Legend Isolines Value chart General Object selection Options Luminaires Render small luminaires as enlarged Export objects as 2D projection Use settings of an imported Diwa DeF File Export Text as Unicode fe g For Asian Languages Your CAD program must support this Function and a suitable Font musk be selected 4 ction to be performed after successful export None Display File in DIGLux viewer Open file with the program associated with the File extension Only works if a program has been associated with the extension Fig 452 Options for the export DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 276 DIALux Version 4 7 DWG and DXF Export Legend Isolines Value chart General Object selection Layer Options Luminaires Layer One layer For all luminaires 1 Laver O One layer per luminaire type O Laver One layer per luminaire arrangement 0 Layer Al
19. Paste gt Luminaire Arrangement in the DIALux M enu CEE Lumines pik paaa ley Cebit a few AD Pick Paste IS be E re Bl Ble F ioe om J oT comet Fhamair ante Windies ted does Exterior soene elements O Rivet pls bahting Caledation sufeces fag retea pirar eno taloulation points ja m ere Harizi plan mt m Room Plise Desorption Lunar iter Textures ors lifi craks Dikar hers ph vere ce Eero Praia Sj froti ah r an Lele amp Room i F Trairi Line i reari Paky Lr po im n ipia GI insert Cri Insert Raster Ta T T Fig 183 Alternative solution to insert a direct planar lighting situation After inserting a room click the left mouse button in the CAD window and drag the mouse to generate a rectangle in your actual room This rectangle represents the direct surface which should be illuminated By clicking Paste in the project manager on the left all selected luminaires are inserted into the project respectively into the room giving uniform illumination DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 123 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 184 Insertion of selected luminaries into the direct planar lighting situation The geometry of the direct planar lighting can be modified arbitrarily Therefore choose a point on the selected rectangle and shift it to the preferred position While clicking the right mouse button within th
20. Typical Speed of Main User le Medium Between 30 and 60 kmh Low Between 5 and 30 kmh Walking Speed 5 km h Back Cancel Fig 390 Illumination Class Wizard Typical Speed You can define the admitted main user in the street in the window M ain Users and Other Users Confirm each of your steps by clicking on Next DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 239 DIALux Version 4 7 Illumination Class Wizard Main Users and Other Users Enter the main user type and the other permitted user types Fig 391 Illumination Class Wizard Main Users and Other Users Afterwards you enter the typical weather Tlumination Class Wizard Hain Weather Type Enter the tyoical weather Fig 392 Illumination Class Wizard Main Weather Type In the window Interchanges you choose the kind and frequency of the interchanges DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 240 DIALux Version 4 7 Illumination Class Wizard Interchanges Enter the type and frequency of the interchanges nternange gensity 1 ee m PE r lerr 3 2 DECES PEN RMI 4 Tai ar Err 1 3 PIECES PERNT Fig 393 Illumination Class Wizard Interchanges Specify the traffic flow of motorised vehicles if it concerns vehicles for motorised traffic Illumination Class Wizard Traffic Flow of Motornsed Vehicles Enter the number of vehicles that pass 4 defined point in a defined time usually one day Fig 394 Illumination Class Wiz
21. fo Filename Layer Coordinates system UCS Scale _ Display 20 projection in 3D window Fig 447 Using 2D projection of dwg dxf in 3D view Fig 448 3D view with DXF background You can display or hide the dwg dxf background from the Window toolbar DWG DXF Export You can export the result of your planning in dwg or dxf format and specify the file type dwg or dxf in the Save under dialogue which you can open via Search DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 274 DIALux Version 4 7 DWG and DXF Export Legend lsolines Value chart General Object selection Options Luminaires Mame of file to be saved T4Lux CAD Export dwg Scenes selected For export v Room 1 Select All Cancel Selection Fig 449 General settings for the DWG DXF export DWG and DXF Export Legend Isolines Value chart 2i a General Objectselection Layer Options Luminaires Export luminaires Export object v Export geometry of the scene V Generate legend Export room stamp V Export escape routes w Export isolines V Export value chart Export calculation grid Export sport sites Export Flood light arrows Fig 450 Object selection DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 275 DIALux Version 4 7 DWG and DXF Export Luminaires Active DLXLUM m
22. ka Fig 284 The tape measure icon In the 2D view the tape measure is placed by clicking on two points in the CAD window The end points of the tape measure will snap to grids help lines insertion points of objects and to the bounding box of objects If the snap is not to that point you like it to be just zoom into the scene and the snap will be more accurate i ma i 2 EET T h me e e i a Fig 285 The tape measure function in the ground plan view In the 3D view there are even more distances visible There you can see the direct distance between two points as well as their heights above the floor and the distance on floor level Fig 286 The tape measure function in the 3D view DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 182 DIALux Version 4 7 Working with the snap grid The snap grid is a tool to simplify the handling and the movement of any object in the CAD views The objects will step in the distance that s defined in the snap grid settings The grid distances can be equal in all three directions but can also be different for X Y and Z ee fpem panan tee ai id a ee a te Ea pee d Ls 4 I i Ft el la l i hie a Ea ah ka ori por L a fie ri E Fi Ciba a Fig 287 Fixed grid with a spacing of 0 5m in X and Y direction If you want to move an object for a short period without a grid just hold down the SHIFT key while you place the Object This
23. sai Dewa 1 haa Fig 9 DIALux Light Wizard Data Input One click on Databases starts a manufacturer Plugin In the Plugin you can select the luminaire which you want to use and then click on Apply or Use Then close the Plugin Now DIALux Light shows you the selected luminaire on the right above By default the last used luminaire is always displayed After completing the data entry please click on Next DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 20 DIALux Version 4 7 Dintn ben lan BoR Ee Ee ed ae ee ee a 5 pee ete T nspa dpr arama lt a a i eee kr C F Seren E O T Fig 10 DIALux Light Wizard Launch a Plugin p r Chareeral Lip fei Wher h luminaire are wou looking for 7 bir aie Artele number Hinulichr r DL Auni ohir 7 DAL Ciphkbewohten x ow E l eais reek Lurie Hima BS Mi Leuchie mEt BAP h Lursinaie Type Erzar Ipiegelraster direkestrahlesd beehbglane elexiect Lampe Ladufiu ri z Fig 11 DIALux Light Wizard User Database In the window Calculation and Results DIA Lux Light calculates the number of luminaires by the efficiency method that you need to achieve the desired illuminance You can enter the desired illuminance in the field Planned Em The luminaires which are outside the room are not considered by DIALux Light in the calculation By using the entry Horizontal arrangement or Vertical arrangement you
24. Alternatively you can open the context menu via right click on the street in the project tree and select there the menu Insert optimised luminaire arrangement Project 1 fi Luminaires Used z a i Insert Street Arrangement Insert Street Element Insert Street into Exterior Scene 3D Standard View Fa Floor Plan A Level Symbolic Fo Fa Duplicate Street Scene x Delete Rename Fig 370 Context menu luminaire arrangement The optimisation will be done according to the wizard for the quick street planning The wizard starts in the window valuation field DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 228 DIALux Version 4 7 Street Planning without Wizard By default a street only consists of one roadway with a valuation field at the beginning of a street planning Ls File Edit wiew CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Gutput Window 7 O G hla lha 3 J LrLges pesmu IMA eE EEE ano IEE eu p L Street 1 Floor plan General Maintenance plan method a P PT Leen Hame Street 1 Description 5 00 Hlurninance Conditions Al ki Wizard E Project 1 ly Luminaires Used lag Street 1 E Roadway 1 0 00 Fig 371 Insert a new standard street When you select the street in the Project manager you can adjust some general settings In the Inspector you will find options for the name a detailed description the maintenance factor or the design factor and you can fix
25. Calculation Surface Mame Type Perpendicular llurinance z p Perpendicular luminance Camera Poetical illuminance Meee Gorzontal luminance Semi cylindrical luminance Cylindrical luminance Camera Orentated Illurninance Co Rotation Fig 316 Property Page of calculation surface Selection of the types of illuminance Penetration If calculation areas are penetrated by furniture e g cupboard and working surface these are now DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 196 DIALux Version 4 7 automatically cut out of the virtual planes with DIALux It is not necessary for the user to make any special settings Task Areas Task areas are calculation surfaces that consist of two parts In DIN 5035 T7 and EN 12464 these two parts are defined The two parts are the inner Work Area and the outer Surrounding Area You can edit the polygonal shape of areas by clicking the right mouse button The two parts are defined in the following way o Both areas are plane parallel o The complete task area is positioned within the surrounding area The output shows isoline and greyscale diagram for both areas together Value charts and value tables are listed separately for each area Bice 20 view Room 1 Fior plan ibs Lo rit ial L E p C base D Bid Work irea fata LCase Seah Bice Pt Shon and deiri E Copy Akre a Lins po Dete 10d m LH m Tm uM Fig 317 Edit work area and surrounding area Ca
26. DIALux Light Wizard has been available since DIALux version 3 1 With the help of this wizard it is possible to complete lighting designs quickly and simply This means that infrequent users of DIALux can readily use the program without having to train themselves fully in using the software After the installation you will find the DIALux Light Wizard on your desktop near the normal DIALux icon You can start the wizard by one double click If you have already started DIALux you will find the DIALux Light wizard in the menu File gt Wizards Wizard Selection g xX The following wizards are available y r gt ie DaF Import Field Arrangements Line Arrangements PR vd Quick Planning Professional Quick Arched room L Shaped Room Planning Polygonal Room Rectangular Room Quick Street Planning his wizard guides you through an entire simple planning ren Fig 6 DIALux Light Wizard DIALux Light icon After starting DIALux Light you are welcomed by a startup window In this window the next steps that follow are explained To move to the next window click on Next nk Wealoond to AL ue Light irr four lool fet timpla pol complot planning of tirdid projocts T marae ae Ce ei Pee hy ierg Mri pa eee r Ppr rimpi pi Pom biren he Cac Pee ed ii oe ee ee e a a meP E Jie ee of oe ee poe a ee PP eee Di pe u Fig 7 DIALux Light Wizard Start DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 19 DIALux Version 4
27. Fig 350 Property page for the outputs of the luminous intensity calculation point The luminous intensity calculation point output can be reduced to such luminaires and light emitting surfaces that do not hold a given limitation DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 218 DIALux Version 4 7 Street Valuation Fields in Exterior Scenes DIALux users often expressed their wish to use real situations for street lighting planning That is not possible in a design according to EN 13201 or the obsolete DIN 5044 The standard street does not encompass curves or the possibility of changing single luminaire technical values or positions So we added a new calculation surface for exterior scenes to DIALux which calculates the luminance distribution on a roadway for an observer the Street Valuation Field This calculation considers exactly all luminaires and other objects placed in the exterior scene Indirect light e g reflections from facades is not considered shadowing through trees or buildings is Because of the strict definitions of street lighting standards the results of a Street Valuation Field should be used with extreme caution regarding the limitations of EN 13201 Whereas the standard street considers a certain amount of luminaires in a line in front and behind a single calculation point the new calculation surface considers all luminaires in the exterior scene even luminaires with other tasks Street valuation
28. If this is not important to your scene as in the case that you have a bump map or if you have a strong texture then by all means use a lower number e Error bound The error bound float value is one of the two main speed quality tuning values the other is of course the number of rays shot In an ideal world this would be the only value needed It is intended to mean the fraction of errors tolerated For example if it were set to 1 the algorithm would not calculate a new value until the error on the last one was estimated at as high as 100 Ignoring the error introduced by rotation for the moment on flat surfaces this is equal to the fraction of the reuse distance which in turn is the distance to the closest item hit If you have an old sample on the floor 10 inches from a wall an error bound of 0 5 will get you a new sample at a distance of about 5 inches from the wall The default value of 1 8 is good for a smooth general lighting effect Using lower values is more DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 306 DIALux Version 4 7 accurate but requires a higher count You can use values even lower than 0 1 but both render time and memory use can become extremely high then e Pretrace To control the radiosity pre trace gathering step use the keywords pretrace_start and pretrace_end Each of these is followed by a decimal value between 0 0 and 1 0 which specifies the size of the blocks in the mosaic preview as a percentage of the imag
29. One element of good lighting design is of course complete lighting documentation In accordance with prEN 13032 3 DIALux also provides evaluation of emergency luminaires with regard to glare and optimal positioning in the form of a data sheet Suse fhe i eee es Se ey pa CAL J DAAH maria Date sheni emergency igiling ee il ly Fig 242 Emergency lighting data sheet DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 157 DIALux Version 4 7 Daylight calculation in DIALux DIALux is complemented by the extensive support of daylight calculations Now daylight scenes can be inserted in your project allowing the influence of daylight in the interior and exterior scenes to be simply calculated The different sky models clear overcast partially overcast as well as the direct sunlight influences the calculation Of course location time and alignment as well as the daylight obstruction are taken into consideration with the calculation Basics Since the introduction of version 4 DIALux can calculate daylight No special mode is necessary for this In exterior scenes daylight can be calculated basically and in interiors whenever windows or skylights exist in the room As a base for the calculation the DIN 5034 and the CIE publication 110 were used The sky dome Is divided into parameterised luminous surfaces which get a luminance depending on the sky model location date and time By the option use direct sunlight it is also calculated with the
30. SM oer 1 e ciete Fig 324 Selecting scaling options DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 201 DIALux Version 4 7 Merging calculation grids In DIALux the default setting is that all existing and additionally inserted calculation grids are calculated separately and displayed separately However you have the option to merge two or more calculation grids and have only one output For this just select one calculation grid first with the left mouse button then press the shift key and select one or more calculation grids Via the context menu by clicking with the right mouse button on one of the selected calculation grids you can then finally select the sub item Combine 1 Selecting a calculation 2 Add aditional grid calculation grids a 3 Combining selected Result One surface calculation grids Messer rere lt CJ Fig 325 Step by step procedure for merging calculation grids One possible application for merging or combining calculation grids could be a staircase So that it is not necessary to have an output of the calculation grid of each individual step all the calculation grids of the whole staircase can be merged by following the above described procedure Calculation points in calculation grids As mentioned before there is a basic difference between calculation grids and calculation surfaces in the limited number of calculation points The question therefore DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 202
31. a nasau na S a H Flag Fen m ant bemi Leir j e ari C e ski i j I cmi fa a 1 as be i oe i ii z E 5 4 1 1 E Fig 61 Taking over the shape of a helpline for the room geometry DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 53 DIALux Version 4 7 Optimise Personal Settings The presetting that DIALux has can be changed You can find all the menus for modification under File gt Settings Ctrl M Chrl 0 oS Wizards Import Export ip Print Preview cy Print Ctrl P Settings PW General Options Last Projects Opened Customize Toolbars and Keyboard Exit Fig 62 Menu Settings General Options The menu General Options has 6 tabs with various settings Under Standard Values you can specify the national typical settings Room Dimensions Reflectance Work Plane etc Here you can determine which standard values DIALux should use When creating new rooms these values are used as presets Of course you can change the current planning values or standard presets at any time That means If you want to accomplish calculations for another country you do not have to change each entry individually DIALux has the relevant parameters for all the usual standards and regulations of individual countries Hint These changes do not change the DIALux language setting As an alternative you can change the values individually DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 5
32. response to new material choice You can specify an alternative reflectance directly in the reflectance box File Edit View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection utp Do do ld 3 J Bjs memeS o eB oly Projektmanager Wane Material Color a eas a po x Material Bricks Bricks l h Ba Project 1 Wood flight hy Luminaires Used Fig 103 Properties of a wall Material In the Texture tab you can adapt the texture properties if you have placed a texture on the wall see page 92 In the Raytracer Options tab you can adjust the properties which the wall should have if you have started the Raytracer provided by DIALux DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 76 DIALux Version 4 7 Insert Room Elements Modify a Room with Room Elements With DIALux you have the ability to modify the room with room elements Clicking on the object tab of the Project M anager at the bottom of the screen shows a tree of elements and objects contained in folders that can be introduced into a project For example selecting standard elements with the left mouse button displays a preview window of the elements available Clicking on an element in the preview window shows geometric parameters in the inspector You can either edit these parameters in the inspector to the values you need or later makes changes to the size and scale after putting the element into the project beonetiry Slandard eleme Position nt 0 000 im Yi 0
33. suitable and inadequate Without a substitute list only suitable and inadequate arrangements are possible TOA Swe dge Pii E ee eee F Jea im Eat les i adalh hl ee magai ee Ehle j hl ee Pe LaF gl a I Sones s gue et w ee ee eo tue bee cence eee a cece ee ee Tap a set eee ioe ee et eee eed oe bos i Po em e rj beet muss miej Muia MADE E E i PFE eee ee N ee j A Pe T LITLE Wi Fi ben DL TA F S efi i Pee Pe LS Be ee eee ee ee es ee Le eee oi fae av m il eh oe te J Ery f ean amp oe Far eet ok Ped Goce ed oe eet ie Fr ee ee ey Fe ee bei ee Pri Er i imi e Dre Fig 364 Substitute list The next window allows you to choose a luminaire You can select several luminaires from a manufacturer and compare them with each other Click on Select more to get in the selection mode Attention In general comparisons between manufacturers are not possible Select the luminaires from your list of the recently used luminaires or choose new products from the catalogues installed Via the button Add the current luminaire will DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 225 DIALux Version 4 7 be taken into the list of the Selected luminaires Click the button End selection if you have selected all luminaires which you will take into consideration for the optimisation In the list of the Selected luminaires you can choose every product and have a look at the technical properties or re
34. the illuminance conditions The illuminance conditions can be entered manually or determined by means of the wizard By default your street project always gets an illuminance condition with the designation Al Projektmanager pr General Maintenance plan method Hame Street 1 Description luminance Conditions o Project 1 sS Luminaires Used E a Street 1 E Roadway 1 Fig 372 I luminance conditions The luminance condition is based on the Technical Report of the European committee for standardisation DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 229 DIALux Version 4 7 CEN TR 13201 1 It serves as a basis for the definition of requirements for the street illumination By means of a wizard the respective illuminance condition of the street can be determined systematically The illumination condition wizard can be started using the Wizard button see Fig 372 Illumination Conditions Wizard Illumination Conditions Wizard x Welcome to the Illumination Conditions Wizard This wizard helps you to collect information on the street users Ina step by step manner At the end the illumination conditions are determined and this serves as the basis for defining the street lighting The wizard i based on the prCEN TA 13201 1 technical report from the European Committee for Standardisation To continue click Next Back Cancel Fig 373 Illumination Conditions Wizard Welcome dialogue You can
35. the selection filter must be set accordingly Selection filter ema A ig R Fig 161 Selection filter for CAD selection The fourth icon from the right enables the selection of individual luminaires within an arrangement NOTE A single luminaire is an individual luminaire arrangement Inserting Luminaire Circles At the moment no wizard for positioning luminaire circle arrangements Is available The options are very similar to those already described Additionally we would like to point out the Start Angle and End Angle options DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 112 DIALux Version 4 7 Sao p i it tig L E e i j a if d pme e e bha m E l x ma bii a e Fig 162 Luminaire circle start and end angle When the start angle is 0 the first luminaire Is positioned to the right of the mid point at distance r on a straight line which is parallel to the X axis Positive angles gt 0 are created counter clockwise If the individual luminaires are not rotated the CO level of each luminaire radiates outward Separating Luminaire Arrangements An inserted luminaire arrangement can be separated into individual luminaires by right clicking on the arrangement and selecting split Subsequently the position of the individual luminaires can be modified You can also separate a selected arrangement into individual luminaires via the Edit gt Split Luminaire Arrangement menu option Floodlighting The new fea
36. unwanted range of wavelengths The colour that the user wants to use has to be part of the spectral radiation of the light source For example there is only a small amount of blue light in the spectral distribution of incandescent lamps To get a high saturation of blue light another light source would be better In DIALux there are several hundred colour filters available These are clear filters which had their spectral radiation measured in the photometric laboratory of DIAL According to the usage of these filters they are stored in subfolders in the DIALux colour tree The numbering is according to the numbering of the available product In the preview you can see the colour appearance and the transmission factor when used with standard illuminant D65 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 135 DIALux Version 4 7 Transmission factor using D65 Colour appearance Using D65 Fig 203 Technical information of colour filter To add a filter to a luminaire just drag and drop it onto it All luminaires within the arrangement field line circle or single get that filter To add a filter just to a single luminaire within the arrangement just hold down the SHIFT key while dragging and dropping it The luminaires show the replacement of a filter with blinking for a short time and the light emitting surface will appear in the colour of the filter if available including the colour of the light source If you want to use a filter with all lu
37. 000 m Z 0 000 hh z k l l 1 000 m Bl 0 000 mo 1 000 Sere tates found z4 a Standard elements Room elemerts BR Wirde ered doors 4 Exterior scene cements How Be Sport Faciitaes Bl Saloulotion sueFaces Be Caka as ta Cabau rid i LM Calculation Grid Files 4 E Spet p Purreture Files 4 y Dudar 7 ALus dz a y mndar oe mo er rd i 3 a a p Al E Fig 104 Inserting a standard element In the case of a cone it can be truncated by entering a size for 1 other than zero The cone is constructed with a regular polygon as its base the segment count is the number of sides the polygon has Clicking on Paste adds the element to the project in the CAD window at the origin Alternatively the Drag and Drop technique can be used left mouse click on the element in the preview and while holding the button down drag to place the element in either the 3D view or plan view whichever is open DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 77 DIALux Version 4 7 A right click on the element in the CAD window shows a context menu that includes scale and rotate With scale selected the bounding box around the element can be stretched in the X and Y direction to scale it In the 3D view and elevation views the height can be scaled by hold the control key on the keyboard and stretching the bounding box in the Z direction With rotate selected in the context menu the handles connected
38. 08 116 IIE 115 116 116 IIE 117 117 izi E j 131 1 OO iit Tb ie HE 1 Oe Tir Ot iil 131 1 mo LS a Te eS OAI e OS Anena The coodingies refer to ee miragi abit Values in Lux Gnd G z bd Pens gz a E jix Fig 426 Monitor output of a big table Scroll bars are located at the window edges If you use the middle mouse button the scroll icon appears and you can navigate by moving the mouse You can use the print preview to view the printout on the monitor before it is printed DIA Lux supports DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 261 DIALux Version 4 7 WYSIWYG What you see is what you get To go to the print preview use the File gt Print Preview option Please keep in mind that only the output types that were selected with a black checkmark are included in the print preview and in the printout Depending on the size of the report generating the output can take some time An information window displays the current status SSS t t KI es Cancel Generate solines L Fig 427 Print preview generation status The print preview supplies you with an overview of the chosen output Fig 428 Print preview Here you can also specify further print settings depending on your printer For larger print jobs it is advised that you send multiple print jobs consecutively e g Page 1 30 Page 31 55 If the RAM is quite large gt 128 MB this is not required Limit Result Output In the Project manager
39. 298 DIALux Version 4 7 Near to the end points and in the middle between two points there are green symbols By clicking on these symbols a new point is inserted into the camera path If the red symbol is clicked the associated point is deleted Fig 490 Deleting camera positions At all the points there are thin green lines drawn These lines are defining the viewing direction of the camera The small ball at the end of these lines can be moved with the mouse To move into the Z direction hold down the control key Fig 491 Defining the camera viewing direction DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 299 DIALux Version 4 7 The camera is moving along the path from point one to point two It is turned during the movement according to the viewing directions in point one and two If you want to have more rotations on the way from point one to point two you have to insert more points directly on the path only changing the viewing direction and not the position of the path The camera is not following strictly the path The path Is converged to the edges That makes the video smoother and there is no judder effect Save vale Video proper Ges Se of videi 3I a P40 oe ia Images per scone 25 PAL 9 Firea 3 se0nnds Chualily 7 Anti aliasing CAPT A Pane Humber of panis 2 i Range 5 40 E Speni 0 18 mjs Pre Fig 492 Settings of the video Besides the camera path and the camera viewing direction
40. 7 By default as mentioned above the gradient grid lies on the calculation and if applicable also on the measuring grid Under Distance for gradient grid you can change the distance value in the gradient grid individually Display settings In DIALux calculation grids enable the direct display of results in CAD This is especially useful in the planning phase of a project In the tab Display of the Inspector for calculation grids the following information can be displayed e grid points e measuring direction e calculated values e isolines e false colours i ore eT ater fas a i ag ae F ates el 1E r 1 isir meie fee nee dgn mu Fi x foe ees te Ena ei ie aj red eee ip Ie a eT ee rh rie iP ta E bop j re ee eo al ae a Li Sainte ge Tre le en ee mL ar Tema beng ck mine Dg T a a i Ti Fig 332 Changing an output option Display values Real time calculation Often after making changes you want to see the results immediately in CAD but do not wish to run a calculation of the project beforehand DIA Lux allows the option in the tab Real time calculation of selecting which illuminance you wish to have displayed in CAD You can select between e perpendicular e horizontal e vertical DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 207 DIALux Version 4 7 camera oriented at least one camera must be inserted beforehand These can be found in the project manager under Sports complexes The d
41. 7 In the window Project Information you enter your data and the data of your customer Both will appear later on the printout After completing the data entry please click on Next ara je ede Len g armam in ey ee oe F a Popes of ee Face 1 Peg Sore James HE gee D i l a ea a h d j as i ia E ae T ar meai Fel Mee ia i Feee Peen pa P t S 3 Fae i Pe eg i rti SC if he Pe ihik med eel a N jure Pri ae UPa EE ee Pi pri ay as pairis Com Fik ae Tamer f Mimi pear lel dies T LTH Tii n io a i iras i agrim iei ligean m janta Cheech tae ign ey Pa re a a ee ie a ee cree Fig 8 DIALux Light Wizard Project information In the window Data Input you specify the room geometry on the left hand side By default DIALux Light produces a rectangular room If you check the box Use L Shaped Room DIALux Light shows a L shaped room Enter the relevant dimensions with regard to the room figure drawing You can change on the left hand side the reflectance of the ceiling walls and floor The wall reflectance selected applies to all the walls ela brga Bee F gue ogee ip a oe Calg ra a E Peete Coke wi fE a hc Scr pet okey eer aa l narm a rapra F Tii ive Eo rem iF of Ua Pere iasg Tee rte HAN a Pe Paap Egh ge h ee F hy hohe ee gure rigi tgs see hee e fie eee L vil 1 BiA tiia iin
42. Anraal bumimg im fin 100 Purs 2ER Heplacernenl interval ampa Annually Lamin pe Trienhosphonus fucescant lame lacc i Soa lamp repacement Yas Room Hraci mamberance acter Lemaire era a metas Pato i L mi lumen manlerance ladir oo Lamp survival factor 1 00 Mainiunance lector Dat Meade shares lhe corre spending malnuciersd of the resoecles manubedurers whee malay lumina ares liii Fig 87 Output Maintenance plan Extended method for determining maintenance factor The user can determine if required also the maintenance factor for a singly used luminaire arrangement The extended maintenance method must be selected from the room Property Page DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 67 DIALux Version 4 7 COO BOS SS eS ee or ere soui Bkh epik Projektmanager General Maintenance plan method Room Surfa 4 All inclusive Maintenance factor fo s0 Reference Please select an application e Extended EN 12464 Ambient conditions Normal B Maintenance Annually gt semi annual rs Annually E Project 1 Ever 1 5 years niss Luminaires Used Every 2 0 years Ei Room 1 Even 2 5 Fig 88 Selection of the determination of the enlarged maintenance factor For the room or the exterior scene the ambient condition is chosen Here the user can select beside three given situations clean normal and polluted very clean which appears in the Trilux book Planning help 12464 Next yo
43. CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Gti i el i Reo Bed feted band Led ed Lid BC em rd Ee Luminaire Mounting arrangement Lurepame DIAL OBS Hacha Ee co Fig 85 Technical data of the placed luminaire Because the luminous flux and the correction factor have an influence on the number of luminaires required these values can be edited here B ge pR Yew GAD pase Luminaire Selection Gi wv rere ET kks ts TE ER LS eB eE ls Projekbnianager humne Mounting arrangement Quant Dmae JOBS m Start Pow W foo it o JAU m Eni Pont W SAU m wo LEU m E 0 e Suggestion Planing waha Aa bs Bil bs Mem Gotik P52 be Meuring cunlace Mourded oe from a Fig 86 Determination of the luminaire number of pieces In DIALux the utilisation factor method is defined by the CIE to determine roughly the right number of luminaires for all luminaire arrangements By using this method the expected initial illuminance as well as the maintained illuminance is indicated Additionally the initial and maintained value for the whole room is likewise indicated The user can see immediately the contribution from this luminaire arrangement compared with the DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 66 DIALux Version 4 7 whole layout of luminaires In this case the values are different because other luminaires are in the room In the outputs the maintenance factor is shown as before on different output pages For example
44. For working levels a Draw Luminaires Isoline Values Font Size pt E Value Chart Font Size pt Scale of graphics Maximum size O Optimal standard scale Ooo Header Display file path Display file name Project details Names For edit fields Attention Changes do not affect existing outputs The entries only applies to new output Fig 68 General Options Output In the last tab Contact you can register your name and address Here the address of the company doing the layout planning is entered It appears in the output header These entries are used in the Property Page of the project Information about the operator is entered here too This is then transferred in each new project DIALux 4 7 Standard Values Global CAD window Output Contact Energy Evaluation Window Rooflights Cankact Company Attention The modifications only affect new projects Old and currently opened projects are nok affected Fig 69 General Options Contact If the Customise function is selected which you can access via menu File gt Settings gt Customize Toolbars and Keyboard you can select the toolbars which you need most frequently As soon as you launch this function you can alter the existing Toolbars With the left mouse button you can drag the functions which you DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 58 Menu Reset user interface DIALux Version 4 7 do
45. Gide 4 Pe aows ea REGRES BEG Pe lt a Sah b Str et 1 Poor plan al Lavrlrs 1 Fig 378 Insert and arrange the street elements Optionally you can insert street elements in the menu Paste gt Street Element DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 232 DIALux Version 4 7 L File Edit View CAD Luminaire Selection Output Window 7 mi Me Be New seer a K EN oh AIRIS Luminaire Arrangement t i TEPFT es e a e y gi Lay bys g A Sidewak Ma Furniture Maintenance pla Gereral Maintenance pla x 4 6 Room elements Windows and doors Exterior scene elements P Grass Strip ae Bicycle Lane Calculation surfaces E Emergency Lane Calculation points 5 00 rd Textures Control group Light scenes aes Ei Project 1 i Luminaires Used 2 a q Street 1 H a Roadway 1 Fig 379 Insert street elements via menu or by means of the right mouse in the context menu of the street a Bie gde yew AD foke luminen jin gup iiw O Fda AAA a JLo pa Akaan a a EE Propentreareager street 1 Hoor Gereral etmeeap ates arrangeres a a bosa Insert Street into Cerio Scene _ ih Bicycle Lane EET FH E Gewergereny Lana Pl Deor pink Level Simboicy po Gi urbys Engki abe Sire Scene k Gen Rrip al z K Delete i E Berean Fi
46. GmbH Ludenscheid page 291 DIALux Version 4 7 d gt Name and Description Calculate Results Power Times Occupancy Daylight Artificial Ligl 4 gt Ground area 20 00 m Occupancy dependency Factor 0 85 Direct input of energy demands ignore all parameters Energy demands Absence Factor Lighting 210 00 kWh a From utilisation profile of the zone Parasitic Standby a kwh a Occupancy control Factor Parasitic Emergency 1 00 kWhfa d With Occupancy Sensor Total kwhja Fig 477 Direct input of energy consumption values in unlinked energy evaluation rooms M ost parameters can be edited in the usual manner others can only be read and some others can be edited normally and additionally are resettable to an internally calculated value Power Times Control Occupancy Daylight illi Occupancy dependency factor 0 90 Absence Factor 0 20 Occupancy control factor 0 90 Typical Values Fig 478 Occupancy parameters of an assessment zone in EN 15193 left and in DIN 18599 right Within an EN planning the parameters Absence Factor and Occupancy Control Factor can both be edited in the usual way Both have even a supporting functionality to set them to typical values The parameter Occupancy Dependency Factor results from these two parameters by expressions and formulas from the EN 15193 One can easily understand that by changing one of the first two pa
47. Insert a ground element from the furniture tree via Drag amp Drop You can edit a ground element similar to the rooms see Edit mode They can have any polygonal shape When you enable the option Result Output in the Property Page Calculation Grid DIALux will create the relevant output You can place furniture and luminaires in the same way as in the rooms of an indoor project Ground Elements A ground element can only be used in an exterior scene It is an area with a defined shape and an arbitrary height that may for example differ from the rest of the scene only because of its function _ ee a i maer od ial a 2 i F il TET i i a LE N F il 3 i SEHR By Te oe a p Eliane l ee Fia e ite il free ep oo eee ee ee Fig 344 A ground element By default a ground element has a rectangular shape and a height of 0 0 m If you modify the height the ground element is extruded consists of a top surface and sides If DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 214 DIALux Version 4 7 you want to modify the shape of the ground element you can switch to the Edit mode with a right click The Inspector shows the different surfaces of the ground element You can change their material independently and you can select if the different surfaces will be listed in the calculation output A ground element can appear asa hole inside of another ground element The grey ground element and the selected ground
48. Interface sseessesssnserrnssnrnrrrnnnerrnssnnes 34 The Project Manage ccris nirt 38 The LUMINAIre selecto enano 39 The User Database s sessssrrsnersrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrns 40 Insert Luminaire Files into DIALUX ccccseesseeseeeeeees 40 PANO PIUGINS coor a 41 The FUMUS MEE srar AEAEE 44 The Colours Tree since version 4 3 formerly Texture TOE renia 44 TNE QUEDUT TEE yenen a 46 THE GUE nseni a 47 AWG ISO CCCOM nn E ss 48 GVO GC tanstec Acasa cosets eames Adcetdate sites Mien it ey 50 Optimise Personal Settings cccccseeeessseseeseeeeeseeeeerens 54 General OPTIONS eunen aan 54 Direct3D as an alternative to OpenGL 56 Create a New Proje Ct cccccsssssccceseeeceeaneeeeeesaeeeeersaees 60 OPEN A NEW Proje Teamen 61 Project information in the file open dialog 6 62 EAIC ROOMS ivattriterncneater Gini eee ariatiniatos 63 Edit ROOM GEOMEUY siieiiissccsccnnesievenareesiaamaseravensnd 63 EG ROOM Daldivcsscsikcictesinccotuctedicenita ANNE 64 An easy method for determining maintenance factor E Deeb aisle seaua tee E E E T eae 65 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 4 DIALux Version 4 7 Extended method for determining maintenance factor P EE A E EE E EEEE TEA 67 M odify Properties of Individual Walls aneen 75 Insert ROOM ELEMENTS ninian a 71 Modify a Room with Room Elements sens 71 Vault and half vault aassssessssesnnsrrnnsrrnssrrnserrserrnens 80 Insert via Property Page cscscccsssseseees
49. Preferences Quick preferences Render image with POV Ray Indirect calculation Brightness preferences Quick preference Image preferences Picture properties Image size Joo x 240 y Smoothing edges 5 _ amp utoburnpmaps Lighting preferences Subdivide luminaires Indirect calculation User defined v Project preferences Directory in which the POY Ray project is generated this is where the calculated image is Finally located C Dokumente und Einstellungen PE deutsche Additional settings eid Display outer walls of rooms transparently Fa W E Generate floor Fs a 7 Show daylight obstruction me ed Options marked with markedly lengthen calculation time but at the same time improve image quality Fig 494 Basic settings for Raytracing In the quick preferences tab there are the following settings e Picture properties Here you can define the size of the generated picture in pixels length x height The larger the number of pixels the larger is the final result In addition a large picture extends the calculation time e Smoothing edges Anti aliasing This feature improves the transitions at edges e g from walls This should be activated if textures with lines are used like tiles bricks or pavement This setting uses a lot of calculation power so it should not be used for preview pictures Not only textures are smoothed also the edges o
50. Redo camera view Redo positions DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 172 DIALux Version 4 7 Wireframe Model With DIALux there is the option to change into the wireframe mode This is so that you can work on an older computer without judder when moving in the 3D view You can find the function in the menu View gt Wireframe Display It is quicker to use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl W site Po biveeie i Fig 268 Changing into the wireframe mode DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 173 To change the height of an object via the mouse keep the Ctrl button pressed DIALux Version 4 7 Editing Inserted Objects Moving Objects After luminaires and furniture have been placed inside the room they can be edited as desired The Inspector displays all information relevant to the object which was selected in the Project manager or CAD view This object can be modified by entering new values If an object Is modified in the CAD view rotated moved or scaled the values in the Inspector are updated Qta 2 Pear plas piem I view 48 Fig 269 Graphically modifying the object height To modify the position of a body along the Z axis press the control Ctrl key Keep the button pressed while you click on the arrow cross within the body As long as the left mouse button and the Ctrl key are pressed only the height of the object can be modified When you release the Ctrl key you can modify the X and Y
51. W oaan e nciameanasins 62 78 Edit Rooms Generate a NEW room sssessrrseerrrrrrees 63 79 Edit Rooms Insert room coordinates 63 80 Edit Rooms Zoom to the overall view of the scene 63 81 Edit ROOMS 3D VIEW ccccesssseseeseeesersneesersaeeeesaness 64 82 Edit room data General ccccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 64 83 Edit room data Maintenance plan method 65 84 Edit room data Selection of a reference value for the maintenance factor cccccessseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeens 65 85 Technical data of the placed luminaire 66 86 Determination of the luminaire number of pieces 66 87 Output Maintenance plan ccccceeeeccesseseeeeeeeeees 67 88 Selection of the determination of the enlarged maintenance factor essssseessrrrererrrrreerrrrrrrsn 68 89 Technical settings of luminaires with different luminous emitte S n 68 90 Determination of the number of required luminaires 69 91 Property Page M aintenance factor 70 92 User defined maintenance factors cccceessseeseesenees 71 93 Insert another arrangement in the same room 72 94 Show maintenance factors in the CAD via menu 72 95 Icon Show maintenance factors in the CAD 73 96 Menu Edit Edit Maintenance Factors 73 97 Context menu of the luminaire arrangement Edit MAINTENANCE Factors ceeeseceseeeeeesaeeseesaness 73 98 View of the maintenance factors of individual luminaires in the CAD cccse
52. apaa As eS as r a es AL a Pry ee a HN L e a Fig 49 Save a 3D rendering as jpg file The Guide The Guide accesses all work steps required for the planning It provides a connecting thread and helps you achieve your aims quickly The Guide a x Indoor Lighting o Insert New Room fa Load OXF file by Edit Room Geometry E insert celings ground and CORTES Insert equipment me Place Furniture Select Texture Click on the button to get all options Insert tumrare Fie i l D Insert Line Arrangement Click on an icon the 3 Insert Crde Arrangement corresponding op Calculation objects tion is accessed d Insert calculation surfaces Insert caleulstion points We oh ee Outdoor Lighting Street Lighting Light scenes Emergency Lighting Daylight 2 608 m 0 000 m MUM Fig 50 The Guide DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 47 Display Guide window The Inspector The Inspector displays the Property Pages which contain the properties of the selected object here Room 1 DIALux Version 4 7 If you click on an icon in The Guide the corresponding option is directly accessed If you hold the mouse pointer on Indoor Lighting all options for planning a room will be available You can adapt the guide to your individual wishes With this function you can hide and unhide respective application fields If The Guide is hidden you can access it with DIALux 4 7 the functio
53. as long as only direct light is taken into account without reflection When reflected light has to be considered the mistake made in the calculation can be serious This depends on the spectral reflection of the material and the spectral distribution of the light sources Technical data of luminaires mainly describe the distribution of the light Well known examples are the DIALux internal ULD format CIBSE TM 14 EULUM DAT IES and others The data describes the intensity of light from the light centre of the luminaire in defined directions Unfortunately there is no information about the spectral distribution of the light from the light source given Typically text informs the user which lamp is used e g T5 49W 830 The expert knows that this is a triohosphor fluorescent lamp with a correlated colour temperature of 3000K and a colour rendering index greater than 80 The colour of light is now more or less described but not for a correct calculation If light is to be calculated correctly including the colour information it is absolutely necessary to know the spectral distribution spectral lightcalculation Material Lamp Result Fig 193 Spectral light calculation In this diagram you can see the spectral distribution of the light source green and the spectral reflection factor of a material red in the visible spectrum The reflected light from this surface would
54. axis you can now move up and down axis of the wall It can be any other surface as well tilted floor furniture The working area is reset when the left mouse button is released and another object is selected To deactivate the preset pick M oving and Rotating Objects without Pick Grid grid press the shift button When you move the object via the mouse it only moves 4 within the preset pick grid If you press the Shift key shir while you move the object the pick grid is deactivated The grid settings to be used when the pick is deactivated can also be preset Select CAD gt Pick Options gt Set Pick Grid Display Grid Snap Grid Angle Pick Colors ee eee ee eee Distance x 1 000 m y 1000 mi Displacement x 0 000 mo y 0 000 m Fig 271 Pick grid settings Display Grid DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 175 lt Tabulator gt DIALux Version 4 7 Display Grid Snap Grid Angle Pick Colors V Snap Grid Active Distance x 0 100 m Distance y 0 100 m Distance z 0 100 mi Smallest Unit when Snap is Deactivated 0 001 m Equal Distance in All Directions Fig 272 Pick grid settings Snap Grid Display Grid Snap Grid Angle Pick Colors W Angle Snap Active Step Width 5 00 D Fig 273 Pick grid settings Angle Pick Display Grid Snap Grid Angle Pick Colors Select Colours for Display Grid CI Help Lines E Ruler Help Levels Automatic Help Lines
55. been applied If however the room Is enlarged again the luminaire is automatically reinserted You can edit ground elements of an exterior scene in a similar way To insert a ground element into the exterior scene use The Guide or the furniture tree De ee ae z F ErP EITE E i Jj ax RARI S Belo fj i aria ht Ei Ss 2S Pay UL i l Ta om oa p eee es ra 1a r i mE Fig 59 Edit a ground element DIALux can handle calculation surfaces with any shapes You can click with the right mouse button to edit the calculation surface For example you may create a polygonal task area above a polygonal desk DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 52 DIALux Version 4 7 ETET STirvrre E i hoani al AELK i apie f a Bms eee Pee me te bam pees Ea jia E mma ge Fig 60 Create a polygonal Task Area above a desk If there are already help lines placed in the room or exterior scene their shape can be used for the surface which is currently in the edit mode This is very helpful if firstly the shape of a template DXF DWG has been copied with a helpline and secondly this shape should be taken over for the surface room ground element calculation surface or extrusion volume This function is started when making a right click on a helpline while the surface Is in edit mode ee ae es i i F Pa ji b mE 4 i im i Pat Pel l oa on oo a Ef a gang i be peste 4 i Ll f
56. before or after a calculation The output types which are not affected by the calculation results can be viewed at any time for example the project cover sheet luminaire parts lists luminaire coordinates room coordinates etc M ost output types need to be calculated first If one of these output types is opened when there are no results yet DIALux enquires whether the calculation should be performed When you double click on the desired page in the Project manager it is displayed in the CAD window DIALux differentiates between print output and monitor output The monitor output enables experts to easily evaluate only the required information without being limited by layout and page size Big tables are displayed completely and can be viewed by scrolling Here it is handy to use the middle mouse button a Table 1 ab x aand Fr Ee TA r Let w7 iA 410 450 450 ir i 0 078 WA 36 a4 ral xay aay 41a 418 450 450 un DAF EEF aif J 5 we Na FIJ T 4l aii is DJA Th ECF a 355 4 ary ay H 244 421 Al iH a75 314 Md TE TR wi Wi Tri 70 7 7 F i i ip i i DEI HA De U FU cP db U JA E aP m a aro ify fot Fai ai Rit E L al Ea iF i 1 54 25 I J37 27 E w 55 2 2 2H i re 2S W COC 263 E E W 35 i Diz 16 1 a W3 TO i it 2G A SH D ii Ths Tks 173 fa T DEY IEE 1 ALI AL AE 195 im ik W CUI 1H i q 1H i54 1 i O53 im im iid if is 1 1i iD Ia i i D7 1S iF F 125i LF F iit la il 141 14 1 D H is Mm MH it TH I i37 i i id l i 0
57. button b pa Ff i r m me s J of Tiere EITE ET F ATL Qe ata A A EIEE T l pesa a pabed Ei ae Lt M dirs amam b s a i a d ae m DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 188 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 300 Move the complete poly line by holding down the ALT key Circular help line The circular help line can be placed by first defining the mid point and then the radius Copy along a help line Any help line can be used to be the copy and paste path of any object Any object and any object combination can be copied along a help line e g furniture luminaries Calc surface furniture To start that function the help line has to be available in the scene The object that has to be copied along a help line has to be in the scene as well If you want to copy combined objects you have to place them correctly next to each other first The position in the room exterior scene does not matter at all E E ra Be PS T Fag AG dar Bs Fig 301 Copy along a help line with the mouse Start with selecting the object to be copied Than make a right click and select Copy along a help line from the context menu Now there is a symbol at the mouse to select the desired help line that should be used as a path where the object should be copied along When the mouse is above a help line a small hook appears that tells you that this help line can be selected The line Is selected with a left click ow F PP PP F
58. calculation results for a number of selected points You can use horizontal calculation points vertical calculation points and free calculation points Pere eer OTER E Japan PERACTO ON eE Cerere r a i a fiT j m efpot x TE ar fg ae orn j a ees a ales i Be ee ee ee Ta Sh i Fa tes Ep mm Fig 338 Calculation points Horizontal calculation points shown at the right side of the figure above cannot be rotated They always measure the planar illuminance of the perpendicular incoming light Vertical calculation points shown at the left side of the figure above can be turned about the Z axis They can measure the planar normal illuminance the semi DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 210 DIALux Version 4 7 cylindrical illuminance or the cylindrical of the incoming light This type can be selected in the Property Page Free calculation points can be rotated about all axes They measure the planar illuminance of the light incoming in the direction of the arrow The output lists of all calculation points are on one page Calculation Points List They are sorted according to their type planar semi cylindrical cylindrical and their designation The summary of the results shows maximum minimum and average value Calculation points are a good tool to get the illuminance of stairs blackboards etc UGR Calculation A major enhancement of DIALux affects the
59. directly select a surface from an object a wall etc or select the particular object wall etc and then click Surfaces in the project manager Name Geometry Surfaces Origin Cah P Surface 1 Material Calculating Grid T4 gt Surface 2 nh EMCEE Rho 30 Yo Surface 6 Transparency 0 oh Roughness 0 ey Mirror effect Material v Metal O Plastics Fig 134 Opening the material dialogue of a surface Colour In Colour you can define the colour of a surface In the first list you will find the primary colour of your selected surface Dependent on the reflection and the selected transparency you are able to choose a resulting colour in the second list Reflection Rho The value for reflection Rho indicates how much of the arriving light is being reflected Please mind that values over 80 are barely present in practical life Therefore DIA Lux is limited to a value of 90 Transparency The value for transparency shows contrary to reflection how much of the arriving light diffuses through a surface In Raytracer preview and in PovRay Raytracer as well those surfaces will be visualised transparent Please mind that the sum of transparency and grad of reflection cannot exceed 100 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 95 DIALux Version 4 7 Calculation of transparency DIALux 4 7 takes transparent surfaces into account for calculation Please choose for the surface of an object or a mater
60. distribution From Quantity 6 to width Either specify the quantity or the step width ha Save as user default Fig 455 DWG and DXF export Isolines DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 278 DIALux Version 4 7 DWG and DXF Export A m A Options Luminaires Value chart Layer General Object selection Legend solines Tee rsicite Info in units of the DWG DXF File Select value positions Number of values Automatically as high a number as possible in each scene depending on the text height Standard grid for each scene separately O Fix same For all scenes 2 x 2 Fig 456 Export of the value chart in dxf and dwg You can specify the scope of the contents to be exported The use of the settings of the original DWG or DXF file makes sense if you would like to integrate the DIALux planning there again DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 279 DIALux Version 4 7 STF Interface The STF interface is supported by DIALux since version 1 0 The interface is continuously extended and improved Via STF CAD programs can exchange their planning data with DIALux The workflow is normally as follows Design in the CAD application by the architect engineer Design of the building the storey or the room s If necessary the luminaire positions can be defined in the CAD application as well for example in the case of a redevelopment or if the luminaires have
61. don t have good support of OpenGL DIALux is now also able to use Direct3D for the visualisation Several graphic card drivers offer a better support for Direct3D than for OpenGL We recommend working in OpenGL mode If some problems in the visualisation or even crashes occur you should switch over to Direct3D mode If your graphics card doesn t support this mode you will have to work in the MESA mode This is the slowest mode but it is also the most reliable The graphic mode can be selected from the Windows All Programs menu by selecting Start Options for DIALux or you can define the standard mode for your PC in file gt settings gt general options gt CAD window fm DIALux z fm Start Options t S DlALux 4 7 Direct30 BS otatux 4 7 BM Cilu 4 7 Mesa BM cilu 4 7 Light I B DIALUx 4 7 Opencl Fig 66 Start options DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 56 DIALux Version 4 7 DIALux 4 7 Standard Values Global CAD Window Output Contact Energy Evaluation Window Rooflights Background Colours 2D Window Select graphics driver Modifications here are only effective after restarting DIALux Use secure graphics mode Mesa driver Use OpenGL system driver hardware OpenGL or Microsoft Open GL driver E Use DirectsD Driver Additional Settings Enable anti aliasing fonly with Direck3D and where available Coordinate arrows visible in 3D North arrow hidden in 0 position Fig 67 Graphic mode
62. duns CETE iv i Peaji PR SELIG E E le Bee oo bo tal T e Healy f a Fha me a ia a Tapn ee Pari 2 E r Fig 310 Context menu CAD Align and distribute DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 193 DIALux Version 4 7 Ja r ha mpi r i ab aT i i Ie i i lt 3 ji a a A AS are es f i Ce iba F p EE A e ee ae O ae ai Te Fia jaa Taj H a ee o a E E fs pma Laas ae Fig 311 Menu Edit Align and distribute Centre objects in the room This is a very useful tool to centre luminaires separated by a modular spacing for example a 600mm ceiling grid in the middle of a room The luminaire arrangement will be placed in the middle of the room after defining the number of luminaires and the distance between them ee ai Fig 312 Align and distribute centred in space DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 194 DIALux Version 4 7 Calculation Surfaces and other Calculation Objects In the furniture tree you can insert calculation surfaces or task area in DIALux To do this simply select Calculation surfaces and move the appropriate object via Drag amp Drop into a CAD window Musik ass Penden NG hamapuani Log mh Emei ii fad a 42 aj LEE 2 5 B af Te mE eiee m a eee a p 7 a g my L bme Vit lees lee p r pes afe arm kafe _ sie afr i lal i a oe ae Le Be Se re es iiia bia aF Fig 313 Inserting calculation surfaces or task areas Calculatio
63. element in the figure above are such holes that are cut out of the green meadow In this example DIALux will not create calculation results for these parts of the outer meadow Floodlight Illumination To calculate the floodlight illumination of objects or buildings you start with an exterior scene On top of the ground element you place the object you want to illuminate Now you can select a surface of the object and enable the option Output Results rt kh hee ie i Ad A i TACE x iE pi ri i EER el E aa ee H i OR r Bj benm wm j ea Fig 345 Calculate results of a surface Or you can place a calculation surface in front of the object EEEIEE OTTE i Ee barbers al SEDI Bi Ble of aes Eene eml Fee pam kt am yoa DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 215 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 346 Illumination of a facade with a calculation surface in front of it Lighting Design according to prEN12464 Part 2 EN8995 2 Glare Rating The draft of EN 12464 2 EN 8995 2 intends that glare has to be avoided for outdoor working places To ensure this glare limits for tasks and activities are prescribed The glare rating system GR is defined in the CIE publication 112 1994 For glare evaluation the veiling luminances produced by the luminaires and by the environment are the basic criteria The latter is handled differently by EN 12464 2 In DIALux you can choose whether you want to use the simplified method o
64. field Fig 351 Calculation surface Street valuation field A Street Valuation Field consists of two parts the calculation surface itself and a corresponding observer The surface Is visible in CAD windows and can be changed as needed It can even be polygonal The observer position and his viewing direction define the calculation grid of the surface This grid is displayed by little crosses in the CAD Grid point counts are able to be changed initially there are 10 x 3 grid points Initially the observer is placed 60 m to the left from the start of the surface This is the observer position in a standard street The position can be changed as needed His viewing direction is 0 that is in direction of the positive X axis Therefore the grid points are initially parallel to the X axis as well DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 219 DIALux Version 4 7 e Observer Beobachter X Calculation point Berechnungspunkt amp Luminaire Leuchte Fig 352 Simple Street valuation field in an exterior scene X m amp e Observer Beobachter X Calculation point Berechnungspunkt Luminaire Leuchte Fig 353 Complex Street valuation field in an exterior scene The first graphic shows a simple example for Street Valuation Fields It is very close to a standard street from EN 13201 only luminaire positions are different The second graphic shows a more complex example The observer is placed in the sid
65. have the spectral distribution as shown by the orange line Up to now this DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 129 DIALux Version 4 7 effect was not taken into account by the calculation For the light source the radiation was constant over the visible spectrum The amount was defined by the luminous flux For the material also the reflection factor was taken as constant over the visible spectrum non spectral lightcalculation 380 430 480 530 580 630 680 730 780 wavelength Fig 194 Non spectral light calculation That this effect leads to serious errors calculating coloured light or coloured material is obvious DIALux can now take into account the spectra of light sources the spectra of colour filters and materials The luminous flux of the lamp Is now distributed to the individual wavelengths according to the data given in the spectral distribution Because of this the results are more accurate and the visualisation Is improved Now all colour effects can be displayed in the rendering Lamp spectrum Light colours Lamps can have a spectrum already defined in the luminaire Plugin or in the lamp Plugin In that case the user does not have to do any additional spectra selection to take colour into account in the light calculation Some luminaire manufacturers offer their own luminaire catalogue in combination with filter and lamp spectra In the colour tree of DIALux you can
66. help for more details To create a round view the camera type cylinder Is useful Especially in exterior scenes interesting views can be created To define such a view the user has to enter the command cylinder 1 in the area of camera Use 180 for the angle It is important to select a correct image size If you want to have a picture of 500 to 120 the picture ratio has to be 4 2666 The following image is calculated with a 180 degree viewing angle and a cylindrical camera Fig 510 Exterior scene visualisation DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 315 DIALux Version 4 7 2 3 POV Ray for Windows Eda Beret Text Fditen Insert Render Options Teo GUJ Extensions Help see tf Bp oe s ew Open hose Quewe Ferup 000x400 AA 0 3 lone ek CAAA i P gional bettings heds TJAT APR LES TLIGNT ETI mha O87 Th Ook Fignt up va Bni per EAMLOT ATION EE AU T O TE z 1 Lak AT k AL Cee T angle T Ah ar Fig 511 Settings camera location Animation Animation with Keyframes You can create videos in DIALux with selecting Menu gt File gt Export gt Save 3D Video You have to define a camera path and several other parameter see M aking videos in DIALux If you create a PovRay visualisation after defining the camera path most of the work for making a PovRay video is done Load the created pov file into the PovRay editor Make sure that y
67. hierarchy OT Project cs Furniture Textures oy Luminaire Selection Output ka Fig 39 Project manager The Project manager enables a fast workflow with the elements used in your lighting design Each individual element can be selected and its properties can be viewed and modified in the Inspector The Project manager includes the Inspector and the respective tree structure project furniture colour luminaire selection and output The project in this example called BEW Wermels kirchen organises the global project information such as the name and address of the operator and the customer as well as all rooms exterior scenes streets and luminaires In the luminaire list all luminaires used in this project are listed which were selected from a Plugin via Use Here the alternative luminaires which have not yet been used in this layout are also organised e The room consists of the following sub objects room defining surfaces floor ceiling walls work plane furniture and luminaire arrangements e An exterior scene consists of the sub objects ground element furniture and luminaire arrangements e A street consists the sub objects street elements roadways and lanes parking lanes sidewalk grass strip bicycle lane and emergency lane and the luminaire arrangement DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 38 DIALux Version 4 7 If you select one of these elements left click its pro
68. is valid for all grids and help lines To make the snap grid a visible tool as well use the same settings for the display grid as you do it for the snap grid The colour can also be changed to have a better contrast for example against a background DWG file Automatic help lines Those objects which are already placed in a room or exterior scene can be used to align other objects Moving an object you will recognize that in orthogonal direction there is a higher gravity than in any other direction So moving along X Y or Z axis is simple Those objects bounding boxes of furniture walls luminaries room elements which are already in the scene can create automatically temporary help lines to align other objects a a g BEEERE er na x a EIA TR Fig 288 Automatically by the walls generated temporary help lines DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 183 DIALux Version 4 7 In the screenshot you can see the red help lines which follow the direction of the tilted walls These help lines are generated when you move with one object e g luminaries for a short while above any other object e g wall The help lines are visible until the left mouse button is released To Ld g oO oO Ei o Fig 289 Automatically by an object generated temporary help lines Here you can see help lines generated by the cube Now it is pretty easy to align cube and luminary Helping areas defined in the ruler In ground p
69. iu sia an wmi if hemna m Faahi Fei eee fo f i TEO E ee ee meee fo ae he Qu ee i e aa Pe ran E E E E a E a fe ee Lara Dem Fike ers ear mbrot boned eae bey pn feed D Reipgpinilas 0 aghe O p Pace St Ficom Aps DiE H ye el E A E er ier pT ariista irria EnA DAI Fa Hip Hii aces lnh ps bie m irai araj ea beei fe ere eee Set ehe ou ee DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 26 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 20 Working with Wizards Room Name Room Form Room Alignment Enter the name of the room select L shaped room and afterwards define the orientation Quick Planning Wizard i l x Room Dimensions i Here vou specity the room size i What i the room s dimensions a 5 000 m Drawing Preview b fe o00 m C 2 000 m gd 2 500 m How high is the room Height 2 800 m lt Back Cancel Fig 21 Working with Wizards Room Dimensions Specify the Room s Dimension and the Room Height Which wall symbolizes each letter a to d is displayed on the drawing DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 27 DIALux Version 4 7 L i Duik Phorinia Wizard i abr Seon eed r fee hector ol lt d Fig 22 Working with Wizards Reflection Work plane Maintenance Factor Specify the Reflectance Work plane and the Maintenance factor You can accept also the standard values of DIALux by clicking directly on Next DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 28 DIALux Versio
70. light wizard Here you can specify the single elements for the street and their properties Confirm each of your steps by clicking on Next li ua ferment Lage Fin Em lerri Prois i E RAIT Lyi i Sector Barr E d Te P ai T si Heeei Ri en oe aie d Js ae F Lew i PET ho g i ami I 5 i Fig 360 Street profile Select those roadway elements which belong to the street profile of the project The coating can be chosen for dry and wet surrounding conditions This is necessary only for the calculation of the same uniformity U0 wet Street name and maintenance factor are likewise inserted on this page In the following window you can fix the individual or combined valuation fields for the street In order to define photometric requirements for the street select an illumination class for every valuation field This is one of the essential innovations of the EN13201 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 223 DIALux Version 4 7 Ter Taker _oeee 7 u Tiii i pe E eie Pa ia b r oa a e Pe E ee be da oiai iet ee e a d ra Ta miethek Pe ies kabaal Pod ool I apiha 2 brees 4 7 Lee danga eee EAN ee dl ee eee ae M a is Si a nae eer rei Liig ime ie ipar mi Lpg E irer ir Prii Pmi Taimi Prik imrar iae iie Fig 361 Valuation Fields and Illumination Classes By using the Selection button the illumination class wizard can be started To understand this see also the section Illumination class Wiz
71. m i H l S Fig 75 Open a project in the startup dialogue or in the menu File gt Open you can access the saved project by double click on it Fig 76 Open a project in the menu DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 61 DIALux Version 4 7 Project information in the file open dialog The file open dialog has changed in the latest version of DIALux While opening an existing project the user can see the most important information about the file Fig 77 Project preview The information given in this dialogue about the project is the 3D view of the first room or exterior scene information about the designer the description and the name of the customer The button other folders opens a list of directories formerly used to store DIALux projects in DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 62 DIALux Version 4 7 Edit Rooms In order to generate a room click in The Guide on the Insert New Room button The Guide 1 x Indoor Lighting Edit room a Insert New Room Fig 78 Edit Rooms Generate a new room Edit Room Geometry Afterwards the ground plan view appears on the right side within the CAD window and the room coordinates are displayed in the Inspector Generally the coordinate origin of the room is down left x 0 y 0 You can change the room geometry by moving the individual points via the mouse or you can insert points with the right mouse button Alternatively you can edit the room coordinates in th
72. or horizontal alignment or a combination of both can be chosen DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 203 DIALux Version 4 7 i Projektmanager Mame Geometry Calculation Grid Measuring a gt Number of Calculation Foinks Automatic C Manual xis 9 Distance wel LIH jm ie m Align Points to the Edge Horizontal Fig 327 Aligning the grid points to the edges of the axes All the above functions refer to quadratic calculation grids The radial calculation grid has slightly different functions Projektmanager A Name Geometry Rotations Calculation Grid gt Number of Calculation Points Automatic Manual si 11 L vs Distance mt 4 284 m Yi 0 833 im Orientation of the Points Inside Displacement o 000 im Central Outside Align to Edges Fig 328 Inspector Calculation grid for radial calculation grids By contrast in user defined calculation grids all grid settings are made individually Therefore there Is no tab Calculation grid Measuring grids Sports facilities can be dragged into the CAD window In the project tree one or more calculation grids are listed for a sports facility Another tab in the Inspector for each calculation grid is available called the measuring grid A measuring grid is different to a calculation grid and can be inserted as well There must always be a calculation grid before inserting a measuring grid DIAL GmbH Ludensche
73. page 330 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 160 Aligning individual luminaires within an arrangement E tosses nad eu NE E E E TEE AE A 112 161 Selection filter for CAD selection s src 112 162 Luminaire circle start and end angle saes 113 163 Inserting floodlight illumination in a sports complex er er re Tr E A N E T 114 164 Settings options in the project manager 114 165 Mirroring options for floodlight illumination 115 166 Options for changing the illumination points 116 167 Moving an illumination point manually 116 168 Cancelling the symmetry of floodlight illumination 116 169 Individually adjustable luminaire positions after Cancelling the SYMMEtry serrer 117 170 Transforming a single luminaire into an individual arrangement sais csudianvatwosnutevubiauvevastaniveiaaawars 117 171 Modify luminaire data Corrections 0c000 118 172 Modify luminaire data Mounting height 118 173 Selection of rotatable luminaire parts 05 118 174 Turn the rotatable luminaire part by mouse pointer saab cee E E erento ae boats 119 175 Align the rotatable luminaire part 119 176 Symbol for luminaires with several articulated joi
74. peasy EH u lave ajsa BB 6 6 A afl te ng ere ee poe Ses Flt ee ee ita OS LAH ett i Cer ae le UT bake a a oa a a i BOE I ie i ima Fig 236 Open area lighting The way to insert an open area luminaire arrangement is similar to that in the escape route lighting A right click on the open area calculation surface opens the Property Page for the luminaire arrangement Edit Calculation Surface Align and distribute Copy Along a Line Set DWG or DXF origin here Selection hidden Fig 237 Insert open area lighting DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 154 DIALux Version 4 7 Luminaire Emergency Lighting Anti panic lighting luminaire distance max distance CO C180 max distance C90 C270 9 06 m max distance border C180 473 m max distance border C90 m Anti panic lighting Emin 05 lx Uniformity Luminaire Mounting Mounting Type Surface Mounted ka Suspension Height 0 000 m Mounting Height 2 800 m 2 Rotation Room Height 2 800 m p Paste Fig 238 Properties of the open area luminaire arrangement This tool calculates the maximum distance for the selected fittings taking into account the desired minimum illuminance level and uniformity You can see here the maximum distance lengthwise and crosswise between the luminaires and between luminaires and the border of the open area calculation surface The arrangement will be plac
75. positions In the 3D view the point of intersection of the three positioning lines shows the position of the cross projected onto the floor surface In DIALux 4 7 it is also possible to move an object not only by its insertion point but also by dragging the corners of the bounding box The benefit Is that it is now easy to place one object directly next to another one and the object automatically rotates itself to get the same rotation as the adjoining object DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 174 DIALux Version 4 7 et ee ey Fe a ed S ae To change the working area in the 3D view press the spacebar while the left De Cae ce mouse button is pressed and sm sh the mouse icon is above the IE area you would like the Fig 270 Dragging an object by its corners and automatic rotation working area to be SPACE In the 3D view using any surface as a working surface an object can be moved by the mouse The working surface is fixed as a parallel surface to the X Y area normally parallel to the floor This can temporarily be changed if the SPACEBAR is hit while the mouse together with the object is in front of any other surface and the left mouse button is pressed Example You click left on a cube and move it towards a wall M ake sure that the mouse icon is in front of the wall Now hit the space bar on the keyboard The wall will become the working area of the cube now Instead of moving to the left and to the right X Y
76. results or save them in electronic format as a pdf file So click the appropriate button By using the check boxes next to the printout symbols you can affect which outputs are actually printed out By default all outputs are activated If you would like to provide for example only a short overview activate only the summary If you would like to present the results to your customer you may wish to activate all outputs DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 22 DIALux Version 4 7 Haigh at Hobie Aua mr Muang Bn iiD i EEn Whi i Lace dale 1 78 reins LEO rT hd T t Tan Ed Tom 1 by ai a 1 gar wH wr am a c oe 10 i 5 i Beania Dore AN re Dibra or sm EY spf pny Me LFA A al A k i gy La me G SAN E iag Ea iy FP re OT Luter re Pie Lil Bj mard h bira miba baadi M DO M a gA AA a men Ss Fig 15 DIALux Light Wizard Output At the end of the DIALux Light Wizard a dialogue is displayed After you have completed DIA Lux Light the calculated result is displayed as 3D rendering in DIA Lux Here you have the option to save your calculation results under the menu File gt Save DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 23 DIALux Version 4 7 all al Ered of the DLA on leghi Wigued mri b Aip es et eb iia ia a a o S j E roe ele T Aarr ie aoe ceri Fig 16 DIALux Light Wizard End DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 24 DIALux Version 4 7 Working with Wizards If you are using DIALux for the first time and
77. right mouse button and select Edit axes The blue and red doted lines represent the two axes On these axes the luminaries are arranged By clicking the left mouse button and moving the mouse simultaneously the axes can be positioned Fig 187 Editing the single axes direct planar lighting DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 125 DIALux Version 4 7 Insertion of luminaries with vertical planar lighting The procedure to insert a vertical planar lighting solution is the same as with direct planar lighting Firstly one or more luminaries should be selected from the DIALux database Secondly these luminaries should be added to the actual project By clicking the button vertical planar lighting in the DIALux toolbar you are able to create a vertical planar lighting solution abe pE yew ed 1 a i g P a al al i E y i A Fig 188 Selection of a vertical planar lighting situation Alternatively you can insert a vertical planar lighting situation as well through Paste gt Luminaire Arrangement in the DIALux M enu Sree bere Furriers Pee are Witter and doors eel Himiona Glan ik Ma Fama Dermota Exterior Scere elements P J Carmel planar kyd Caution aaf Lumines Wiad Tembures eur s Light colors Dokar tikera E gaira group yay ie a Uke w A Room 1 i Energy Evoksatienn l rt Line Triik aby Liwi ETEN foe Iriart cick A ist Pas
78. scene all luminaires 284 Ix i Projektmanager ting Height Arrangement Rotations Polygon ane Align to first quide Align to second quide User defined settings Individual Luminaire x 0 0 er 0 0 e 2 90 0 e v v v Rotation offset Fig 191 Changes in Mounting Height 1 Arrangement of luminaries 2 and Rotations of single luminaries 3 at vertical planar lighting solutions By clicking the right mouse button on a luminaire within the actual room you are able to adjust the axes by selecting Edit axes The axes are blue and red doted The DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 127 DIALux Version 4 7 luminaries are positioned on these axes To shift the two different axes simply click left directly onto the axis and drag the mouse I j J Fi prea E A PRL Fig 192 Editing the single axes vertical planar lighting DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 128 DIALux Version 4 7 Coloured light Background information Up to now DIALux only calculated white light The amount of light energy distributed by the luminaire was defined by the luminous flux of the lamp s and the light output ratio of the luminaire The spectral distribution the wavelengths of the distributed radiation was not taken into account This approach is usually correct because interior and exterior lighting design is mainly made with white light sources Calculated values are totally correct
79. search the installed database for a suitable luminaire Please select the luminaire to be used Luminaire DIAL 3 65 300 Leuchte Databases Select the quantity here DIAL Luminous emittance 1 Lamp i s T26 SBM Here you can modify the provided luminous flux of the luminaires Luminous Flur 3350 m Fig 25 Working with Wizards Luminaire Selection DIA Lux displays the selected luminaire in the dialogue of Luminaire Selection Quick Planning Wizard Mounting height e Specify the mounting height for the luminaire arrangenent r Select the luminaire mounting type Mounting Type Surface M ounted gt Modify the mounting height via one of the following parameters Suspension Height fo O00 m Height above Workplare Mounting Height 2 000 m Work plane Height 0 850 m Room Height 2 800 m Luminaire height 0 074 m Preview lt Back Cancel Fig 26 Working with Wizards Mounting height Select the luminaire s mounting type DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 30 DIALux Version 4 7 Quick Planning Wizard a Quantity Calculate the number of luminaires required by specifying a desired average illumination or provide the quantity values yourself A Enter the desired are average illumination Preview Em Boi E Or alternatively the desired number of rows and luminaires per row Rows fa Luminaires per Aow fa Back Fig 27
80. see the subfolder Textures Colours Light colours and Colour filter While textures and colours are only for use with objects room surfaces furniture the light colours and colour filters are for use with luminaires The difference between light colour and colour filter is very important The light colour is the result of the spectral distribution of the luminous flux of the lamp In the folder light colour there are three subfolders with specific spectral distributions for the black body radiator for standard spectra and for common lamps The common lamps are again divided into the incandescent lamps fluorescent lamps and high pressure discharge lamps DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 130 DIALux Version 4 7 ES L Textures Fe Colours Li Light colours ia Colour temperature black body radiator Fer Colour temperature daylight Fe Standard illuminants B Li Standard lamp spectrums Fer Incandescent lamps Li Fluorescent lamps Le High pressure lamps I3 Calour filter ia Colour effect filter ia Colour correction filter F High temperature filter ia Film and stage lighting i Used Textures Fig 195 Light colours in the DIA Lux colour tree These spectra can be used for a lighting calculation They can easily be dropped onto a luminaire If a spectrum is selected the inspector shows information regarding the correlated colour temperature the spectral distribution and the colour rendering index Colo appea
81. selected e Greyscale quantity depends on the number of illuminance values selected e Value chart quantity depends on the number of illuminance values selected e Table quantity depends on the number of illuminance values selected DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 257 DIALux Version 4 7 Output Configuration Nank Betspiel Standardwssgabe Standard Selected Cutpul Clproject cover a Table of ronherts tuninaire parks beh project Summary Frere Fvalashion Prejt Utis Zones List L Sunmnary Energy Evaluation Lissi Zone LJRoom List room Chandar verte Dalta Je Table of contents O E kuia parts it a Ga Dia 2 Cmap Wandhuter fir Minirai Qj Ezaki Scere l E E Planning data FF oc Luria parks bot D Mirene plan E Fiar plan E Lurenar s layout plan Luminaires coordinates Bik Colour itar layout Fiiil Late plan Punrebure coordinates let Sport Sikes lyyout plan Sport ites Coordinates List TV Camere Conncinates List Pole Positions Coondinabes List Pole Luminaires Summary 708 Sport Lurar es Coordinabes List l oe Calluulation Grid Coordinates Lit Tak Area ooordiristes bel mtani Aeh list of conrei Luminous rheneity catula prins cour o gmr group commissioning Caloation sul aces rasula gerie Caloulation points results gereki is pS eel ao Ef EZE Stan T Cakil CIATAT Fig 422 Ex
82. sun as a light source The calculation occurs in the following steps 1 Calculation of the skylight on all surfaces inside and outside 2 Calculation of the direct sunlight on all surfaces 3 Calculation of the direct light of luminaires if available 4 Calculation of the indirect component DIALux does not differentiate between inside and outside calculations all surfaces are simply used for the radiative interchange If you want to do a daylight calculation in DIALux a suitable light scene must be inserted Sky types in DIALux The sky types in DIALux correspond to the CIE 110 1994 Spatial Distribution of Daylight Luminance Distributions of Various Reference Skies Thereby a luminance Is assigned to every point of the sky The luminance depends on the solar height the solar azimuth the sky point height and the sky point azimuth Tab 1 Sky types according to CIE 110 1994 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 158 DIALux Version 4 7 Overcast Sky Averaged Sky Clear Sky CIE Name Overcast Sky Averaged Clear Sky Intermediate Sky Developed by Nakamura Oki et al Description Complete Developed from a Cloudless Sky Overcast Sky long period of rotationally measurements symmetrical described luminance average weather distribution conditions Direct sun we w wv possible Number of possible zenith 3 1 luminance In DIALux used zenith Krochmann Krochmann luminance Light Scenes DIA Lux offers the possi
83. the movement of the camera DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 320 DIALux Version 4 7 camera rotation camera path Fig 515 M ovement of the camera Colour POV Ray can calculate coloured light DIALux will export light colour information of a lightsource in version 3 2 Up to that time you can create coloured light either by using a transparent coloured filter glass in front of a luminaire or you can edit the RGB value of a luminaire in the POV file To add a filter glass in DIALux you have to place a small cube in front of the lightoutput of a luminaire In the Raytrace settings of the geometry you have to define the transparency and the colour of the filter It is necessary to remove these filters before calculating with DIALux DIALux does not yet calculate transparency To change the RGB value in the POV file you have to open the file and to find menu search gt find Idt_data The underscore is important light_source lt 0 0 0 gt color lt 1 1 1 gt Idt_data 72 72 1 LIGHTCORRECTIONVALUE color lt 1 1 1 gt means the RGB values for the light source are all 100 means white light If you change any of these parameters e g lt 1 0 1 gt the resulting color will be according to the RGB values This has to be done for each luminaire It could be helpful to use the replace function menu search gt replace Further functions of POV Ray The following information is an e
84. the Shift key or the Ctrl key The option Autobumbmaps assigns an additional structure like for example some ripple to the texture DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 308 DIALux Version 4 7 so 9 jarot Ty 22 E PRA EE m k i eel ma me ela eee ih F Li ei en al b a Soho e a k tat k P m 7 ran hated 3 Fig 500 Raytracing options modify the surfaces The amount of reflection should be 5 10 for floors and 10 15 for glass The transparency of glass Should be around 30 3 D Standard View for Raytracing The Raytracing is based on the 3D view of your room or scene where you can define the point of view the perspective and the display window of the image Hen So Verw Fig 501 3D view for the rendering Starting POV Ray After you have adjusted the 3D view you can start POV Ray from the menu File gt Export gt Calculate CAD view with POV Ray or via Raytracer icon DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 309 DIALux Version 4 7 rrr J ABEE 5 PE am haee iam Se ee ere fe ra a ES EE ae 8 ee E E y Te oe Pis i a ee a Sy ee me E F Fig 502 Start the rendering If the POV Ray software is not yet installed the installation is initiated now The necessary files have been copied during the installation of DIALux If you have further questions you can use the POV Ray help program you can find it in the folder at C Program Files POV Ray for W
85. the correct equipment according to the requirements of the lighting layout and the fittings DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 41 DIALux Version 4 7 General Description Technical Data Luminous emittance 1 Lamp T26 36W wt Luminous Flux Im Power W Correction factor 1 000 3 00 E Project 1 E aia Luminaires Used oy Ox DIAL 15iNOVA fH Room 1 2 50 Fig 43 Starting a lamp Plugin in DIALux If there is not yet a lamp Plugin installed on this computer you are able to try out the DIALux Lamp Plugin If the luminaire manufacturer has entered technical data it will be used to pre select those lamps that fits into the luminaire The search criteria can be ILCOS L code power consumption socket voltage etc The lamp Plugin then offers those products that fit into the luminaire You can choose those lamps that are most suitable for the lighting layout This choice could be a standard lamp or picking from special colours colour rendering index long maintenance lamps or other specific properties of the lamp The lamps include all technical data even light distribution curves for reflector lamps SO you can decide whether to use a spot ora flood reflector If the change of the light distribution curve is not possible the luminaire can restrict the replacement of the original LDC DIAL Lamp Catehoque PHT ae F rare Hele wyi E Dagro W Fa M l mrau JHT a r el a hEn e el amie h y qiia p 1
86. they are connected to a central battery So in the emergency case the regular light distribution curve is used for the calculation Maybe the luminous flux is different In DIALux a single luminaire can be picked and the settings to use it in the emergency lighting calculation can be defined IG dg ok ASS Pehaea ie E7 l 9 a a Aa fol Blais S o i ps WS Lae O E Bib oe fe Prep manages ex Lehi E ee hR i Lihinsrre a aga Ger Cahors bgy glad ag bone mman gurera mr F F jam ba eee p hiig E Dai ka ingg Lahir U ba cies ip ooma as mep g ee Pagers pee ade ete Lame kth FE Loia rir rea D a a Sj Propet D La aor Fig 241 Emergency lighting Inspector You can define here if the luminaire has to be used for the emergency calculation Also you can define if it is used only in the emergency case or for the normal DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 156 DIALux Version 4 7 lighting The luminous flux for the duration time can be edited here The emergency LEO is designed to handle a light distribution curve which is different from the regular LDC There are for example fluorescent lamp luminaires on the market which have an incandescent lamp or a LED included for emergency lighting In these cases it would be possible to use the fluorescent lamps LDC for the normal lighting situation and the incandescent lamp or LED LDC for the emergency lighting Emergency lighting data sheet
87. to be placed in certain positions Export of the information via STF file to DIALux Import of the STF file into DIALux All the rooms defined in the CAD will appear in the DIALux project including additional information like the position of doors windows degree of reflection room information The user can now do the lighting design in DIALux The correct fittings can be placed additional calculation objects can be defined The calculation will be done and the documentation of the design can be made in DIALux Export of the revised STF file from DIALux to the CAD application Depending on the CAD software used a different level of information from the DIALux STF file is read in The information exported by DIALux is for example the luminaire name article number description electrical and light technical parameter pictures 3D model Isoline diagram and so on Further information about the STF interface can be obtained from dialog dial de or hotline dialux com DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 280 DIALux Version 4 7 Energy Performance of Buildings Background information Under the Kyoto protocol Europe is committed seriously to reduce CO emissions One instrument to achieve this is the directive 2002 91 EC Energy Performance of Buildings Directive of the European Parliament and Council The directive s requirements hold for both new and to be renovated buildings and for both residential and non residentia
88. to the calculation of an illuminance class by means of the wizard depend in each case on the kind of marked street element The specific requirements for the illumination class are influenced by the kind of street user or the kind of street With the help of the following example we would like to explain to you the functionality of the wizard for the determination of the illuminance class of a street DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 238 DIALux Version 4 7 Illumination Class W izard xj Welcome to the Illumination Class Wizard This wizard helps you in a step by step manner to define the photometric requirements important for planning street illumination At the end the illumination class is determined that effectively zemes as a summary of the photometric requirements The wizard i based on the prCEN TA 13201 1 technical report from the European Committee for Standardisation To continue click Next Cancel Fig 389 Illumination Class Wizard Welcome dialogue After activating the Next button you are called on to specify the typical speed of the main user Illumination Class Wizard x Typical Speed Enter the typical speed of the main user type How high is the typical speed of the main user in the street Main users include combinations of motorised traffic slow vehicles bicyclists and pedestrians IF motorised traffic is one of the main users enter the typical speed of the motorised traffic
89. values of the parameter required In order to implement a suggestion simply select it while clicking on it La b its Be E i pee hoger ee 2 Pr i ee eer mu oe h ae piety Pe ij M h E Pe pe Fig 367 Positioning suggestions Afterwards a final dialogue will appear automatically If you activate the checkbox the generated street will be calculated immediately Md um wni gee Piri Ermi of Quack Pianmeng Wirad for Sirens hae erm Fr eee Fe Cu Per p t Ger ej be cee er 2 ot a n oo i Boe i Eee eee Cae leer beet Ta pet Pe Scr Seo oe Pie Fig 368 Final dialogue Click on the Finish button and your street project will be displayed You can do further work on this later Wizard Optimised Street Light Arrangement DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 227 DIALux Version 4 7 You can insert an optimised arrangement also in streets which are already created For this you can select after planning the street the menu File gt Wizards gt Optimised street light arrangement Wizard Selection The following wizards are available Line Arangements L Shaped Room Optimised street light arrangement PRU Quick Planning Professional Quick Arched room Planning m 7 Pohgonal Room Rectangular Room Quick Street Planning This wizard supports you in positioning an optimal luminaire arangement for a street Fig 369 Wizard O optimised street light arrangement
90. via the Inspector under Select by entering the coordinates or directly by moving with the mouse If you decide on the second of these two options just click on the respective grid point with the left mouse button and continue to press on the mouse button to move it to the desired position DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 200 DIALux Version 4 7 It is also possible to change the z values which means that you can create very complex three dimensional calculation grids alculatioan Display Real Time Calculation Selection i p Grid Coordinates O World Coordinates Fig 323 Changing individual grid points by using coordinates Under Selection in the Inspector the grid points differ according to world and grid coordinates Grid coordinates depend on the position of the origin of the calculation grid whereas world coordinates depend on the position of origin of the actual outdoor scene Scaling It is possible in DIALux to scale calculation grids in different ways To do this just select the calculation grid and then open the context menu with a right mouse click Here you can now select the scaling under scaling options e g with or without anchoring etc A fhe di Grid Points Tyre Casian Gi p pete he Ge Cee e i 2 woth Faa Ciim Cinta Wh Pitesti tho orl cee cies Shon waj Gria F iit Fica Daw Aara a lina Citaj sie Ale ie te
91. with DXF background ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 274 449 General settings for the DWG DXF export 275 450 Opject selecHO Meirinirrin en 275 451 Selection of the current layers and designations 276 452 Options Tor the expo a 276 453 Settings for the luminaire export sessen 271 454 Definition of the luminaires legend 278 455 DWG and DXF export ISOININGS cceceeeseeeeees 278 456 Export of the value chart in dxf and dwg 0 279 457 Insertion of an energy evaluation project into a DIALux project via menu Paste and via the context menu of the DIALux project 282 458 Energy evaluation project in project tree 0 283 459 Transfer of all DIALux rooms into the energy evaluation PLOJOCl ccceccccssseseeeteeseeeeeeeeees 283 460 Transfer of one single DIALux room into the energy evaluation DVO CCU isi vanincaavalvins aaniotavehaais 283 461 Multi consideration of one energy evaluation room during the evaluation of the complete energy performance PLOJOCl cccccsessseeeeeteeseeseeees 284 462 Multiple energy evaluation rooms and there utilisation ZONOS aa a a 284 463 An energy evaluation room with a selection of utilisation zones to which it can be moved 285 464 Energy evaluation room in project tree with its assessment ZONES csscccssseeceseeecseeeseseneseaeees 285 465 Display of assessment zones in CAD windows second ICOMTFOM ING left hararnariarenn 28
92. you can select the R table of choice and insert it into DIALux DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 244 DIALux Version 4 7 Select an R Table t i D J A 7 iy j T ie Aaaa ad 1 Le a ie JFIF lar i T bal l i fii di ee ee eee d bi l i L l L i Zz Ee Ee 2 EB i Fis i Pii fee OS import the selected R Table Fig 401 Selecting an R table and inserting this in DIALux R tables which are already available in DIALux are not imported DIALux compares the existing R tables with the new ones and provides an information report about the negative result The newly inserted R table can now be selected in the following objects in the road surfaces 1 Street evaluation field Inspector of a street scene Calculation areas gt street calculation field gt Street evaluation field gt tab Road surface 2 New existing street project tab Road surface 3 Assistant for quick street planning Menu File gt Assistant gt Quick street planning gt page 2 Appropriate road s If you wish to remove an inserted R table from DIALux then you must delete the corresponding field from the DIALux folder In Windows XP this is found as a default setting under Documents and settings All users A pplication data DIALux RTables If you are using Windows Vista you will normally find the R tables under Programmes DIALux RTables Street Illumina
93. 0 DIALux Light Wizard Launch a PlugIn eee 21 11 DIALux Light Wizard User Database 21 12 DIALux Light Wizard Calculation secerneren 22 13 DIALux Light Wizard Calculated Result 000 22 14 DIALux Light Wizard Result Output 23 15 DIALux Light Wizard OUtQUt ccceeeeeeeseeeeneereeees 23 16 DIALux Light Wizard End cccceeseeesssseeserseneereeees 24 17 DIALUX Startup DialoQue cccccsecseesseserseseesersneeerens 25 18 Launch DIALUX WIZAI ccecccecssseseeeeeeseeneeeeeeetessnees 25 19 Working with Wizards Start ccceeeseessseseeseneeeeens 26 20 Working with Wizards Room Name Room Form ROOM ALIQNMeNt ccccseeeeesseeeereueesersaeerentans 27 21 Working with Wizards Room Dimensions sae 27 22 Working with Wizards Reflection Work plane Maintenance Factor ss ssseeessrrrrrereerrrrrrrrrrees 28 23 Working with Wizards Luminaire M anufacturer SelECUO M darei a AA 29 24 Working with Wizards Plugin User Database 29 25 Working with Wizards Luminaire Selection 30 26 Working with Wizards Mounting heigNht 30 27 Working with Wizards Calculate the number of UID ANF ES E E E wants 31 28 Working with Wizards Alignment of the luminaires 31 29 Working with Wizards Calculate result 0008 32 30 Working with Wizards Visually represented result 32 31 Working with Wizards Single Sheet Output 33 32 DIALUX user INCEIFACE
94. 07 Adjusting the white balance Deselecting the checkbox Carry out white balance can make your rendering appear unrealistic and give a colour cast We suggest using the automatic mode If manual correction is necessary switch of the automatic mode and adjust the slider to the colour temperature of the light in the rendering DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 138 Adding luminaire arrangement to control group DIALux Version 4 7 Light Scenes and Control Groups Definition DIALux supports the planning of dynamic light controls e g on the base of DALI There is the possibility to define luminaire groups switch and dimming levels to calculate light scenes to visualize and to process the planning results for easy implementation Light scenes define the changeable qualities of the contained control groups as for example dimming levels light colour inclining and panning the luminaire and LDC In light scenes groups of luminaire arrangements are called control groups Requirements Any luminaries can be added to control groups and also an individual luminaire can be included within an arrangement Luminaires can exist in more than one control group Light scenes can contain one or several control groups Control groups cannot exist at the same time in the light scenes which contain the same luminaire The complete light scene can be calculated as a whole or all necessary control groups of a light scene are calculated an
95. 186 ROW CIO IMCS esine neue nesta nantdaeinteunane 187 SPME NEID Neun whaensadnedes 188 Circular MONO MING sisscsesdebtadavnasarciosesecageatossensiseeudavntes 189 FICO GIGS saraaa 190 Copy and paste with CTRL C CTRL V and CTRL H icles sheaths nade edad and ERA I tanita 192 COPY AlONG GING aan 192 Align and distribute ccceceseseeseeeeeeeeeeersneeeteaeeeees 193 Centre objects in the rOOM sesssreessrresrrreeesrrreee gt 194 Calculation Surfaces and other Calculation Objects 195 Calc lation SUT ACCS ceneni ann n 195 Calculation surfaces for different types of illuminance A EE EEE P EAA E E ET E A P E ena 196 PenetratiOikneasaninini na A 196 TASK ATEI Sunce saare a aaa 197 Calculation Ordo eara a 197 EdIUNO onicerirei ar bobitiaetieat eSictge 199 Nena a a cette rakteetes Giants 201 Merging Calculation QridS ccccseseessssserseeeeseeeeees 202 Calculation points in calculation grids 202 M easuring QOS wrcctisnctiarccnnincaviniveunsnundeneneuttanedstancs 204 Calculat N eiee en 205 Grade MES ase E E EA 206 Display settings neamen i sanacedtarsiai act anaes 207 Real time calculation cccccssssecsssseersseserseeeeersneseens 207 ISOMMCS era e unaanaetienuatashidaesad 209 Calculation POINTS niunie 210 UGR Calculatie a 211 Insert UGR Calculation Point and UGR Calculation e E e EE AE E E E EE A T 211 Adjust Viewing Direction of UGR Observer and UGR Pl CO E T AT A E T 212 exterior LORUN Oierren aa 213 EXECIION SCO
96. 2 Mean Daylight Factor for Rooflights 37 Orientation Horizontal Slope angle 0 Fig 486 Parameter output for an assessment zone Attention should be paid to using descriptions for assessment zones and other energy evaluation objects These descriptions should not be too long but should frequently be used With precise comments you can explain the selection of one or more parameters Particularly with regard to manually adjustments to automatically calculated values such explanations are in fact mandatory DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 296 DIALux Version 4 7 Project Context Address Desh Locabon Perms FESE ata F ai carat Se neg Daer i Lisa Soe Fig 487 Input of a description for an assessment zone DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 297 DIALux Version 4 7 Making videos in DIALux To create a video with DIALux you have to define the camera path First open the lighting design in the 3D window then use the command File gt Export gt Save 3D video Now a camera path appears in the CAD window Fig 488 Inserting a camera path in the 3D view At the beginning the end and at all inserted points of the path the camera position in X and Y direction can be defined by left click and moving the mouse The Z position can be changed by left click and holding down the control CTRL key Fig 489 Inserting additional camera positions along the path DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page
97. 3 and 16 9 ratio The 4 3 picture has a resolution of 800 by 600 pixel If you want to keep the height of 600 pixel you have to multiply the width with the desired ratio In our example 600 x 16 9 600 x 1 7777 1066 Fig 506 Picture ratio Fig 507 Manipulated picture size B POV Ray for Window Messages DAL pow Pretrace_ cid Oo Prebrace_ikar t D 08 error_iounil J A gr ay_threshoald 05 near ert COUNT 10 eee lite wA A i Mit tiene iat ATPT A ocmrion iNL ATIN righe a167 0 i p lt 0 2 0 gt Fig 508 Change picture size DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 313 DIALux Version 4 7 You can manipulate the picture size by entering the desired size into the edit field with w and h directly followed by the numbers w means width h means height Camera The camera definition describes the position projection type and properties of the camera viewing the scene Interesting types are spherical cylinder and panoramic In the POV Ray help a number of camera types are explained If none is specified the perspective camera Is the default The perspective keyword specifies the default perspective camera which simulates the classic pinhole camera The horizontal viewing angle is either determined by the ratio between the length of the direction vector and the length of the right vector or by the optional keyword angle which is the preferred way The viewing angle has to be larger tha
98. 3 Copying in the standard setting with placing objects HTC Vere pea Na 190 304 Copying along a help line with fixed distance 190 305 Inset anelh grid erasana A TA 191 306 Defining a help grid esssssrrseneerrrrrrrrerrrrrrrreersrn 191 307 Snap points on the help sesssssessssrrseessrrreessrrrrees 191 308 Copy along a line with the MOUSE nsere 192 309 Copy along a line with the inspector ecce 193 310 Context menu CAD Align and distribute 193 311 Menu Edit Align and distribute ccccceeee 194 312 Align and distribute centred in Space 194 313 Inserting calculation surfaces or task areas 195 314 Transparent calculation Surfaces 195 315 Different types of IIUMINANCE cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 196 316 Property Page of calculation surface Selection of the types of illuminance ccceeeeeecseseeeeeeseaeees 196 317 Edit work area and Surrounding area 197 318 Inserting a calculation grid via the project manager sm EE EEEE AE E aes E EE oe 198 319 Inserting a calculation grid via the Menu 199 320 Types of calculation QFidS cccccccseeserssseseeseeseerens 199 321 Converting the calculation grid 200 322 Editing grid POINTS iirisecsdcbonacncoeondoadartaawde mane 200 323 Changing individual grid points by using coordinates E E E Mets AA PEN A EEEE T AET A E 201 324 Selecting scaling OPtiONS cccccssssseeesesseeeeeeeeees 201 325 Step by step procedure for merging c
99. 32 Delete textures Import Textures into the Texture Tree You can insert your own textures or images into the texture tree DIALux supports files in bmp dib jpg and gif format DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 93 DIALux Version 4 7 Textures can be inserted via Drag amp Drop into the texture tree To import a new texture into the texture tree open the texture tree and start the Windows Explorer Now you can drag the image file from the Windows Explorer into the wanted directory of the texture tree DIALux automatically converts the image file into the needed format The reflection factor is calculated using the RGB values The size defaults to 1m x 1m You should check these values and correct them if necessary With the menu File gt Import gt Texture Files you can use a dialogue to copy the textures into a directory of the texture tree ia id ues pem es er a mE ioe fe DE E 1P Fig 133 Import textures into DIA Lux Within the colour tree textures can be moved copied or deleted Also subfolders can be created or deleted Just make a right click on the desired object Edit Room Geometry with DWG or DXF File Please read chapter DWG and DXF import and export starting from page 271 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 94 DIALux Version 4 7 Material dialogue for surfaces The material dialogue for a particular surface has been overworked completely in DIALux 4 7 To reach the material dialogue please
100. 343 Insert a ground element from the furniture tree via GAGS DIOP oraraa a a 214 344 A ground element cccceccssssssersueeeersaeereesanereetens 214 345 Calculate results Of a surface eerren 215 346 Illumination of a facade with a calculation surface in KONCONE aeina 216 347 Property page of the GR Observer eeen 216 348 Luminous flux that is taken into account for the ULR VO Oaa T 218 349 Luminous intensity calculation point 218 350 Property page for the outputs of the luminous Intensity calculation point 218 351 Calculation surface Street valuation field 219 352 Simple Street valuation field in an exterior scene 220 353 Complex Street valuation field in an exterior scene220 354 Startup dialogue DIALux New street project 221 355 Insert Standard Street Vid Menu 221 356 Insert Standard Street via The Guide 6 222 357 DIALux wizards Quick street planning wizard 222 358 Wizards Via CNUs cntecstitdtenacicatincinmeeimptaanmaewines 222 359 Startup dialogue for street light wizard 223 360 Street DIOMIG siiiieviciiinaneteetaeiaioneiareties 223 361 Valuation Fields and Illumination Classes 224 362 Valuation Fields and Illumination Classes 224 363 Limit values for the optimisation cccceeeeeeeeeees 225 364 SUDSULULE IISlicsarctietstvicseutduttwuiaienebuieresebviuesntsns 225 365 Luminaire selection arasiatiatnmanhonnguares nut cammasneen 226 366 V
101. 3D rendering as output at the bottom right 264 432 Output of a light SCENG cccccsssseseeeesseeeeeeeeees 264 433 Settings of luminaire data sheet cerren 265 434 Luminance diagram for evaluation of omni directional GIGS CONG enaa n 266 435 Light intensity table cccccssssesssssssssessssnesssersensses 266 436 Property page output exterior Scene seeren 267 437 Creating standard OUtOUtS ccccccseeeeesseeseeeeees 267 438 Export the output to a PDF file seeen 268 439 Export the output table to a file or copy it into the CIPDOTT O dranie a aa 269 440 Export the output graphic to a file or copy it into the all 9 DOI ae A rer eeir errs 269 441 Export of output graphics to other programmes 270 442 DWG DXF Import OPTtiONS cceceessseeseeeeeeeeeeees 271 443 DWG DXF SettindS cccccscsessccssusesseseresseereeseeass 212 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 336 DIALux Version 4 7 Fj g Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 444 Move the dwg dxf origin with mouse and context SUI enoa E 212 445 Drag the corners to align the room with the drawing a a a rhs sultteel msetide sass 273 446 Insert doors WINGOWS TFUINITULE cceeeeeeee seers 273 447 Using 2D projection of dwg dxf in 3D view 274 448 3D view
102. 4 DIALux Version 4 7 DIALux 4 7 Room Dimensions Reflection Factors Workplane Length 9 600 m Ceiling 70 Gs Height 0 750 m Width 9 600 m Walls 50 So Wall zone 0 500 m Height 2 800 m Floor 20 Yo Maintenance Factor 0 80 Initial specifications For luminaire Fields Erm 500 ii Em US 50 fe Em outside 10 i Em outside usy 1 jfc Luminaire Classification according to C DIN Bz UTE CIE UGR Spacing bo Height Ratic 0 25 Surrounding area Room dimension 0 5m 1 00 Task area 0 5m Illuminance quotient according to LG Output Standard UGR Values Fig 63 General Options Standard Values If the Global tab is selected you can define the directory the folder in which you will save the projects By using the entry Language you will change the language of the DIALux user interface By default DIALux always starts with the language of the computer Operating system If a different language is selected DIALux will need to be closed and restarted to activate the language change Under the Global tab you can specify additionally the dimensional units metric or imperial and the photometric units European or American DIALux 4 7 Project Directory Language English United Kingdom w Show welcome dialog at program start Start new project default with G no
103. 5 466 Display of assessment zones of an energy evaluation room IN 3D VIQW ccccseseceeeseersaesersanereneans 286 467 Energy evaluations in The Guide ccccsseesseeeeeees 286 468 Create an energy evaluation room with a link to a DIALUX TOOM ieren a 287 469 Create an energy evaluation room without a link to a DIA LUX rOOM cccccsssecsseeerseeeeeaeeeerseseereneeraess 28 470 Energy evaluation rooms with and without link to DIALUX TOOM Saar 287 471 Possibility to change the linked DIALux room for an energy evaluation rOOM ccccceeesseeeeeeeseees 289 472 Possibility to cancel the link of an energy evaluation room to a DIALUX OOM ssessssrsesrsrrerrerrrerne 289 473 Working on the assessment zone of an unlinked energy evaluation FOOM ccccsseccesseeseeseeeeees 290 474 Utilisation profile of an utilisation zone in a planning according to DIN 18599 eeen 291 475 One property page of a daylight supplied assessment ZONO aaea a e oasi 291 476 Property pages for assessment zones that are daylight supplied by windows respectively roof lights 291 477 Direct input of energy consumption values in unlinked energy evaluation TOONS ccssseeeeeseeesenseees 292 478 Occupancy parameters of an assessment zone in EN 15193 left and in DIN 18599 right 292 479 Start of an energy evaluation in menu Output 293 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 337 DIALux Version 4 7 Fj g Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig
104. 6 0 Sree i Fax OA51 i 105 0 2511 Wedensced e Mail mueller lig hl de DIAL 1SiNova Luminaire Data Sheet Luminous emittance 1 1a l i aw Fig 424 Output header line DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 259 DIALux Version 4 7 Global Settings The Property Page Global is used to specify whether you want to use European or American units in your projects DIALux 4 7 Standard Y alues Global CAD Window Output Contact E nergy E valuation Window Rooflights Project Directory okumente und Einstellungen Bitter Eigene Dateien DI4Lux Projects Language English United Kingdom w Show welcome dialog at program start Start new project default with nothing Room Exterior Scene Standard street Units Which system should be used For dimensions lengths areas etc i Dimensions Metric 51 im cm etc ka Which system should be used For photometric dimensions illurninance light density etc Lighting engineering European 50 fx cdim ete vw Note Changes are not seen in open windows in the Inspector Close and re open a window or Open a new window to see the changes d Automatic notification For saving every a minutes Fig 425 Global settings DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 260 DIALux Version 4 7 Output Viewing Calculation Results After a calculation has been completed DIALux shows the 3D display of the room Project output can be viewed
105. 7I m TE RAT Se F ree beam tham GU kbh aj reer m Lali eea er ir Fimka neii bes ie ee eed egg a a eT it cee ie bee ee la An war Creare byi ounce ton ee ey ed ee agen ence behing whore Td fet cele rra ool res Fig 44 DIALux lamp demo database The user can insert one or more lamps to the luminaire So it is possible to mix up spot and flood reflectors in a line of spotlights or it is possible to mix the light colours DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 42 DIALux Version 4 7 within the some arrangement The selected lamp can be added to the original equipment or it can replace it DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 43 Create your own tree structure In the furniture tree DIALux shows all directories and SAT files under C documents and setting All Users A plication data DIALux furniture DIALux Version 4 7 The Furniture Tree Furniture can be moved from the furniture tree to the project any view via the mouse using drag and drop Caer ny Otlice accesoories fae ej Pots BOSON ii pall Bn Doe p rig a CAD nren E 0 m Ti oo mo CL m me aa MA ki A Purriare Fi Perse mp men Lanbi Sa m Se a Shae iimg Fig 45 The Furniture tree The furniture tree is divided into seven subdirectories You can move the preview window of the furniture tree and dock it in various positions in DIA Lux You can move and copy furniture from one folder directory to another Also you ca
106. 8 M odify the new luminaire arrangement You have the ability to copy and paste the whole luminaire arrangement in the context menu If you want to take out individual luminaires of the new luminaire group first of all you have to split the unrestricted luminaire arrangement Then you can select the luminaire which should be removed from luminaire group and open the context menu Now you can access the function Remove from luminaire group DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 120 DIALux Version 4 7 TETT ye eee less ES ia fj acl Gls SIG M BAG Deen coo tol Ees pei m oe a pa J HF i ia aH 5 i i pis IiE i a si 1E big ismi S 1 Pe i I aia p Liens f Bo e i Fa i bam Sass tae iia he ym Fig 179 Remove from luminaire group Aligning luminaire arrangements You can align to C0 G0 C90 G0 or Imax among individual luminaires as well as complete luminaire arrangements To do this select the inserted luminaire arrangement luminaire field line or circle arrangement unrestricted luminaire arrangement and select Rotate with the context menu Eje pi e e e j ee e af Te eee eee oP ee oe ere S Gls SSDI BY Ble ap see coos af Pir i rii Bie Ee la E persa giga ma tH l ee Fa r fm ac ees bp ee ere de ee i iie ia Dmm EE Fig 180 Aligning luminaire arrangements Context menu Then the function Set illumination point to CO GO or C90 G0 or Imax i
107. ALux Database picat fae HC Dean TM IKE Eulumdat File aa KE Eulumdat File Gino Send To IKE Eulumdat File H 1KE Eulumdat File 6B Hc ae LKB Eulumdat File 2 ooo LKB Eulumdat File tmeig CR HC Create Shortcut LKB Eulumdat File oe dHe Delete IKB Eulumdat File help He Rename IKE Eulumdat File img T 1EB Eulumdat File Ldt 1 KE Eulumdat File T EE HAFA mT 1ER Fuhimdat File Fig 42 Explorer context menu whilst DIALux 4 7 is running When DIALux is running in the background you can search any desired directories for luminaire data and import them to the current DIA Lux project or you can insert them into your own database right click on the file DIA Lux supports the following formats Eulumdat ldt CIBSE TM 14 IES all variations LTLI Lamp Plugins After selecting a luminaire in a luminaire Plugin some of them offer the possibility to start an installed lamp Plugin to find a lamp that fits into the luminaire The lamp Plugin provides all the technical and marketing data needed including photometric files and maintenance factors If a luminaire Plugin is not yet prepared to start a lamp Plugin the lamp selection can be started within DIALux instead In the Property Page Technical data of the luminaire there is a button with three dots besides the lamp type drop down list Clicking on this button you gets a selection of all installed lamp Plugins One has to be selected to find
108. DIALux Version 4 7 The Software Standard for Calculating Lighting Layouts User Manual DIALux Version 4 7 2009 DIAL GmbH Gustav Adolf Strafe 4 58507 Ludenscheid dialog dial de www dial de 15th Edition 2009 The text and images were prepared with great care DIAL the authors and the translators are however not subject to legal obligation or liability for any erroneous information and its consequences This publication is protected by copyright law All rights are reserved Most of the soft ware and hardware designations used in this manual are registered trademarks and therefore subject to the applicable laws The DIAL GmbH can not be held responsible for any damage to people or property which might occur in connection with the use of the DIALux software The program and documentation was created with great care however errors cannot be ruled out POV Ray POV Ray is short for the Persistence of Vision Raytracer a tool for producing high quality computer graphics POV Ray is copyrighted freeware that is to say we the authors retain all rights and copyright over the program but that we permit you to use it for no charge subject to the conditions stated in our license You can read the license by viewing the POV Ray for Windows About box by using the Help menu or Alt B and selecting the appropriate button CONTACT INFORMATION for POV Ray License inquiries can be made via email please check the POV Ra
109. DIALux Version 4 7 the brighter they becomes as does the scene It would help to test it In addition to the quick settings the brightness of the picture can be manipulated freely If there are too dark areas In an image decrease the low_ value slightly downwards This will make more details visible were it has been too dark If parts of the image seems to be overexposed the ceiling in a room with only indirect light modify this value upwards to make more details visible Render image with POV Ray Quick preference Image preferences Indirect calculation Brightness preferences Colour and brightness preferences Manual illumination correction Correction factor Values From 0 0 to 10 E al Tips For settings Note Unsuitable values can lead to the scene being displayed as under or overexposed Values between 0 and 1 darken the picture More details are visible in lighter areas Values above 1 lighten up the picture More details are visible in darker areas Fig 499 POV Ray Brightness preferences Now the new version of the Raytracers POV Ray 3 6 allows the conversion of the light colours from the control groups so that the rendered image Is shown in colour Raytracing Options for Surfaces You can assign certain options to all surfaces of the room the room elements or the furniture Just select the surfaces and use the Property Page to adjust the values You may select several surfaces using
110. DIALux newsletter It informs you about new versions and possibilities of DIALux It is sent out every 6 to 8 weeks Wishes and Feedback Send problem report M aybe during working with DIALux you consider that an important feature Is missing Click on wishes and feedback and tell us what you need If a problem or even a crash occurs while using DIALux click on the Online menu and Send problem report This will send an email to us that help us to solve the problem and helps you to get a more stable version After a crash this dialog opens automatically DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 14 DIALux Version 4 7 Install Luminaire Data About Plugins DIALux is always delivered without luminaire data The so called Plugins with the luminaire data of the manufacturers are directly available from our project partners You can download the Plugins either from the respective homepage of our project partners or you can request a CD with the luminaire data You will find the appropriate links for our project partners alternatively there are telephone numbers and contact addresses on our homepage www DIAL de under Data Plugins or you can click in the luminaire tree of DIALux on a not installed manufacturer Afterwards a window opens which displays the links of the corresponding manufacturers and contact addresses see page 39 After you have downloaded a Plugin close DIALux first before starting the Plugin by one double cl
111. E ERI 3 e h H L1 ye meee i i Textures A ie ral Lege codes H T Bey a 2 ke ert Laf cinara Fi Coar iaaa a albh 23 Febers Ma Lig Nan Rone tyes a lt juri amp ecko l i i Traore Lar Lignt cpio eer rece 1 ay Cau elfer See Ale 2 Caur corrector fiie JFN GA rih benpergtune ter Lgi a ag Pim end itage bahong meee gene E ay Leese Tanai Fig 197 Colour rendering indices of the CIE test colours CIE 13 3 The display is to specify the colour rendering and colour matching properties of light sources Standard Flourescent lamp High pressure illuminant D65 warm white 830 sodium RA 100 80 20 Fig 198 Spectra and colour rendering properties of different light sources The colour rendering index CRI sometimes called Colour Rendition Index is a measure of the ability of a light source to reproduce the colours of various objects being lit by the source It is a method devised by the International Commission on Illumination CIE The best possible rendition of colours is specified by a CRI of one hundred while the very poorest rendition is specified by a CRI of zero The CRI is measured by comparing the colour rendering of the test source to that of a perfect source which is generally a black body radiator except for sources with colour temperatures above 5000K in which case a simulated daylight e g D65 is used To add a spectrum to a luminaire just drag and drop it onto it All lumi
112. E T EEA EA EEEE weak 339 Appendix A Keyboard Short Cuts ccccsssseseeseeeeees 342 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 9 DIALux Version 4 7 New functions in DIALux Version 4 7 The DIALux version 4 7 has the following new features New features and improvements e Calculation of transparency Since DIALux 4 7 the calculation of transparent objects is available Therefore the feature glass plate has been established By using a glass plate you are able to calculate scenes correctly which weren t calculable in previous DIALux versions e g you will get results for light which falls through a semi transparent room divider As a matter of fact you can use the newly integrated feature with the common standard elements and or imported models as well Please be informed that the calculation does not include the effect of light refraction Within DIALux 3D standard view transparency is not visible e Quick preview of transparency and reflection Transparency and reflection has been usable in our previous DIALux versions with Raytracer Pov Ray which comes amongst others with DIALux Since DIALux 4 7 you are able to generate pictures with effects of transparency and reflection directly in DIALux To achieve impressive results it only takes a minimal amount of time and effort from now on e Online update of manufacturers information DIALux is capable to update luminaire catalogues directly from the internet the same procedu
113. E mE i eur i ol 1 rt u mna Be Se eae 1 rar ny mj b am 1 i Le i EE az Fig 106 Edit rooms Edit room element With DIALux it is possible to insert the following room elements Naturally you can also combine these As soon as a room element overlaps another the invisible part is no longer considered in the calculation Ramp Flat ceiling Platform Fig 107 Edit rooms DIALux room elements The room elements vaults are new in DIALux 4 Further possibilities for the construction of complicated ceiling forms have been improved Now it is also possible to copy vault ceilings vault Cross vault Half vault Fig 108 DIALux room elements Vault DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 79 DIALux Version 4 7 Vault and half vault The well Known and well tried room elements of DIALux are complemented with new objects dome and half dome These elements can be scaled or rotated just like any other room elements They combine with the room Their surfaces are automatically recognized as ceilings so that ceiling mounted luminaires snap automatically to dome or half dome surfaces Dome Half dome Fig 109 DIALux room elements Dome and half dome Insert via Property Page You can also insert objects numerically by entering coordinates in the furniture Property Page within the Inspector Select the object in the furniture tree enter the desired position in the Inspector and click on Insert iL ge Edt We
114. ET 183 289 Automatically by an object generated temporary help INES ason mar a vetatalin getintinnusadets 184 290 Creating helping areas in the ruler 184 291 In the left sketch the object is moved on its origin on the right it is moved on the bounding box In the second case the rotation is adjusted 185 292 Icons to insert help lINesS cccccssseseerseeseesanereeeens 185 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 333 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 293 Further editing of a help line cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 294 Icons to switch on and off the snap to help lines 186 295 FISEFUMG a END MMC rnana 186 296 Display help lIN S cccccccecsssseesseeeseeeeeerseneessenteans 187 297 Insert a poly line stop the mode with a right click 187 298 Move the complete poly line by holding down the ALT SY E EEA OE sk gatas E elie E ET 188 299 A closed spline help line In the start and end point are draggers to change the lin aee 188 300 M ove the complete poly line by holding down the ALT K V a as Sect Ameer TS 189 301 Copy along a help line with the mouse 189 302 M ouse symbol to select a help line for copying 189 30
115. Er Fig 149 Align a spotlight to a picture Inserting Luminaire Fields Luminaire fields can be positioned either by selecting the Insert Luminaire Field option in The Guide or the Luminaire Arrangement Wizard gt Field Arrangement option If you select a room and then perform a right click the context menu for that room opens Here you can also select the Insert gt Field Arrangement option The Wizard sequentially queries all important parameters that must be entered If you use one of the options with which the luminaire field is entered manually the Inspector displays in addition to the luminaire field a Paste and a Cancel button es E 1s a Fig 150 Insert luminaire fields without wizard Until you click Paste only the rubber band indicating the field arrangement is visible You can modify all DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 106 DIALux Version 4 7 parameters in the Property Pages before or after inserting the field To edit a luminaire field select it in the tree or in the CAD view If you click on a luminaire in the field all luminaires in the field are selected by default If you wish to edit individual luminaires you first have to change the selection filter see Fig 148 The following filters can be selected from left e Allow or restrict the selection of luminaire arrangements e Allow or restrict the selection of individual luminaires within an arrangement e Allow or restrict the selection of
116. False colour Illuminances oe se i BS pe eee ee ee a el ol j a0eu E os e ea ary PERALTA oA EE T _ hie E H oii i jie T kereeme e ii Eye ull i p a oe E H pE ee PEE i rh CAE i i et Fig 260 False colour Luminance DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 169 If your monitor is big enough it is advisable to keep several views open simultaneously DIALux Version 4 7 Working in Various Views DIALux provides various views to assist you with your layout Y Windoi Y FLOPE vol Fig 261 Views toolbar You can open the various views via the toolbar illustrated The button functions are from left to right e Open 3D view e Open ground plan view e Open side view e Open front view Zoom to the overall view of the scene for that DIALux zooms to the borderline of the room or exterior scene Show previous next light scene Show dimming levels in CAD Show maintenance factors in the CAD Activate Project manager DIALux shows the Project manager in addition to The Guide e Tile windows horizontally e Tile windows vertically In the menu file Settings gt Customise Toolbars you can activate more functions in the view s or window s toolbar see page 54 J e UP oe l a p m Barts j Jkl e p EH HE EF a a J eee cous Aal Popken p iio Fig 262 Working in various views The display illustrated above can be achieved by first Opening
117. Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 480 Start of an energy evaluation with the icon of the same name second from left 293 481 An assessment zone that is added to another assessment ZONE c csececcsseeseseeeseneneseneneeaees 294 482 An assessment zone that is added to the super ordinate utilisation ZONE aerer 294 483 Outputs for an energy evaluation n se 295 484 Output for the complete energy evaluation project with all important characteristics 008 295 485 Property page of the above output page 296 486 Parameter output for an assessment Zone 5 296 487 Input of a description for an assessment zone 297 488 Inserting a camera path in the 3D view 298 489 Inserting additional camera positions along the path PA E LAEE E AEA EEE AE AE E EE 298 490 Deleting camera POSITIONS cceeeeeecseeeeeeeeseees 299 491 Defining the camera viewing direction 299 492 Settings of the VIDEO ccceseesseessssesseeeeseeeeseeneeens 300 493 Windows dialog for the video compression settings scape E E E E EE E E E E 301 494 Basic settings for Raytracing ccccccsseseeseeeeeeeees 303 495 Smoothing edges with POV Ray sseseeeeeeees 304 496 POV Ray Image preferences 305 497 POV Ray Indirect calculation 306 498 Indir
118. Fig 175 Align the rotatable luminaire part Luminaires with several articulated joints In DIALux 4 7 luminaires can have several rotatable elements Luminaires with one or more articulated joints and therefore with one or more luminaire elements can be shown separately in the project tree with their own symbol Fig 176 Symbol for luminaires with several articulated joints Unrestricted lighting arrangements With DIALux you can position the luminaires individually in a circle in a line or in a field You can then form them into groups to deal with them geometrically and or as an electrical unit Just add your desired luminaire DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 119 DIALux Version 4 7 arrangement to a new luminaire arrangement via the context menu of the selected luminaire arrangement Jdid eu 9 angga E piani piy ark Lo Ey Til le a ie i S d af iie l Ree pie b ya lant z e mrri rs 5 os Amie EE i Poh i mece i s hl or ie F e e ae l be T ipta i CE E a Fig 177 Context menu of the unrestricted luminaire arrangement You can modify these further by changing the name position rotate or modify the origin ke DE E ee ees ee EE pe a E a t ii ERIR E il i il 13 5 GHG Js nol r hg Ss m es ile _ ia p s mmm CLE S a Fi F y i ton z T 4 s E Sry a C J rE EE b u Sha iner bi m j i e r ry Le gi m Jm p T a Ai SS m ee ae es i rm Fig 17
119. GloDal Settini a a 260 QUD Ulna Neer ea a e a e Oei 261 Viewing Calculation Results ccccccsseseesseseeraeeees 261 HMEC RESUIE OUEDUE cnnan an 262 QUIDUE SEUNG S enora o a 263 New Output IN DIALUX ccuimne 264 Luminaire Data Sheet ccccccssesscssssseseeeeeseeeereeees 265 LUMINANCE DIAGrAM cccccsseeeeeeseeeesneeeeeaeeeersneeeees 265 Tabular Presentation of Photometric Data of LU VAIO aan eliet utr E 266 Tabular Presentation of Exterior Scenes 266 Creating User Defined Standard Output 267 Save Output aS PDF File ccccsseeseeeeeseeeeesaneeeeees 268 Export Output Graphics tables text and graphic 269 DWG and DXF Import and Export cccccssseessseseeeees 271 DWG ADAMO maanen 271 Basic DWG DXF Settings and Layer Selection 271 Edit a Room based on the DWG DXF Ground Plan sis EE E EE ETA AE EEE O E N 272 Working with the DWG DXF Background in the 3D NOW Saas au nsiaiies tanbeunen snore ater npatubars ance nian aaa hae ds 2713 WG DX F EXD OMG arni eanbiearinneth 274 SUF INEM C Eaei tinaaninaaibiadedntianiaientialventais 280 Energy Performance Of Buildings eerren 281 Background information ccccccsseseeseeeseeseeeeeeaeeeens 281 Why energy evaluation in DIALUX iacere 281 Structure of an energy evaluation project 283 Energy evaluation rooms with and without links to DIALUX TOMIS Sassersson niae unra oE EEEE 287 Working ON PArAMELEIS cceccecsseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeanes
120. GmbH L denscheid page 217 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 348 Luminous flux that is taken into account for the ULR value Obtrusive Light Luminous Intensity Calculation Point To minimize obtrusive light EN 12464 not only gives limitations for ULR values but also for luminous intensity values in obtrusive directions and light trespass into windows These limitations depend on the environmental zone category as well Limitations for light trespass into windows are given in lux Values can easily be calculated with calculation points and calculation surfaces To calculate luminous intensity values in obtrusive directions DIALux offers Luminous Intensity Calculation Points Such points can be placed just like any other calculation points They consider all luminous intensities of all light emitting surfaces of all placed luminaires So fora luminaire with two brackets two values are calculated DIALux uses the luminaire s LDC in the installed position the luminaire flux the dimming level and the corrections factor if applicable for calculation A Luminous Intensity Calculation Point can be placed for each potential obtrusive direction Luminous intensity calculation point Fig 349 Luminous intensity calculation point List all luminaires and their light emissions List only those luminaires and their light emissions with interference effects that exceed the following limit value b Limit value cd Refresh View
121. Hame Projecti Description 7 Ail Project Fs Luminaires Used Eli Room 1 Fig 72 Create a new project On the second tab you can arrange your Contact data These are replicated from the option settings If necessary you can modify these here In the third tab your Address is located and in the fourth tab are the Details of the project These details will appear also on the title page of the output Project Contact Addrart Darade Location Project Conmsct Aedchwes Darade Location Project Contact Addbece Dotais Lecaten Gonit iorn i Pub Dirga Put Light areal Dhar Fig 73 Insert project details Since DIALux 4 the additional tab Location Is included This tab provides for the determination of the position of the sun with the daylight calculation see chapter Daylight calculation in DIALux You can insert here the location provided that this is not selectable from the available list as well as the longitude and latitude in degrees time zone and summer time Deactivated checkbox summertime is equal to the wintertime You can save your inputs and remove any DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 60 Input data of location for the daylight calculation DIALux Version 4 7 kiarn Cat es Fig 74 Insert Project data Location Open a new project An already existing project can be reopened at DIALux start if you click in the start window on Open project jE m pE p j Geet ee af a B pee ea
122. IALux room can only be linked with one single energy evaluation room Links with multiple energy evaluation rooms do not make sense since each energy evaluation room can be taken into account multiple times during the energy evaluation Abate ee erin eneral Grengy Ccskestion Room mihak Lind to a SAL Eiri Links bo the Picssr DiAlin roam Bree Pie reni oF ch h aan a aar LA Disa fee Ue bala raha arte ba Ham dlan Hak ii een ba Lau ine eco Lj ro coh La Lead ly Energy vaston a Uiii Zor Hisia Liiter eel a aE i Bom Lol Wbp je Far B Lear a Wa arla Fig 461 Multi consideration of one energy evaluation room during the evaluation of the complete energy performance project 9 Projekt 1 Ory Luminaires Used E F Energy Evaluation a utilisation Zone 1 B h Raum 1 fenergy evaluation project Assessment Zone Daylight 1 Lua Assessment fone Daylight 2 al Assessment fone Mon Daylight 1 El Utilisation Zone 2 h Room z energy evaluation project ool Assessment Zone Non Daylight 1 El utilisation Zone 3 Room 3 energy evaluation project O Assessment Zone Daylight 1 Assessment fone Non Dayvlight 1 Ht Raum 1 Hi Room 2 Hi Room 3 Fig 462 Multiple energy evaluation rooms and there utilisation zones DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 284 DIALux Version 4 7 Each energy evaluation room belongs to exactly one utilization zone It is initially created in its own util
123. Is selected objects depending on the selection filter can be selected by clicking on them e Increase Decrease View Size to increase or decrease the zoom factor left click in the CAD window and move the mouse up or down With DIALux 4 7 you can increase or decrease the CAD view about 10 by using CTRL key or CTRL key e Rotate 3D View left click and move the mouse while holding the mouse button pressed e Move use this mode to move the area that Is displayed in the window If you have a three DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 165 DIALux Version 4 7 button mouse this option is always assigned to the mouse button in the middle e Roam Scene o Left click and move the mouse to move forward backward or to rotate on the spot o Left click holding the CTRL key you can roam up down left or right the viewing direction remains constant o Left click holding the Shift key you remain on the spot and can look around yOu You can change the focal distance of the camera in the 3D view by selecting the mouse mode zoom loupe symbol While zooming left click and move the mouse hold the CTRL key at the same time WP Roce Daylight Light soene _ TEx pra Fl 4 Ps N l Wk Ow aa 100m Oon MM Fig 254 Change perspective and focal distance of the camera Check Calculation Values in the 3D View With the help of the Luxmeter function you can see the calculated illumin
124. L 1 __ 52 232 Z 1 nd it ets Ge 6 1 25 2th ZW De JS Ja Eee Hi JE De zH 2th 2h De JS Ja i iE z iE z Hi JE De zH 000 ba 000 5 0 m Walues in Lux Seale 1 39 Hot all calculated values could be diz played rid 32 x Se Pointe Ex t Emn tx Ema t uo Emin Ema a a ye 2 rig O55 0 344 Fig 248 Output Value chart of the workplane Obstruction Of course the obstruction can be also taken into consideration in DIALux For this it is also necessary to define this in the CAD By the selection Edit daylight obstruction in the menu Edit or by right click on the room the obstruction can be inserted In the obstruction scene the room Is shown in its exterior view Now objects can be planned arbitrarily round the room Also the room can be raised if it necessary e g a room ina higher floor The obstruction shades the direct light as well as the reflected light which hits the obstruction objects DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 162 DIALux Version 4 7 Jisai Da fE i i a _ je Ey uo ej ar if E S i i z j ee e G a a E a E ibe SS bem Seed Fig 249 Obstruction in CAD view Sun and shadow visualisation The direct incidence of sunlight in the room can be simulated on a real time basis For this an OpenGL compatible graphic card is necessary The incidence of light by windows and or skylights is calculated as a function of place orientation geometry and date and time CE aec asise of rs i te oe
125. L 1SINOVA Fig 55 Property Page of the luminaires within the selection Edit Mode When certain options are used DIALux 4 7 switches to an edit mode For example this happens in the following situations o Free input of anew room Change room dimensions at a later stage Edit a ground element in an exterior scene Edit a calculation surface Edit an extrusion volume O O O To switch to the edit mode go to the Project manager select the object you want to edit with the right mouse button and click on Edit Room Geometry Edit Ground Element or Edit Calculation Surface Alternatively you can select the options from the menu Edit A third way is to click on Edit Room Geometry in The Guide It is advisable to modify the room geometry in the ground plan view DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 50 DIALux Version 4 7 E Project 1 Fl Luminaires Used Ee Foo conf Wor Insert Luminaires j l w iy Edit Room Geometry Seer j Elll Ey Wall Edit daylight obstruction E Calculate i aoe on Og Insert light scene i g A Insert control group H Lum 20 Standard view Fe LS Floor Plan Level Symbolic F9 Duplicate Room gt Delete labl Rename Fig 56 Room context menu right click on room After this option has been activated the room s ground plan can be modified individually Relevant changes occur to ground elements and calculation surfaces Lien eee SS J inal ie ill TETE i i Pal ama E Tre
126. Lighting Exterior Scenes You can use DIALux for planning of exterior scenes with almost the same steps you normally use in indoor lighting After starting DIALux you will see a startup dialogue fi _ ren Lisl Preyent a i n rT Mew Sheet Project pen Propect Hirer cae aa ra oF amp Hew menor Project MN DlALus Wizards he Show Ghee dislog af neal peran atari Fig 341 Startup dialogue In the startup dialogue you can choose New exterior project and DIALux starts with a new empty exterior scene You can have rooms exterior scenes and street scenes in one project j a T x Tr ja i i i 4 a AR ii E 1 EEL a afl i b Ae e i pii i E Fh g mt r a bam pees Fig 342 Start DIALux 4 7 with a new exterior scene In the Project manager the exterior scene is quite comparable to a room An exterior scene contains ground elements furniture and luminaires The room contains walls floor and ceiling instead of the ground element DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 213 You can insert further ground elements from the furniture tree DIALux Version 4 7 Ground elements have their own photometric properties The calculation results are limited to their surface You can insert additional ground elements from the furniture tree Jdugar aunt Jokos s i EERI mea e Bell viaf 24 E i ENE Uhi n i a i B imma im i E m mi Wint ripere nr ri m Ss Lag ie Fig 343
127. Ludenscheid page 3 DIALux Version 4 7 Contents SOME SMES n e ie sinus ice tases enema tions 4 New functions in DIALUX Version 4 7 ecer 10 New features and improvements serere 10 Changes in existing functionality 10 AstallatioN ernment eee ie eter one 12 Installation after Internet Download ceee 12 installation from CD ranira nai 13 ORINE M Earann a 14 Online Update aiani 14 M anage Newsletter subscription ccccsseseeseeeeeneees 14 Wishes and Feedback Send problem report 14 Install Luminaire Data ceceeesecsseeeeeseeeeeeeseesaeeeensnesss 15 ADOUEPIUOM S coreana a a i 15 Online update of luminaire catalogues 15 About Online Catalogues cccceccsssssseesesseseereeees 16 FAO PIOI Sonerien T 16 DIALUX directories oscinina 17 Background information sssssessrserrrrerrrrerrreerrrrerrreens 17 Furniture textures my database 17 NVA COW SV ISlidliveaeasScdaesduaendscouonsstond E anO riei 17 Projects and raytracing fil S ccccssesscessseeseeeseeeees 17 WIRGOWS V IStdiateccictscivtasssine us ceaeviettneue dndaaitelaneneieentan 17 Prograni files SUDO OI sunistvnsiinnevannensh vitro aaan 18 Windows 2000 XP ViSta cccecscsseseeseeeeeseererseeeettens 18 Common used program files DIALux Pluglns 18 Windows 2000 XP ViSta cccecscssseseeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeteens 18 DIA LU CLIO E Conveen 19 Working with WIZArdS cccccseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeersneretsaes 25 The DIALUX User
128. MENU ssseerrreeerrrreerrrrreeern 172 267 Redo camera view Redo positionS 172 268 Changing into the wireframe Mode 173 269 Graphically modifying the object height 174 270 Dragging an object by its corners and automatic FOLATION crchsssnnteassataieeaanugieaiensdnaiunacadnawninas 175 271 Pick grid settings Display Grid cercen 175 272 Pick grid settings SNAP Grid ccceceseeseeeseeeeeees 176 273 Pick grid settings Angle PICK assesseer 176 274 Pick grid settings Colours of the Pick grids 176 215 ROLAUMNG ODI CCES asia Sen east chariesne Wie untace rade can teranceats 177 276 Object context MENU essssesrrsesrrreerreerrrreerrrerrrreens 177 277 COMDINING ODJET aina 178 278 Specify the coordinate origin erener 179 279 Coordinate origin which was moved outside the cube aE EE E A E EEE E E T 179 280 Resetting the rotation of the origin of an object or CANUTE anara ta shear leche ete eca aston te ee 180 20 1 EQIUNG SUITACES hevin 180 282 Calculating grid and furniture surface output 181 283 Selecting a single surface with the mouse 181 284 The tape measure ICON ceeeseceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseees 182 285 The tape measure function in the ground plan view Fs AA ones E E E S AE 182 286 The tape measure function in the 3D view 182 287 Fixed grid with a spacing of 0 5m in X and Y CIrECUO Meaca 183 288 Automatically by the walls generated temporary help A E E ENE O ENA OET
129. NES nrnna daateeciesiacawen seis 213 Ground EIEMENS wise visicnaerctuterereensvitretunaiatetineahetaan 214 Floodlight INUMIMGEOitastinaacisteactiatatecsint Meeneteian 215 Lighting Design according to prEN12464 Part 2 ENG 99 SFZ nate retardaasa tno dst 216 Glare RATING wiaaxes tus stsnece use deatattated oucaennealnct icant 216 Obtrusive Light ULR Calculation ereere 217 Obtrusive Light Luminous Intensity Calculation Point E E EE T 218 Street Valuation Fields in Exterior Scenes eenn 219 Road NOM EIN Gineoaren a a 221 Standard SUCCES cates suncaecioolvtincimicavenbaeseietiautuatesseuns 221 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 7 DIALux Version 4 7 Quick Street Planning Wizard 222 Wizard Optimised Street Light Arrangement 227 Street Planning without Wizard esenee 229 Illumination Conditions Wizard eseeeeereen 230 Illumination Class Wizard ssesssseeserreerrrreerrrreernn 239 IMPORtING R table Sannaa i 244 Street UMNA tION errire anrea aN 245 Luminance Calculation according to DIN 5044 251 DOORS COMPICKES anaa a N 253 Inserting a sports compleX ssssssssesrrreerrrreerrrrreern 253 Editing a sports COMPIOX ccececeseseeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeenes 254 Initial calculation gridS essssesssserrnerrreerrreerrrrerrrrerrns 255 Ple POSION Seana 256 EEEN AS E A E E 256 OUDOT irain T ima ccetnenthenseneed emis 257 GlODGl OUTDUE SENOS erann 259 User Data and Project Data ccceseccssseeseeseeeeees 259
130. O EEA E EE EAE E A TE EEE EE TEE 298 VIEW n a E A AA 170 www dial de UDAO a A E 3 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 341 DIALux Version 4 7 Appendix A Keyboard Short Cuts General Online help Display Guide window Edit Rename Cut Copy Paste New Open Save Print Undo Redo Delete View CAD window 3D Standard view Floor plan X Y level symbolic Front view X Z level Side view Y Z level Wireframe display Help rays for luminaires Show Isolines in CAD Show false colours in CAD Zoom in Zoom out Measure distance Cancel selection Ignore raster Roam scene up down left nght Change view Change perspective Fumiure Rotate mode change scaling Move ongin Move in z direction Change working plane in 3D Mark several surfaces Colours Textures Change a surface DIAL GmbH L denscheid F1 F4 F2 Ctr Xx Ctn4 c Ctrn vVv Cti Ctn O Ctri S Ctr P Ctn Z Ctr yY Del F8 F9 F10 F11 Ctr W Ctr R Ctri l Ctr F Cti Ctr Ctd Ctr Q Left mouse button Shift Left mouse button Ctn Left mouse button Shift Perspective mode via left mouse button Ctn TAB key Left mouse button Alt Left mouse button Ctr Left mouse button Space Left mouse button Ctd Left mouse button Shift page 342 DIALux Version 4 7 Filter fora luminaire forall luminaires Help lines End Move whole lines Camera Save position Save position Save posit
131. OOM oc E tintin ie amino ehatiamanenss 248 PANONE S S esa Gen arsnataleeaantaanar ast 147 CODING aa ATA 104 Calcula no oN ee a E Tey cn mre i Emenee he 180 CAECUS UON sereisas aa a e Tei 46 Cale HALON ONG aa meena 243 250 264 carcula tOn e SUES onora 181 calculation surface SUMOUNdING ANCA icin incitement N 197 Calculation surface WOLK ON Colt teate vata uitvactl E 197 CIBSE TM TA manna a 41 CON d deaa 0l Renee nner mer een a rnncet eres 36 CON OM GIOU DS nauraa E A 139 Coordinate ATOW Scene ees eee chance niet 57 cCooraMate ONO eenn E T 177 davon aeaa span iene pea naawaunmaneoamnenamemessy 143 daylight CalCUlAllO Niicessa tirsdinnmseadatiaeticerasactonmenigaasaens 60 159 DAVIIGNAE TACHONS corun sennae 143 GaViIIGNE ODSIMUCHON stintrnnins Adnan abet 158 Delete Coordinates scvincsvcnwens viii vedivas sucess auiarinesiecitahavudeunes 52 DIALUX LIGNE CONT O insanire A 148 AMMINI VAES ananin i 139 DYD OTS NVC Dorina a aa a 300 DWG and DXF DWG Or DAFIMNDO arnt 271 DA Terena A anneataoten 271 Edit Calculation Surface essai cen ceta tins cuca tas demsummernt estes Saeniesenss 50 EdIO GrOUNG ElEMCH i osrin A 50 Edit ROOM Geometar A 50 ENG ANII anaa a eon mre ne nara ee eee ee 112 EUG rerien Graudoleab iunisieiWentuuaavtamsetwamadeatasiens 40 41 export GUEDUE Ga MICS paaa a N 269 furniture Save TURMEO Cie raiate cuter mannii bi iautivaeucincadaete 178 FUELING TCO anir a a 44 52 JA O A reams 104 GSS SITIO EE E EE EE E E EE 235
132. Property Page the user can optimize the maintenance factor for the luminaire arrangement If the luminaire manufacturer has defined maintenance parameters for this luminaire in his Plugin or his ULD file this will be marked in the field Luminaire type and also if it is available under Lamp type The maintenance factor depends on the ambient conditions already defined in the Property Page of the room the mounting height because of room index k is defined using mounting height the hours of operation insert at this point and the lamp and luminaires maintenance interval define also at this point If the luminaire manufacturer has defined no parameters the user can choose under luminaire type and lamp type in the drop down lists from the CIE example data If you want to use other factors for some reasons you can mark the checkbox in the lower area above the individual factors DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 70 DIALux Version 4 7 L File Edit wiew CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Gutpuk w MEE HETI its aR HA m role RRd Projektmanager Fa Fo Luminaire Mounting Arrangement Maintenance factor Luminous emittance 1 Luminous emittance 2 Lall Maintenance interval Every 3 0 years Luminaire type User Defined a E Replacement interval lamps in peara fi O Lamp tyoe User Defined WM Individual replacement of defective lamps Edit individual factors manually MF D ASh I LMF J LLM I LSF is
133. Ray creates every 360 25 14 4 degree a picture The camera should be turned around its own centre Therefore it is necessary to translate it into the origin before rotating otherwise the camera will be rotated around the origin on a circular path To achieve this you have to enter lt translate camlocation gt then lt rotate lt 0 clock 360 0 gt gt then again lt translate camlocation gt desired rotation zy camera a 0 0 translation path Doo S turn without translation Fig 514 Camera Rotation and translation Each picture will be calculated one after another after clicking on the Run icon Each picture will be saved into the work directory with consecutive numbering With any animation tool pictures can be combined to a movie avi mpeg The freeware tool VirtualDub can create such movies in a short time in high quality http www virtualdub org index Translation animation You can define a camera path using clock To do so the Ini file and the POV file have to be changed Instead of the camera rotation you can change the camera location using the clock parameter In the following example we change the POV file of the first example The Ini is already changed The POV file will be changed by adding the clock variable to the X position of the camera location declare GAM M A 1 4 declare AM BIENTLIGHT 0 0 dec
134. Rusk route Lighting Task Area Lighting Anti Panic Lighting Fig 228 Types of emergency lighting Standby lighting is calculated like a regular lighting design The option to do an emergency escape lighting design is available when a lighting scheme is inserted into a DIALux project and it is set to an emergency lighting scheme Because the emergency situation and lighting is often integrated into a regular lighting design and realised with luminaires which are in use also for the regular lighting this reduces the work the designer has to do You are able to select those luminaires which are used for emergency lighting from all the luminaires placed in a room and you can also place additional luminaires which are only used in an emergency Such luminaires which are only used in the emergency case are not taken into account in the regular lighting calculation But these luminaires are placed and they are listed for the outputs to locate them for the commissioning You can select for each luminaire whether it is used in the regular lighting in the DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 149 DIALux Version 4 7 emergency lighting only or for both cases The duration time and the luminous flux can be set for the emergency case The dimming of luminaires and taking daylight into account in an emergency lighting scheme is of course not possible To create an emergency lighting scheme you just have to select the desired room and make a r
135. TY Camera General Sport Area Soccer Field Handball by O o o gh amp We 6 i A 4 U Aon Basketball volleyball Tennis Badminton Track Fig 417 Selecting a sports complex Editing a sports complex In DIALux as with rooms or street scenes you can change the spatial geometry of a sports complex You can do this either manually in the plan or 3D view or via the project manager After selecting the sports complex with a left mouse click on the outer edge you can make changes e g general description position and size of the sports complex and other settings for marking the sports field Alternatively changes can be made via the project tree by selecting the sports complex required DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 254 DIALux Version 4 7 doa tee eee tries ates i ee ULE bm a kpe Ir FE men r r 4 i ai jil bebe Er p a he r a eS Y aeei e fa lE as r Select the sports field by clicking left oy Pg kr i Ta Ta Fig 418 Opening the project manager for editing a sports complex After basic editing of the sports complex you can also insert the sports field elements depending on the type of sport e g two goalposts for a football field You can do this by clicking with the right mouse button in the project tree on the sports complex e g football field and then selecting in the context menu which now appears Insert sports complex elements bee Feren Eee Eme eet Be pii S
136. UGR calculation It can produce the following UGR results 1 The UGR table for all luminaires with direct lighting with a spacing to height ratio SHR of 0 25 or 1 2 The single sheet output and the summary of standard rooms rectangular without furniture only one type of luminaire shows the four standard UGR values for the left wall and the lower wall viewing lengthways and across the luminaire axis This saves doing the manual calculation with the help of the standard table 3 You can place UGR observers at workplaces to get UGR values with respect to a position and viewing direction b all used luminaires c position and rotation of the luminaires d shadowing and reflection 4 With UGR calculation areas you get the distribution of the UGR values on an area The calculation is comparable to the calculation of UGR observers The output lists information about local glare problems on arbitrary places in the room The output of part 1 is a table of the corresponding values For part 2 and part 3 you get single UGR values For part 4 you get isolines and greyscale diagram a chart and a table of the values Possible UGR values are between 10 and 30 Smaller values are shown as lt 10 Larger values are shown as gt 30 Insert UGR Calculation Point and UGR Calculation Area You can insert UGR calculation points and UGR calculation areas via drag and drop from the furniture tree into the CAD NOTE If you place these ob
137. Working with Wizards Calculate the number of luminaires On the basis of the efficiency method DIA Lux calculates the necessary number of luminaires for a specified illumination The luminaires which are outside the room are not considered in the calculation Quick Planning Wizard 7 x Alignment Specity the alignment of the luminaires in the room Enter the desired alignment of the luminaires ane in the room Preview i Jengthways i ACOs Options may be deactivated to prevent overlapping luminaires If reguired change the distance between the first row and the left wall lengthvays or the first column to the bottom wall across respectively Distance 0 760 m lt Back Cancel Fig 28 Working with Wizards Alignment of the luminaires In the Alignment dialogue you can specify the orientation of the luminaires as lengthways or across DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 31 DIALux Version 4 7 Quick Planning Wizard Xx i Finishing the quick planning wizard You have completed the quick planning wizard successtully You can now edit the created room as usual with OlAaLus You could also immediately calculate the room I Immediately calculate created room To esit the wizard click on Finish z Back Cancel Fig 29 Working with Wizards Calculate result Click on the Finish button and DIA Lux will begin the calculation and afterwards the calculated result will be displa
138. Y DOM AZIA nA N 158 SKY DONE MEIGMIE siara a a 158 Plaka ien a 158 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 340 DIALux Version 4 7 olar PION aone costae Gtacet ene 158 SA ANO Eeer R 112 SUSANE AEA A E E EE EE E E EEE E 233 Street Hemen isi atred aaa aba adi 232 street luminal Sis seen ene een en a Nn 247 Seel ranae araa a A amantics 221 SANOA annn a aaa 163 s rate naME onian a a a a 180 SYME Caena a 109 CADES aea a a aa 261 ic aa e Ea AEE E AEE E EEE EA A E T AA 234 CSA N iiaon ves dn ated ahicai daa ta lake 52 Task area DIN 0S Dl sake eictie ete eho dae ee eee ea 197 EN Teak ce ead So cae eats bah dean ad Ceatenratie alga bal btea Gotta eal 197 technical data of the luminaires esseere 103 Technical Report of the European committee for Standardisation CEN TR 13201 1 230 texture rOtate ate de een eo en ne i 93 textures METOM S ascents oaiest act faite accent teat deh ene Sone 93 NDOT CROC UT CS daan arte onsensuca te naan N 94 Tool tips for calculation FESUITS ccceeeeeccsseeeeeeeessaneeeeeees 166 TaM paranna E A ta anda wd 3 UG o AEE PEN NOE EE OA E N EEEE E E TT 211 UGR is 6 seamen eae em ee r a T a 211 VIEWING GIFECHON ainainen a A A anaes 212 UMON eia a a aa 223 AVN ACh HONERA Orana a a 217 user Mte aC nornin naeatianiaitahenaiuaatenan cute nuniatnats 34 Valuation TENG eremi Taa 223 245 V6 6 cere a a a ee 79 vertical illuminance ccc cecccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeneees 237 VIG C
139. You can now select lower hierarchical levels and use a different output standard here For example you can select Room 1 and select the Complete Documentation standard which in this example describes a very extensive documentation The other rooms are not affected by this change as these still use the Short Documentation output standard which has previously been assigned to the project Thus you can influence the individual output subdirectories thereby deviating from the global standard Of course you additionally have the option of selecting the output types individually for every object in the output tree To use a user defined output standard as default setting select it from the Name listbox and click on the As Standard button In the listbox the phrase Standard appears in brackets behind the corresponding name To delete a user defined standard select it and click on Delete After another standard has been selected from the listbox the one deleted previously Is not available anymore Save Output as PDF File Similar to the printing you also can export the output to a PDF file After you selected all desired information with the small printer symbol you select the menu File gt Export gt Save Output as PDF i TTT T o paw g i uf toy if a il bi Sewn igs fe eet bes i Pesos one a ee ar a E a Fig 438 Export the output to a PDF file This menu is only available if one output window is active Then y
140. a gt Didu luminaire cat Refresh list GR Mot Installed Cs BlAdos Lemp catalogues Cris Cabaig 2 Luminaire Files ntime Catalags i Wed Feed bo correct bo Hha caries ipl aa De peu agree and rauk pou lee bo proceed l DUE ore Pisaln cata keg update E r a Pg cat ache hiik i h h wae e ah Fig 5 Online update of luminaire catalogues About Online Catalogues DIALux offers the possibility to use online catalogues Online catalogues have the advantage that you can insert in each case the luminaires which you need straight into the DIALux project without installing a complete Plugin on the PC Working with online catalogues is described fully on page 101 Lamp Plugins DIA Lux includes a lamp Plugin interface After selecting a luminaire from the luminaire catalogue you can select the correct lamp for this fitting Luminaire Plugins only offer standard equipment data for the luminaires The numerous variations of the same lamp type makes it absolutely necessary to select the exact lamp type which will be used in the installation Some of the luminaire Plugins directly offers the possibility to select the correct lamps from a lamp Plugin for the desired luminaire If this feature is not yet integrated in the luminaire Plugin the lamp Plugin can be started directly from DIALux Lamp Plugins have to be installed by the user like the luminaire Plugins DIALux offers for both lamp and luminaire Plugins some demon
141. a ae Fig 436 Property page output exterior scene Creating User Defined Standard Output The user can generate and save frequently used combinations of output types in DIALux To do this a folder that contains output must be selected in the output tree Selene tou i Tanke cd Coie p Liana pati kal prah Deihi Lunde Daa Shee LO Poke A LOC Lires a Sidd Gir Project U i o Pobi Ose Ga cl Tobie o oady Liiki farli ine 0 Ci Cee heer e CARL 1 im AD ee ar 6 Lunine Gusta Fet ag 6 Lette 7 3 CAL JE HALES BL See 1 g GLa 1 oA Anon eye bpr Prec ce 6 Luminaire parts it ee La piyi E Fitr piy dG Lurnieires eyoul plan e aa ea 6 Faire liri plat I Pumie ioari E osn slerments ayak pin Roon elements ooondinabes lest Codin pria ornes lek Eiroa rk ery ov Lumn a uipa Fig 437 Creating standard outputs Start on the highest hierarchy level i e the project Select the project in the output tree in this case project 1 If you wish to use a preset standard select it from the Name listbox To generate a standard check the output types which should be included in your standard Please keep in mind that the list contains all output types including those of lower hierarchy levels For example if you check the Isolines E output type in this hierarchy level it is also checked in all lower hierarchical levels DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 267 DIALux Version 4 7
142. ace z 0 at all times The arrow of a flood light arrangement maintains his length if the ground cannot be hit The maximum length of an arrow is 999m e Various translations At various passages the translation of DIALux manual has been reworked e Various bug fixes Due to the strong participation of our users in the DIALux Forum www dialux com different smaller bugs in DIALux could have been fixed Thank you DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 11 DIALux Version 4 7 Installation The installation of DIALux is easy to do Please close all other application programmes before installing DIALux Installation after Internet Download After you have downloaded the DIALux Setup version no exe from our homepage www DIAL de or www dialux com on your hard disk you can start this file by one double click with the right mouse button Afterwards you can follow the simple instructions on the screen The installation program of DIALux may require you to install a newer version of the Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5 5 or higher is needed this can be downloaded from www microsoft com The setup checks automatically which components are needed for your computer and automatically downloads them _2DIALux Setup x Downloading features Please wait Please wait while downloading selected features on your system Calculating download size 39 9 MB Cancel Fig 1 DIALux Setup The setup enables you to install only tho
143. aire that are in this contral group WACO 422 88 bd bd dd ac 05 0 Straight edger TobiasGrau FM12 2 EMMA TRIO brass TobiasGrau BG41 0 AGATHE CHILD alu pol Luminous emittance 1 100 w Luminous emittance 2 0 1x TobiasGrau FM12 2 EMMA TRIO brass J 1x TobiasGrau BG41 0 AGATHE CHILD alu pol ll 0 x DIAL 3 BS 900 Leuchte Room 1 Workplane a Light scenes ia Og Light scene 1 a Control group 1 3 Control groups B Control group 1 J 2 1 Fig 221 Dimming individual light outputs separately If no light scene is inserted in the room only the room is calculated as before M odify light scenes and control groups You have the potential to duplicate light scenes as well as control groups In this manner the task is made easier for you if the same lights with different dimming levels are to be used You can find this function in the context menu of the light scene or control group Light aea Teaeiget Pacha per yak ae Emp i T F r yeny i am n i TET Cored po T a z ion EFE Line ght gee E LAD Ga Goran geupe H pi tod pag eens E Pie m pre ier n Fe F ii Frejat Pare ge ieai iet PETT t oe oT E Oo i an Be re joe Fig 222 Duplicate light scene or control group DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 146 DIALux Version 4 7 The function of brightness distribution in the calculated room can be accessed in the menu File gt Settings gt Adjust Brigh
144. alculation grids PE E AEE aia PE A T T 202 326 Methods for defining calculation points 203 327 Aligning the grid points to the edges of the axes 204 328 Inspector Calculation grid for radial calculation UGS wick ected esha E ceagsnat E A 204 329 Creating a measuring grid cccceeeeeeecseeeeeeeeeeees 205 330 Pre setting the calculation of the calculation grid 206 331 Setting limit values for gradients 206 332 Changing an output option Display values 207 333 Procedure and values in real time calculation 208 334 Camera oriented luminous intensity selection and EUO Sore eaitkadeare csi cuialoccainaciareden 208 335 CAD output of camera oriented luminous intensity EAEE OEI EE E Baa ea eee 209 336 Displaying isolines in CAD essseeerrrrreerrrrrererrrrnes 209 337 Selecting an isoline profile eseese 210 338 Calculation POINUS sidan a 210 339 Insert UGR objects into a ro0M sssrin 212 340 Viewing direction of an UGR observer ees 212 341 Startup ClalO gU Gne 213 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 334 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 342 Start DIALux 4 7 with a new exterior scene 213
145. also the video size the number of frames per second and the duration can be defined The size defines the number of pixels in the X and Y direction on the screen The higher the resolution the more space Is required to save the video If you want to prepare a presentation for a TV DVD or S VCD you should select a standard resolution In Europe the PAL format is common in the US the NTSC format is used normally Also the frame rate Is defined in the standard format The camera speed is defined by the film length the frame rate and the length of the camera path The speed along the camera path is constant If anti aliasing Is selected the quality of the video will be better but this function needs also some calculation time In the field camera motion you can see a summary of the camera path and speed M oving the slider Preview brings the 3D CAD view into the position of the camera along the path So you can check the resulting video before you have created it If the DIALux project becomes bigger a good graphic card is absolutely necessary We recommend a Nvidia graphic card with a memory of at least 128MB If you are working in MESA mode and the DIALux project is DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 300 DIALux Version 4 7 complex a lot of objects a large area the 3D CAD will soon start to judder Clicking on Create video will open a Save As dialog The location and the filename have to be selected here After th
146. aluation all together or only in part It is important to realize that energy evaluation is only defined for inner rooms Outdoor scenes and streets are not part of the evaluation Properties of the room and the project geometry obstruction location and north alignment are automatically identified analyzed and reused for energy evaluation by DIALux The same holds for windows and roof lights In particular daylit and non daylit assessment zones are determined automatically The specific connected load is no problem for the user too it is taken directly from the planned luminaires in the room DIALux 4 7 is designed in such a manner that a lighting designer is able to do a lighting design and fulfill energy requirements at the same time with as little additional effort as possible Ideally the additional energy evaluation needs only a few mouse Clicks DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 282 DIALux Version 4 7 Structure of an energy evaluation project Once an energy evaluation is part of a DIALux project there is an energy evaluation project beneath the DIALux project Leroi hie Emera Evaa Zandani En 15130 W Dee reas gy Pract oo Luminaires Lined fag Breer Pincers i pawn Fig 458 Energy evaluation project in project tree For this energy evaluation project a standard can be selected according to which the evaluation will be done Currently EN 15193 and DIN 18599 are possible Multiple simultaneous energy ev
147. aluation project with all important characteristics DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 295 DIALux Version 4 7 Of course the user has the possibility to select which details are shown on each output page Details fer Qeutput Prarbibioning Hony Partie Repulse e Canput description jv Output Subordinate Objects Fig 485 Property page of the above output page The output of all involved parameters Is most important because all energy performance standards demand such documentations Assessment Zone Daylight 1 Parameter Energy Evaluation According to Following Standard EN 15193 Accompanying Project Energy Evaluation Accompanying Utilisation Zone Utilisation Zone 1 Accompanying Energy Evaluation Room Office 1 energy evaluation project Parameter Value Total installed lighting pow er W Parasitic pow er of controls with lamps off W Emergency lighting charging power W 0 Daylight Time Usage h 2250 Non Daylight Time Usage h 250 Emergency lighting charge time h 8760 Constant illuminance factor 1 00 Constant Illuminance Controllable Maintenance factor 0 67 Occupancy dependency factor 0 90 Absence Factor 0 20 Occupancy control factor 0 90 Daylight Source Rooflight Daylight dependency factor 0 83 Daylight control factor 0 20 Control of artificial lighting system Manual Daylight Supply Factor 0 85 Maintenance Value of the IIluminance x 300 Classification of daylight penetration Weak 4 gt D gt
148. aluation projects are not allowed An energy evaluation project is activated by adding energy evaluation rooms to It This can be done either via the context menu of the energy evaluation project or via the context menu of a DIALux room 0I Project 1 aa Luminaires Used Energy Evaluati iti S Delete E A Room 1 x 2 h Workplane 2 Create one energy evaluation room per room in the DIALux pr a Insert energy evaluation room without link to a DIALus room i eiling Da wall surfaca jbl Rename Fig 459 Transfer of all DIALux rooms into the energy evaluation project inat uiar k x Bet hari arry Edt dapight obstruction Og Probert light scene Dat iiral pa rT ib Standard Views Fo ibs p Bee Hany Levee pine P Fig 460 Transfer of one single DIALux room into the energy evaluation project DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 283 DIALux Version 4 7 With the first method all rooms of a DIALux project can rapidly be transferred to the energy evaluation project so that they are part of the energy evaluation Also you can create energy evaluation rooms without links to DIALux rooms in this context menu Thus you can evaluate energy demands for rooms without doing any lighting planning for them more about that later on The second method via the context menu of one or even multiple DIALux rooms is best if you do not want all rooms of a DIALux project to be part of the energy evaluation Caution Each D
149. aluation rooms are created all assessment zones are determined and all parameters are adjusted then it s time to calculate the energy demands and other energy characteristics That s the moment when the real energy evaluation is done utpat Window Online 7 E Start Calculation Conduct Energy Evaluation Configure Qukpuk Print Single Sheet Qutput Fig 479 Start of an energy evaluation in menu Output You can start the energy evaluation either with Conduct energy evaluation in menu Output or with the icon of the same name 9 2 Pun Fig 480 Start of an energy evaluation with the icon of the same name second from left In both cases a complete energy evaluation for the whole energy evaluation project is done There s no selection of utilisation zones energy evaluation rooms or assessment zones as they are known from light planning calculations That is why energy evaluation is very quick It takes a lot less time than the user reading and editing a selection dialogue box As mentioned before the real energy evaluation Is done at the level of assessment zones So when an evaluation is Started the energy demand for each assessment zone is calculated Depending on the selected standard this may be only the total energy used for lighting or additionally the energy consumption used for illumination and the luminaire parasitic energy consumption In each case annual consumption va
150. among other things like desk utensils shelve contents or plants The simplified calculation is often sufficient to receive a good visual impression while the calculation time is clearly reduced Insert Decoration Objects Decoration objects are inserted just as other furniture in DIALux After you have placed the furniture you can select the tab calculation options in the inspector and activate the checkbox Use as decoration object Alternatively you can mark in the project tree one or several models and open the context menu via right click Choose the menu Use as decoration object Scale Rotate Select this surface Align and distribute Copy Along a Line Copying along a help line Use as decoration object Save Furniture Cut Copy Delete Fig 127 Context menu decoration object Decoration objects are marked with another symbol than furniture in the project tree DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 90 DIALux Version 4 7 a Project 1 veh alt Luminaires Used gl Floor ua Ceiling H E Wall surfaces Furniture Ai Cube 3ds Fig 128 Decoration object in the project tree Calculate with Decoration Objects In the calculation dialogue you can define whether the decoration objects are treated as those or as normal models Tiaa Caisa Daar a Emra b ba ginni Lar Cee Oats Lae ap lz Le A de oe ns r Roo F Pi nET 7 an al o Late oy bead jeo cedar Pmp coun G
151. ample of outputs for a sports complex You can open the corresponding pages of the output with a double click on the symbol next to the single output For further information please look at the chapter Output DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 258 DIALux Version 4 7 Global Output Settings User Data and Project Data In the menu Settings gt General Options gt Output you can define user and project data that are stored as default values These are used when you create a new project see also page 54 In the Property Page Output you can specify a bmp file as a logo The footer line is used for page 2 and the following pages Furthermore you can specify the names of five edit fields that are used later for information on the cover page DIALux 4 7 Standard Values Global CAD Window Output Contact Energy Evaluation Window Rootlights idine Thanea pt Output for working levels Draw Luminaires Isoline Values Font Size 10 0 pt Draurebierts Value Chart Font Size 10 0 pt Scale of graphics Maximum size C Optimal standard scale ew dS Header Display File path Display File name Project details Names For edit fields Attention Changes do not affect existing outputs The entries only applies to new output Fig 423 Output settings The logo and your user data are shown together on all pages after the cover page Project SS ee EBD Ughi S Ugh l Oper Kas Mueller Telephone a51 10
152. ance value of any selected point To do this you should switch to the 3D view enable the Tool tips for calculation results and select the Rotate view mouse mode M ove the mouse pointer to any position in the CAD window The calculation results are displayed at the bottom of the figure In order to indicate different points of calculation in your CAD window set your mouse function to Rotate View This way you can quickly reach each point in the room DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 166 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 255 Show calculation results in 3D view Now you can click at any point that Is of interest to you and the calculated illuminance is displayed in a small tool tip Save 3D View DIALux offers two different ways to export the current 3D rendering into a graphics file The easiest way to get a picture of the visualisation is to rotate or move the 3D view of a scene interior room exterior room or street into the desired position and then use the menu gt Export gt Save CAD view as JPG which opens a file selection dialogue m p ia cr aie Ge Sa aa IE TETEE EA oo E ENI EET gi JW E LEE i m C a S E om Fig 256 Save a 3D view as jpg file Here you can enter the directory and the filename The picture is stored as a jpg file with a 1024 x 768 pixel image To get a picture with a higher resolution proceed as follows o Make the planning as usual and adjust the perspec
153. ard You can also select single valuation fields and illumination classes for each element MEF Ta iinr fe ss Wabaal aam mrhihy ami agha d barar Pei Fa a b i a ba e Pe Fe a ee ien e or ie la e Ta di a Tn sere h ki Pe is ine mie ig Saas Sa Pa ale Pa T e 5 EI f i pa Lie i 0 ee pi iE 1 hF a a i bup f B Lae il of Salil 5 li Fig 362 Valuation Fields and Illumination Classes In the window Valuation field you can select a valuation field for the optimisation i e you define the photometrical data as basis for the optimisation You can change the respective limit values via left click on the numbers DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 224 DIALux Version 4 7 Te Timi oar Prk oi ceases baii e Pee ge Le Cowie eee te H eee Lj op p urri Ser Pr Seite ae dhe jy ee i hr eter ee rae Le a M oma l 1m riria ji bo poora E J Emr g k wae ETEF 1 En fe i rence herraren T ar b J Ter kia krae kar ee Pai hee i kleare eae Ep fe maar igi Pe ral ogg p Pr heeh fe p wo ps eo ee ee n Fig 363 Limit values for the optimisation DIALux provides you with the street arrangement adapted to the parameters selected However under circumstances according to selected parameters or used luminaires no arrangement which fulfils all limit values can be found On the window Substitute list you can specify the lower limit values Thus it is possible to sort all arrangement variants into three classes suitable largely
154. ard Traffic Flow of Motorised Vehicles In the window Conflict Zone select whether a conflict zone exists or not DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 241 DIALux Version 4 7 Illumination Class Wizard Conflict one Enter whether or not to take a conflict zane into consideration Fig 395 Illumination Class Wizard Conflict Zone Specify the Complexity of Field of Vision Illumination Class Wizard Complexity of Field of Yision Enter the complexity of the field of vision of the traffic participant Fig 396 Illumination Class Wizard Complexity of Field of Vision You define the Degree of Navigational Difficulty of the traffic participant in the associated window DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 242 DIALux Version 4 7 Illumination Class Wizard i xX Degree of Navigational Ditficulty 7 Enter the navigational difficulty of the traffic participant F How much effort will the traffic participant hawe to make in order to select a driving direction and driving lane or to maintain or change their speed and position in the roadway This effort results from the displayed information and the optical guidance provided by the street Degree of Navigational Difficulty ls lt Back Cancel Fig 397 Illumination Class Wizard Degree of Navigational Difficulty Afterwards you can select the estimated Brightness of Surroundings Illumination Class Wizard E g x Brightness of Surroundings Enter the estim
155. ariable arrangement parameters 226 367 POSITIONING SUGGESTIONS ccececeeseeeeeseeeseeseneeerens 227 300 FINdl CIAO GUC a A ees 227 369 Wizard Optimised street light arrangement 228 370 Context menu luminaire arrangement 228 371 Insert a new standard Street ccccceeesseseeeeeeeeees 229 372 luminance CONMGITIONS tex cactanenssavecuideaatndwnnieanes 229 373 Illumination Conditions Wizard Welcome dialogue Rr eer re ee ee ee ee eee 230 374 Illumination Conditions Wizard Typical Speed 230 375 Illumination Conditions Wizard Main Users and omer USCIS seit ots ate ar etre eet aa els 231 376 Illumination Conditions Wizard Final dialogue 231 377 Maintenance plan mMethod ccccsesscssssesersseeeetens 232 378 Insert and arrange the street elements 232 379 Insert street elements Vid MENU cccccesseeeeeeeeeees 233 380 Insert street elements via context mMenu 5 233 381 Properties of a roadway General 234 382 Properties of a roadway Street coating 234 383 Properties of a roadway Observer eeen 234 384 Properties of a roadway Surfaces 235 385 Insert valuation field via context MENU 236 386 Common valuation field ccccccccsssssseeeseeeeeseeees 236 507 CAICUIALION Grd aee a 236 388 Calculation Grid Illuminance Class 0c0008 237 389 Illumination Class Wizard Welcome dialogue 239 390 Illumination Class Wizard Typical Speed
156. at a standard windows dialog appears where the user can select the video codec to compress the movie Video Compression Compressor Fig 493 Windows dialog for the video compression settings In the drop down list all the codecs installed on the computer will be listed These codecs are not installed by DIALux The quality of the codec is responsible for the quality of the video The better a codec Is the smaller the size of the file will be and the higher the quality of the video will be Some of the codecs are free of charge The codec has to be installed on the computer that creates the movie and on the computer that plays the movie Microsoft XP already includes several codecs These are available on all the XP machines if they were not deselected during the installation of the operating system Some codecs are available from the internet For example from here www divx com or here http www divx digest com software xvid html The last link leads to an open source project The official site is here http www xvid org Some of the codecs are offering a wide range of settings Please click on settings to define the settings for the creation of the video DIAL can not offer any support for the usage of a codec NOTE a wrong codec or the selection of uncompressed full pictures will create a very large file size for the video Start to test your codecs with small videos to find out which one and which settings are the best
157. ated the room is calculated without daylight Individual or all light scenes of a room can be calculated at the same time Ligii nea plight factors Dimmie wales fF Tighe dage eta aitia hariad M Codais Duig guotieni Cwe moas m oe SkeHodet ve tt r Wal 4 Ll Lu lp Pak Arrangement lt ats Line Arari a ri Beret Paes ie la Lun gh tuna Fig 216 Property Page of a light scene Daylight factors In the Property Page Dimming values the control groups with dimming levels are set in an editable list DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 143 DIALux Version 4 7 gimme Curighe acters Cera wales O m ee Limra r reat q Cata grag I 5 i M Con tl grou a Ab Dni apr BE Poo E Core _ HN curl acer Bw walt GB wali was umi i an Piki Arr ate a lt a Lire Sater Project Art Tern umn gh Output Fig 217 Property Page of a light scene Dimming values Dirvi value Coke appare Dg E0 a Pa pe Lay rie Ffei ws Pune a Teres oy Lumen ciiam Fig 218 Property Page of a control group Dimming values The user has the option to make set dimming levels of the used luminaires visible in the CAD view and to edit in the appropriate Property Pages By means of the icons in the menu bar the dimming levels can be switched on and off Also there is the option to change between individual light scenes with the arrows provided tha
158. ated luminance level of the environment F Since the luminance level of the surroundings can only be estimated only broad classifications are made Medium City Environment High Innercity Environment lt Back Cancel Fig 398 Illumination Class Wizard Brightness of Surroundings The wizard indicates to you the determined illumination class in the final dialogue Upon completion of the wizard the illumination class is automatically taken over in your calculation grid in DIA Lux DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 243 DIALux Version 4 7 Mhiirnination Class Wiri Finhung the lumenation Chass Wired fou hare completed tha vazad pumceastuly Al of the phohomneine buena have been calculated for pour shee Dehtermned Iunmeshan Carmena To mol the vcard and pelagi Ihe colouleled dummneshon class chock Fresh Fig 399 Illumination Class Wizard Final dialogue Importing R tables The road surface is an important element of an outdoor scene Up to version 4 7 it was possible to select a road surface from a collection of standard surfaces With DIALux 4 7 it is now possible to add or to import your own R tables collection of road surfaces to DIALux and then use them for planning an outdoor scene To do this select File gt Import gt R table files DWO or BOF tin reget ond ect J mogak Teure files Puiu Pile Lurrina bier Fig 400 Importing your own R table Now
159. ation Otherwise DIALux will include each surface into the calculation even those surfaces which are actually covered and no longer visible DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 82 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 115 Create furniture Combine You can save furniture by using the context menu File gt Export function gt Save Furniture That way it is possible to use furniture in another project again 9 LITLE E i j azj JE fee af eee pe ot oes mr aio a jii i aa fi i pa el i wa a off 7 eer j r j Pm a _s ee im me H e o P m a eee mhs me g eg 2 aon Fa a a j Ti ae D si B a Bua E sw a rz a E a 7 Er ee p nies j ir om ET tI Fig 116 Create furniture Export furniture Now you can see your saved furniture in the furniture tree if necessary this must be updated once by changing into the Project manager and then back again into the furniture tree From there you can move them at any time like all other furniture into a room or exterior scene via Drag amp Drop into your CAD windows see also page 178 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 83 DIALux Version 4 7 pe pE few CAD pase LuminereSekcton Quint Winkw I Jai ad os 1 Be Lows amp TRIS 4 OB lo ele ake ak 2 Geometry Furniture Piles Ulam ae are crass Ainai bo pul ai oben ri a M i Standard elements i Rees chores Wired Ard da 28 Eeberio scene demari fel Caca
160. bility to define light scenes in a project For this a light scene is inserted within the room or the exterior scene by right click or insert menu In light scenes luminaires can be provided individually or as control groups with dimming levels Likewise a daylight situation can be defined Propel nianeger Legh ka Dati leha Hae yae Te a a a x LUSE Fi Re Cordes or oie Daid gau iil Lj Pret us Lurene eel al z a DIAL 1n SH ea Rom Wokpan L iph em a e l at Ltt Grieg z p Left care 7 H Gor Sree t Cortral group i Ha Corni ayp 2 E Fi i Cii 5 Wa orl ace el Laura _B project Ta Furribure Per of Lunas a gi umt Fig 243 Specify dimming values of the control group To accomplish a daylight calculation a light scene must exist in the room DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 159 DIALux Version 4 7 Daylight calculation If a project is started the global position must be defined first Projektmanager Project Contact Details Teme Location L denscheid Length r63 Save Width 51 22 i Remove Time fi h deviation from GMT W Summertime from 27 03 to 2010 E Project 1 Fig 244 Select the location Here the user can select any location DIALux offers a very long list of places on all continents so that the inputs are already filled for longitude and latitude as well as time zone Other places can be added arbitrarily Pape Deere fanaa Mie pia m
161. but have different light sources From the left Incandescent Flourescent 830 D65 high pressure sodium metal halide ceramic and Metal halide QUAITZ cccccseseerssseserseeereeeens 137 206 Four identical photos using different values for the white balance Source wikipedia foto Thomas SENEN cenia 137 207 Adjusting the white balance ccccecssseseeseeeeerees 138 208 Paste a control group via MANU sses 140 209 Paste a control group Context menu of the room PA E A O E vida hatin eats 140 210 Paste a control group Context menu in the CAD VE aneian a a ants accel ena 140 211 Property Page of a control group esscr 141 212 Insert a light SCENE via MENU ceeceesseseeeeeeeeeeens 141 213 Context menu of the room Insert a light scene 142 214 Context menu control group Add to light scene 142 215 Property Page of a light scene Light scene 143 216 Property Page of a light scene Daylight factors 143 217 Property Page of a light scene Dimming values 144 218 Property Page of a control group Dimming values E A EN E E A E anaes 144 219 Icons for showing dimming values and light scenes in CAD kussniodunedr inat 144 220 Viewable dimming values in CAD rererere 145 221 Dimming individual light outputs separately 146 222 Duplicate light scene or control group seeen 146 223 Adjust brightness Vid MENU cccccssseesseesseteessereeens 147 224 Adjust brightness CAD WINdOW sssri 147 225 Brightn
162. can add further settings to this The name the symbol and the geometry can be changed later TV cameras TV cameras are also to be found under sports complexes and can be inserted in exactly the same way as pole positions either with Drag and drop or by entering the geometrical data in the Inspector TV cameras can be mounted for example on a previously inserted pole position Just pull the camera to the pole position After placing as with pole positions it is possible to change the camera name symbol and geometry TV cameras can be rotated and aligned Do this either by aligning the camera on your own with the mouse or entering the desired angles in the tab Geometry in the sub item Rotation DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 256 DIALux Version 4 7 Tuning the camera by clicking left and moving the mouse simultaneously Fig 421 Aligning a TV camera Outputs By default the calculation results for sports complexes are merged and displayed in the outputs The outputs of a sports complex calculation are in the tab Outputs in the project tree If you have inserted only one outdoor scene and in this only one sports complex then you will find the outputs under Project gt Exterior scene gt Exterior surfaces gt Your sports complex or its individual calculation grids Standard outputs include e Merging e lsolines quantity depends on the number of illuminance values
163. can specify the distances of the luminaires to each other and from the wall After you have inserted all values correctly click on Calculate and DIALux Light will start the calculation DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 21 DIALux Version 4 7 AE TERT z alij Dak imen ml h a j Hear eap ere a ore ed che Er oi a Le a Bss ee a eles _ SS A fete Tikin en Piai ha ie Paerdie han O toed OE e La La am amino emj omi am om omj emi am om hata ar H cp ne fi fpi Fii E a ate am ES Arse is ip berm en e Lani fal Lees Biel ed ee i la ites TT _ tire _ Fig 12 DIALux Light Wizard Calculation Afterwards DIALux Light displays the results in a figure of isolux lines and a table for the work plane ae bei aed Herein a 1S pm CR Ses See peed ee ba mai a i lamia Lua E aa Dies faci lo ee ede E ft Chee aa i amp Phare is RE b ioe wee CEH EI fi fi BA Tma Fm E 1 re ee a oe a iH j par a a Hi jj fail im i EJ H jd W ET x i Lt ml TE jii kae 1 EA Fa ltd J oe H im E w g A F poo ial n nz rhe m p BE Ek LH TE i mi nai J oe iil tf i iS be ai nij ii Dia ay HI al LE Li TET nil Eg E7 d m a a Pi iamar Krain E Z Es l Caw fel Cass hl ie Let ee HJ ia P LE om oo es ee ian Fig 13 DIALux Light Wizard Calculated Result In the Result Output window you have several choices you can print the
164. cecsrcnaneaviivnchet capbatadecmnsecuane ayeads 129 Background information cccccceseseeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeees 129 Lamp spectrum Light COlOUTS c cccsseeseeeseeeees 130 COOUR IRET ooer ao aT 135 Coaction of spectral distribution of the light source and colour Mtei sredici N 136 Light colours in the ray tracing serere 137 WAG DalanNCE oana 137 Light Scenes and Control Grou cccccseseeeeeeeeeeees 139 DENNOM grenan rerrrrrr rr rere etn nmertrer cre rr ers 139 REQUINGIMEN TS erriaren e S 139 Generate a project with light scenes and control OUDS raoa 139 M odify light scenes and control groupsS 0068 146 EXDOMMOF IIGMESCONCS aii AN 148 Emergency lIQNting ccceccessseeeesseeeeseeeerseeeeersnesensaes 149 GOD a tebe caceam aeeneu esses 149 Escape route lighting cccccseeseceseseeseeeeerseeeeeeaneeens 151 Open area lighting anti panic ssssessrseesrrreeerrres 153 High risk task area lIQNting ccecsccsseseesseseerseerenes 156 Luminaires with emergency lights eerren 156 Emergency lighting data sheet 157 Daylight calculation in DIALUX cccccceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeerens 158 BASICS merrie n tre vontatevvaaiditedsas teaavtatrg ty teedadene 158 SKY EVO SS IM DAO X rrura nea 158 LIGNE SCCNCS anrai 159 Daylight calculation ccccesseeseeseeeeeseeeeeeaneeersneeeees 160 ODSHFUCTION tap siavarindihsitedasmidannniaceuaaiwenvia wean elaniete 162 SUN and shadow visualisation cccccseeeeeee
165. cing files are stored in the my documents folder This was necessary to make sure that users with restricted privileges can load and save files Windows XP Windows 2000 C documents and settings user name my documents DIA Lux e Drive is the system drive standard C e subdirectory my documents is localized Standard my documents Windows Vista C User user name documents DIALux e Drive is the systemdrive standard C e subdirectory user is localized DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 17 DIALux Version 4 7 e subdirectory documents is localized Program files support The DIA Lux directory is placed in the Program files folder This standard directory can be changed by the administrator The following examples are standard settings after a windows installation Windows 2000 XP Vista C Program files DIA Lux e Drive is the systemdrive standard C e subdirectory program files is localized Common used program files DIALux Plugins The DIALux directory is placed in the Program files folder This standard directory can be changed by the administrator The following examples are standard settings after a windows installation Windows 2000 XP Vista C program files common files DIA Lux e Drive is the systemdrive standard C e subdirectory program files is localized DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 18 DIALux Version 4 7 DIALux Light
166. ck on it with the left mouse button and pull it to any position within the project Alternatively you can define the exact position in the Inspector beforehand and let DIALux position the calculation grid DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 198 DIALux Version 4 7 Output Window ily Eile Edit wew CAD Pick TF adla evar Luminaire Selection New Scene k Luminaire Arrangement p Street Element fy Eurniture Room elements Windows and doors Exterior scene elements Spork Sikes Calculation surfaces No information a ailab Calculation points Calculation Grid Grid 4 a oo ma Textures Colours Light colours Ma Standard elements iE Room elements i windows and doors oo Exterior scene elements Sport Facilities el Calculation surfaces Sele points Colour Filters Energy Evaluation Insert Line Insert Poly Line z Calculation Grid Files Sport Insert Spline E F A Files E Insert Circle H a Outdoor 3 E Indoor o Insert Raster Fig 319 Inserting a calculation grid via the menu In total there are three different calculation grids quadratic radial or user defined according to your own parameters Calculation Grid Calculation Grid Radial Calculation User Defined Grid Calculation Grid Fig 320 Types of calcula
167. cssssseeseeeseneereeees 74 99 Export of the maintenance plan cccccseeeesseeseeeees 74 100 Edit room data ROOM surfaces 75 101 Edit room data AlIQNMent ccececeessseeeeeseeeeeeens 75 102 Properties of a Wall NAME cccccseeseessseeeereneeerens 76 103 Properties of a wall Material eere 76 104 Inserting a Standard element ceceeeseseseerseeeeees 71 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 329 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 105 Edit rooms Insert room element 78 106 Edit rooms Edit room element seernes 79 107 Edit rooms DIALUX room elements 79 108 DIALuXx room elements Vault cccccseseseesseeeeees 79 109 DIALux room elements Dome and half dome 80 110 Edit rooms Insert room elements via Property Page PA EE EA PE TE A IEA tere nasa aie 80 111 Drag and Drop of fuUrnitUre sssessisserrrerrrrrerrrreerrn 81 112 Create furniture Standard bodies 81 113 Create furniture Modify the dimensions 82 114 Create furniture CODY ccccscsssssssssssessssusesseeress 82 115 Create furniture COMDING ccccccccssstsseeeeeeeees 83 116 Create fu
168. d This is now written into the command line in the top of the PovRay editor Clicking on run starts the PovRay raytracing PLEASE KEEP IN MIND a 10 second movie with 25 FPS frames per second has 250 pictures to be calculated If One picture takes a minute you will wait 250 minutes or 4 hours and ten minutes Animation with the clock parameter With POV Ray also animation of scenes can be created Up to now only static images with fixed camera position and viewing direction have been made The following settings are defining camera position and viewing direction declare CAMLOCATION lt 1 5 1 7 2 6 gt declare CAM LOOKAT lt 6 4 1 7 7 6 gt It is important to know that X Y and Z are not the same directions as they are in DIALux Y and Z are changed compared with DIALux With the following command lines you can prepare POV Ray for creating animations DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 317 DIALux Version 4 7 Lb amp w A FW New Open Close Queue Rerun Hide 320x240 Animation Eoo Messages DlALux pow camera t location CAMLOCATION right lt 1 33333 0 O gt up lt 0 1 0 gt sky lt 0 1 0 gt angle 7 Took_at CAMLOOKAT translate CAMLOCATION rotate lt 0 clock 32360 0 gt translate CAMLOCATION union nha ert Fig 513 Animation settings The camera will be rotated around the upwards axis Because of that we will have a look around the room Rotate lt 0 clock 360 0 gt defines the r
169. d in the ground plan view they are only visible in this view not in any other 2D or 3D view They are meant to align objects to them or to place objects on them Moving an object towards a help line the snap will work on the bounding box and on the objects origin If an object is moved with the mouse on the bounding box dragger also the rotation of the object is align to follow the help line This will not happen if the object is dragged by its origin Fig 291 In the left sketch the object is moved on its origin on the right it is moved on the bounding box In the second case the rotation is adjusted Help lines are not printed out To insert a help line just press the icon or use the command Insert gt Help lines Fig 292 Icons to insert help lines After selecting a help line you can continue to edit this in the room with the aid of the context menu The functions available include Delete last point as well as cancelling the help line Just place a help line in the room and open the context menu with the right mouse DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 185 DIALux Version 4 7 button Fig 293 Further editing of a help line Simple help lines The simple help line is useful to align objects Moving an object towards the help line it will be automatically snapped on the help line when a specific distance is reached To avoid the snap temporarily just hold down the SHIFT key To avoid the snap continuou
170. d the result can be changed afterwards interactively by changes in the light scene Generate a project with light scenes and control groups Insert a new room and adapt all settings in the accompanying Property Pages see chapter Edit Room Data Subsequent you can Insert the luminaires which you would like to use in your project Select those which you want to assign to a control group If you have inserted a luminaire field you should activate the function Allow single luminaires selection because the possibility exists to select single luminaires DIALux offers the option to add your luminaire arrangement s to one or several control groups In the menu gt Paste gt Control group as well as in the context menu in the CAD window or in the Project manager you can add your selected luminaire s to a new or existing control group DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 139 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 208 Paste a control group via menu Sefer rye emirts Fra bey am IT oes bee Le fa_ri asl Bis al ERD i cae ve ee J SRB kal Ebr ies bme HE Fig 209 Paste a control group Context menu of the room peere E elie Ea E wil ae a ATLEET FS fa Jacl Giz as Elna Apis een ccee Aa ri i Eh i G E E i i ia Se ee ey ee ie ee a i im nm a E 1 F Fig 210 Paste a control group Context menu in the CAD view Then in the P
171. djustable luminaire positions now results from the mirrored arrangement Fig 169 Individually adjustable luminaire positions after cancelling the symmetry If you do not wish to change one particular luminaire position only then it is best to remove this luminaire from the luminaire arrangement You can do this by clicking with the right mouse button on the respective luminaire and then selecting change illumination point into an individual arrangement in the context menu When you do this the symmetry of the luminaire arrangement remains toa deen Parr k N et E e L mmm Sn er n E mm kk Fig 170 Transforming a single luminaire into an individual arrangement M odify the position of a Luminaire To modify the position of a luminaire you can select the luminaire in the Project manager Now you can use the Property Page with the coordinate fields DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 117 DIALux Version 4 7 Hepler iss j knee potas ei ele Bole eee eee gee eel eee Pep la erg Fig 171 Modify luminaire data Corrections Perk lager ipfam i Fimm pian LPPE snan bero bjarma ee bey cy reel lead ante Se Lage F a twee E i Fig 172 Modify luminaire data Mounting height Luminaires with articulated joints With DIA Lux it is possible in computer aided lighting design to make use of all the mechanical properties of luminaires In DIALux with 3D luminaire models it is possible as in
172. e Factors DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 73 DIALux Version 4 7 Also in the floor plan the ascertained maintenance factors can be shown Perhaps more importantly the output Maintenance Plan is added as a new output in DIALux Fig 98 View of the maintenance factors of individual luminaires in the CAD With DIALux it Is possible to save the maintenance plan as a RIF file TIETEET L Tr rd ey mi a ake si kaga CGH A aff a ieee ee ore L bij WP tgEayy N F Fig 99 Export of the maintenance plan In the Room Surfaces tab you can specify the reflection properties for ceiling walls and floor If you change the reflection properties for the walls you have to consider that always all walls of the room will be changed together DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 74 Deviation of north from the Y axis DIALux Version 4 7 F General Maintenance plan method Room Surfaces Alignment Standards Reflection Material Color Ceiling zo walls 50 f Floor 20 E Bia Project 1 Bry L E Luminaires Paper 5i Room 1 Metal F Held Workplane Standard Floor Standard wall Standard Ceiling Mortar light Lime Cast Plaster of Paris Plast Marble Fig 100 Edit room data Room surfaces The Alignment tab allows the setting of the north direction in relation to the Y axis For the room or
173. e geometry additional points can be inserted rr er Fig 185 Insertion of additional points to the lighting situation The project manager provides you with several possibilities to modify settings individually Amongst others you are able to make changes in Mounting Height Fig 186 1 Arrangement of luminaries Fig 186 2 and Rotation of single luminaries Fig 186 3 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 124 DIALux Version 4 7 Luminaire Mounting Height Arrangement a gt Mounting Type User defined v Suspension Height 0 095 m Mounting Height 2 895 m Height above Workplane 1 940 m Room Height 2 800 m Workplane Height 0 850 m Luminaire Mounting Height Arrangement aa Chessboard arrangement Position every second luminaire Standard positions Offset 1 Offset 2 Offset 1 2 Rough calculation Em of planned surface 279 Ix Em of entire scene 284 Ix Em of entire scene all luminaires 284 Ix ting Height Arrangement Rotations Polygon ii Align to first guide l Align to second guide User defined settings Individual Luminaire yi A g yi A g z oo i wv al oo F r FTI 1 Lt l l Rotation offset ot a0 180 erg Fig 186 Changes in Mounting Height 1 Arrangement of luminaries 2 and Rotations of single luminaries 3 at vertical planar lighting solutions For editing the two different axes within the geometry simply click the
174. e qreen axis as rotate around the blue AXIS Alon and distribute i Copy Along 4 Line mpa pin Move the object Fig 38 Context menu of a selected object rotate around the red axis If the Rotate option is activated the object can be rotated by clicking and rotating the point on the boom The red rotation point enables a rotation around the red axis likewise the blue and the green rotation points enable rotations around the blue and green axis respectively Please keep in mind that the object has its own coordinate system The object can be moved by clicking and pulling on the arrow cross New features since DIALux 4 4 e now you can switch via the tab key between the rotation mode and the scaling mode e the object can also be moved at the corners then even the rotation in 2D will be positioned on adjacent surfaces DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 37 DIALux Version 4 7 The Project manager Project Contact Address Details Location Mams BEW Wermekkrchen Descrpbonc Bd L Working Plane il Flooe TH Roof surfaces aj Wall surfaces J A Luminaires a Luminaire Arrangement iil s Luminaire Arrangement 2 Luminaire arrangement 4 Linkenanordnung e Lintenanordnung fe Linaenanordnuing Luminaire Arrangement Luminaire Arrangement Se Luminaire Arrangement iy Luminaire Ayr angenent ros Linkenanordnuing Project
175. e Inspector DIALux transfers the values entered in the table after you have operated the tab key After finishing editing the room data confirm with the OK button ir TOE i pail em B i i F imm Her pim Pma Click right mouse button TAB for editing Continm with OK e m a E F Ge Er tz T p on Si ee Les i Pee iE s kE Fig 79 Edit Rooms Insert room coordinates Instead of making a manual entry you also have the option to draw the room geometry with the aid of a rectangle or a polygon If you do not see all of your room you can zoom out from the view by using the Overall View of the Scene loupe button for the complete room view LS Edit yew AD Paste Luminaire Selection RN Ea aa m i hja 9 eeaic Fig 80 Edit Rooms Zoom to the overall view of the scene DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 63 DIALux Version 4 7 In order to see the 3D view you can use the right mouse button or click on the cube symbol 3D standard view You can use the double arrow for the rotation of the 3D view The button operations are the loupe zooms the hand moves and with the two feet you can roam the scene If you use a wheel mouse see page 35 these functions are also available dadaas gt Iphosa j ees ETET i eel hed e e a i 34 h wf b Ena mm His i i ma Ca LE Sai Geel el ly nS Rotate view Fr L b m 3 D VIEW Bs mg sam
176. e Is well accentuated You can render a second picture with higher quality if you are satisfied with the results DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 97 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 137 Output of the Raytrace preview DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 98 DIALux Version 4 7 Duplicate Copy Rooms Scenes Streets Duplicate an Existing Room An identical room can be created by clicking Duplicate First select the original room in the tree and then select the Duplicate Room command from the context menu Please note that the room information is duplicated dimensions materials etc together with the objects inside the room luminaires and furniture oe Se i oe tee ee ef Te es 4 gt eaten ES a Dadar casi En BEL E A able sheen cen Aaj el s Em l EF e a Stasis se Lita F T el EL af Fig 138 Duplicate rooms DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 99 DIALux Version 4 7 Insert and Edit Luminaires and Luminaire Arrangements You can open the luminaire tree by clicking in The Guide Select Luminaires In the luminaire tree you will see installed Plugins under DIALux catalogues With one double click on a name of a manufacturer you can open a Plugin Under not installed Plugins you can find the DIALux project partners whose Plugins are not yet installed A double click on the corresponding names of the manufacturers opens Its internet page There you can download the DIALux Plugin Additionally telephone numb
177. e and dimensioning type on the luminaire field dimensions The arrangement type is also taken into account when the luminaire fields are edited via CAD DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 108 DIALux Version 4 7 foo to Alece plan Ql Reon 1 3D ver de x 2h a Pet 3 a D HJA Fig 154 Luminaire field insert frames depending on the arrangement type In the CAD ground plan view three possible edit or insert frames for the luminaire field are shown When the Symmetrical Within arrangement type is selected the outer blue broken line appears The frame in the middle appears when Outer Edge to Outer Edge and the innermost red frame correspondingly appears with the Luminaire Centre to Luminaire Centre selection The dimensioning of the luminaires and of the start and end point of the field correspondingly changes You can change the extent of the luminaire field via the mouse To do this right click on the field in the tree or in the CAD By pulling on a line or on a corner coordinate you can change the extent just like you can do with the furniture Please note that the amount and of course the size of the luminaires remain the same Projektmanager pr Luminaire Positions Mounting height Rotations P Luminaire DIAL 365 900 Leuchte B m Project 1 E Luminaires Used Fig 155 Luminaires used in the arrangement The luminaires in an arrangement can also be manipulated subsequently As you can see in the DIAL G
178. e changed under Pole Arrangement gt Longitudinal DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 249 DIALux Version 4 7 The Inspector provides technical data on the inserted luminaire arrangement see chapter Luminaire Arrangement DIALux displays the street in 2D and in 3D view just like rooms and exterior scenes Fig 410 3D visualisation of the street You can rotate zoom and roam the 3D view and export it as jpg like all other scenes NOTE The rendering shows the distribution of the illuminance but not the luminance P Pa o o r r pea i E Lei 5an l Lau hei ap ii 12 Fig 411 2D visualisation of the street In the floor plan view DIALux also shows the valuation field calculation grid together with the street elements and luminaires DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 250 Insert a street into exterior scene DIALux Version 4 7 DIALux offers the option to insert streets into exterior scenes mi DE e pE fe ee eee fe ee EEEF J eades ja Juang SELEY M BG Js s Pei i mear He i bemi Bis ee OT E i T is a T k ta ar a LETE i i 57 _ l p I j eaen val 7 r TETEE ade F Peet Seer fri eee Peren af a mei A ar Sai mpe nny e j n r a E el eaan a T riri Las hy mer me r e a ea ee e Sh T Ama H LE E ar Fig 412 Insert street int
179. e clipboard will be pasted next to the position of the mouse taking into snap of any snap grid nearby To copy luminaires into a ceiling grid just place the first fixture Than move the mouse to the ceiling panels you need a luminaire in and press the CTRL H keys The luminaire is pasted and if the mouse was close enough the grid snap takes the luminaire in the correct position Copy Along a Line DIALux offers the possibility to copy an object repeatedly one behind the other This function Copy Along a Line is selected in the CAD window using the right mouse button or the menu Edit ae pp a LESI il hime pe fi iM Fig 308 Copy along a line with the mouse In the Inspector as an alternative or supplement to using the mouse you can edit the number of copies align the line the distance and the position of the last copy DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 192 DIALux Version 4 7 TETP E ja fuarzj ETE E a ls EIEIO slo i rtm ete ei bas ee fn ae oo Pa Be see pres k bise ihe ie um Fig 309 Copy along a line with the inspector Align and distribute It is often necessary when planning and positioning several different objects to achieve a flush surface or to adjust them vertically and horizontally to achieve a regular arrangement or a neat appearance to the ceiling In DIALux you can edit this in the context menu of the marked objects or in the menu Edit gt Align and distribute DJd ih
180. e ee See a ool oT T Em Pej i Right mouse click to open context menu a a i i ae See Fig 419 Inserting sports field elements Initial calculation grids In a sports complex depending on the type of sport there is at least one calculation grid You can change and adjust these At this stage it is also possible to insert additional calculation grids You can find out how to do this and about the settings in the chapter Calculation grids All these functionalities can be adapted to sports complexes DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 255 DIALux Version 4 7 Pole positions In sports complexes poles can be inserted on which either luminaires or cameras can be mounted To insert a pole in the project either click with the left mouse button in the Inspector under sports complexes on the symbol for a pole position and pull this to any position in the project via drag and drop The so called snap function or catch grid in DIALux makes it even simpler to insert objects The pole catches automatically onto significant points in the project e g in the corners of sports complexes Alternatively you can enter the required coordinates in the tab Geometry of the pole position gt Propckbrnanager Urmuriry Sport Hacili Pasir g i Uo fi oY Un mi of fh L100 im i m tt m iang _ amp 1 Fig 420 Inserting a pole position with the Inspector After inserting a pole you
181. e size The defaults are 0 08 for pretrace_ start and 0 04 for pretrace end e Gray threshold Diffusely interreflected light is a function of the objects around the point in question Since this Is recursively defined to millions of levels of recursion in any real life scene every point Is illuminated at least in part by every other part of the scene Since we can t afford to compute this if we only do one bounce the calculated ambient light is very strongly affected by the colours of the objects near it This is known as colour bleed and it really happens but not as much as this calculation method would have you believe The gray_threshold float value grays it down a little to make your scene more believable A value of 6 means calculate the ambient value as 60 of the equivalent gray value calculated plus 40 of the actual value calculated At 0 this feature does nothing At 100 you always get white gray ambient light with no hue The following pictures show a spot light white directed to a green wall The first picture has a gray threshold value of 0 the second of 0 5 and the last a value of 1 Fig 498 Indirect calculation Brightness preferences In the Brightness preferences tab you can define whether the scene tends to be rather dark or bright Rule of thumb the more luminaires that exist in the project DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 307 Glass surfaces should have 15 reflection and 30 transparency
182. e street and views towards the crossing His viewing direction ca 225 defines the calculation grid s orientation Note Reflection properties of tarmacs are only defined for close sectors If the observer is placed too close to or too far away from the surface no luminances can be calculated DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 220 DIALux Version 4 7 Road lighting Standard Streets You can use DIALux for planning standard streets You may also use a calculation of streets together with rooms or exterior scenes in one project To insert a street in your project you can select it from the DIALux welcome screen H OLA we YN DALux Wirasrds Eo Mane Ealenor Prajal BF Ginen Liit Project i New Street Proje Fa Open rope A dy GUREN ey ee ri a Sy eee cles Ae Show fhe Baug ef cred organ ater Fig 354 Startup dialogue DIALux New street project from the menu Insert gt New Scene gt Standard Street gt File Edit View CAD D Gr od SL A Paste Luminaire Selection Gutpuk Window F Luminaire Arrangement t aM Exterior Scene j Standard Street he Duplicate Current Scene Tee street Element Ma Furniture Room elements Room Wizard Windows and doors Exterior scene elements Calculation surfaces Calculation points Textures Control group Light scenes
183. ect CalCUlALlO Niasnnsiwnnsaanedaviaancuwarieues 307 499 POV Ray Brightness preferences 308 500 Raytracing options modify the surfaces 309 501 3D view for the rendering ccccccccsssssesseeeeeeeseeees 309 502 Start the rendering raaa a 310 503 The rendered IMaGe ssseeseeeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeees 310 504 Smoothing CAGES cceeccesscssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteeees 312 505 POV Ray for WINGOWS csesseessseseeseeeeeereneeeerens 312 SOC PICCE Fall cerar RE 313 507 Manipulated picture SIZC cccccssseseeeseesseeeeeeeees 313 508 Change picture S Ze sssssnrseeeesrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrerrn 313 509 Camera look and lOCatiOn cceceeecsseeeeeeeeeeees 315 510 Exterior scene visualisation 315 511 Settings camera lOCAtTION ccccsseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeees 316 512 Starting an anmation in PovRay using key frames 317 DL Ss AMliIMaviO My SELIG Sorcane 318 514 Camera Rotation and translation seeren 319 515 Movement Of the camera ccecccsseseeseeeeesanereeens 321 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 338 DIALux Version 4 7 Index aE e E E A A iis ea A A E T 167 SDrendehnN aaa wares creas eee id eee eat nae 46 SAV aS PICHU E enana 46 adne aer a A eats 158 alignment of IUMINAILES ccceseseceseeeseeseeeseesaneeeersneeeeraness 105 ANGIE Ol TAG ALON arn i 265 RANGE PIC Cee ee ee renee ern nee et er are ern eee ee 177 ALFANO STIG asrda A 109 DEN EER al E cated tunis AAE PE EEA E E 232 B
184. ect is what remains after the one object is subtracted from all other objects The following example shows a polygonal extrusion volume with a cone sticking in it The cone will create a depression in the volume To achieve that both objects are selected and the command Subtract furniture is executed Subtract furniture can be found in menu Edit or in the context menu that is displayed after right clicking the selected objects The command shows a Property Page in which you can select the one object all other objects are subtracted from Pressing button Subtract executes the command The CAD window afterwards displays what is left of the extrusion volume DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 87 DIALux Version 4 7 E ery T b a METE EIF Sa E M iu f i 2 TUNE aa if tae aoe Fig 123 Subtractions from a volume If the cone goes completely through the extrusion volume a hole is created If the newly created furniture is split all objects even those which have been subtracted are restored Pee eee Fig 124 Resulting volume Selecting Single Surfaces Time and again it is necessary to work on single surfaces of an object With complex objects with very many surfaces it may take a lot of time to find the desired surface in the surface list of the object s Property Page To simplify this essentially you can select a single surface now graphically Just right click the object in the desired surface in
185. ed symmetrically above the open area surface To calculate the open area which means the unobstructed floor you have to select in the calculation setting not to take the furniture into account E se ELIE LE A A ji p ahs er dhe ane a e Elier qirg jbmirid jeo oe Pme EOC ET OE CEGLANE NTE Fig 239 Calculation dialogue Without furniture Those luminaires which are in use for emergency lighting are marked with the expression emergency luminaire DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 155 DIALux Version 4 7 l z ATI E a j pi E o felag u a veal lt 4 T Se el a a A ao ee be Fig 240 Emergency luminaires in the CAD view High risk task area lighting For the high risk task area lighting you can use the regular task area calculation surface of DIALux It contains of the task area s and the surrounding area The calculation surface will be calculated in the emergency lighting scheme as well as the other calculation surfaces Luminaires with emergency lights A luminaire can transfer the information of several light emitting objects These LEO can also be defined as emergency LEO These emergency LEOs are only used for the emergency lighting calculation Since DIALux version 4 1 these emergency LEOs will be used by DIALux for the emergency lighting calculation A regular LEO can also be used for the emergency calculation Often normal luminaires are equipped with battery packs or
186. ee TMi L H 1s a Fig 234 Escape route lighting Before the escape route with the escape route luminaries is planned normally the positions of luminaires are also defined by the positions of MANDATORY POINTS OF EMPHASIS Initial design is conducted by situating luminaires to reveal specific hazards and highlight safety equipment and signs in addition to providing illumination to assist safe travel along the escape route This should be performed regardless of whether it is an emergency escape route or an open anti panic area As seen in this visualisation the manufacturer can use real 3D models for the visualisation of its luminaires ww eS Ee oe O a oF Tl ae Jaiari ee i 2a eas PERATA Ag Gls E eee coun i Pei See le ee ee ge i ee ee ee ree biem Femi fa iF Terct fia i erar ee t o EALE ia Ere Fig 235 Escape route lighting Visualisation Open area lighting anti panic Open area lighting can be automatically prepared by inserting an emergency lighting scene In the Property Page for the lighting scheme there is a button to insert anti panic calculation surfaces on each piece of floor in the room even if the floor is tilted or consist of areas DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 153 DIALux Version 4 7 in different heights The geometry is copied from the floor minus 0 5m from the walls It is also possible to edit the surfaces manually a baras CEE I La
187. eeeeeersaneeses 80 INSEE FUTNI E annn 81 INSEPE FUrMITUTE senera tlic apsenMatauateostnehs 81 Insert Via Property PaGe ccccccsseseeeesesersneeeeseeeeensaes 81 Create FUMIO cenia n N 81 Import Furniture and 3D model FileS 0ccccceeee 84 Extrusion VOIUMES sisi 85 GIASS ONJE iSi in yaelasataktenniteliernipetaets 86 Subtraction Of Objects csccsecsssseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeees 87 Selecting Single SUITACES cccseseseeeseeseeeeseeeerenees 88 Windows AN DOOSS ccccccccssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeess 89 Decoration Objects sesssssesrrrreerrrrresrrrreerrrreerrrns 89 Insert Decoration ODJ CtS cccccccssseeseeeeeeeeeessaeeees 90 Calculate with Decoration Objects cccccceeeeeeeees 91 INSENE T eXUTE S ainn nmin ais 92 Insert via Drag amp Drop sssssessrserrrnerrrnerrrnerrrrerrreerrrens 92 Edit Placed Textures canino wiecvom btverieys 92 Delete TEXTURES vierec chan athuvate dosnhetuittendaeealerntinet eigen tenes 93 Import Textures into the Texture Tree eeen 93 Edit Room Geometry with DWG or DXF File 94 M aterial dialogue for Surfaces sereen 95 COOUR arcan eee wens 95 Reflection RRO seessssssssssssrrsesssrrrnnesrrrrrreesrrrrreessnn 95 Transparensi 95 Calculation of transparengy cceccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeseens 96 ROUONNES S aee aR E A 96 MIOCENE CA E OT 96 Mi ee Dl all sees bescesanctiemtacs a seni 96 RaytraCe previeW cccccccssesceceaeseeesseeseesaueese
188. emispherical illuminance is needed instead of horizontal illuminance Similarly this is always calculated and can be selected in the output for the printout In table 4 of the CEN TR 13201 1 the alternative A classes are specified for the S classes Accordingly DIALux changes the necessary illuminance dimensions in the outputs Horizontal illuminance Calculation points shall be located in a plane at ground level in the relevant area Hemispherical illuminance Calculation points shall be located in a plane at ground level in the relevant area Semicylindrical illuminance Calculation points shall be located in a plane 1 5m above the surface in the relevant area Semicylindrical illuminance varies with the direction of interest The vertical plane at right angles to the rear flat surface shall be oriented parallel to the main directions of pedestrian movement which for a road is usually longitudinal Vertical illuminance Calculation points shall be located in a plane 1 5m above the surface in the relevant area Vertical illuminance varies with the direction of interest The vertical illumination plane shall be oriented at right angles to the main directions of pedestrian movement which for a road are usually up and down the road You can activate the wizard for the determination of an illumination class via the wizard button see figure above After starting it you are welcomed by a welcome screen NOTE The single steps
189. enes These outputs are similar to the present outputs of other rooms The calculation grid is fixed in DIALux in the outputs Open in the output tree the summary of a light scene and select the settings of your output grid If you click on the Refresh View button DIALux determines the current calculation grid and displays the results in the output window Fig 432 Output of a light scene DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 264 DIALux Version 4 7 The documentation of the used luminaires is modified in DIALux too Luminaire Data Sheet The design is completely changed Besides the picture and the text two customisable diagrams are created When you use luminaires with several light outlets you can select which diagram is used for which outlet The luminaire can be classified according to numerous regulations DIN BZ UTE CIE NBN Projektmanager pa Charts le Classification Chart 1 Luminous emitt Loc Polar Chart 2 Luminous emitt Luminance Refresh siew Projektmanager p charts Classification Display the Following Luminaire Classification DIN CIE t BZ C NEN UTE M CIE Display tlus code Refresh view Fig 433 Settings of luminaire data sheet Luminance Diagram The luminance diagram is a new development that allows the evaluation of the luminance with regard to different angles of radiation omni directional glare control DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 265
190. ent DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 133 DIALux Version 4 7 So p TESE p ia I mr a A Fig 200 Drag and drop of a filter spectrum while holding down the control key IM PORTANT Holding down the SHIFT key makes only that light emitting element getting the filter that is picked by the mouse Fig 201 Drag and drop of a spectrum filter on a rotatable element of a luminaire while holding down the shift key After a spectrum is added to a luminaire the Property Page Colour appearance tab displays the lamp spectrum the filter spectrum and the resulting colour data In the line lamp colour the name of the lamp spectrum is shown DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 134 To add a light colour to just one luminaire in a scene hold down the Shift key while drag and drop To add a light colour to all luminaires in a scene hold down the CTRL key while drag and drop CTRL DIALux Version 4 7 Technical Data Color appearance Rotations General dh Luminous emittance 1 sha Transmission 100 Yo Remove Result Lamp Filter Fig 202 Spectrum of the lamp the filter and the resulting radiation Click on the triangle on the bottom right to get the Ra values Colour filters An optical filter is a device which selectively transmits light often a particular range of wavelengths representing a range of colours of light while blocking the remainder A filter can only block the specific
191. ergy evaluation rooms and their assessment zones A comprehensive update mechanism makes sure that changes to all relevant data of the light planning will be passed on to the energy evaluation as well So the energy evaluation is always up to date and simultaneous planning is possible Nevertheless for a lot of details it makes sense to have them well designed before a link is created That s because DIALux tries to Initialise all of the parameters of the energy evaluation room and its assessment zones as well as possible so that the user has to do as little adjustments as possible And the better the starting position the better the initialisations There is another important reason to do as much preliminary work as possible As said before there is an update mechanism between light planning and energy evaluation that reacts on subsequent changes This update mechanism not only changes properties of assessment zones it also may create new assessment zones and delete old ones The new zones are once again initialised as well as possible by DIALux but must again be checked and adjusted where applicable by the user The old zones are deleted making the time spent checking and adjusting their properties is wasted DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 288 DIALux Version 4 7 Name and Description General Energy Evaluation Room without Link to a DIALux R The results of each individual energy evaluation room can Flow into the t
192. ers and e mail addresses are displayed At the bottom of the list the last used luminaires are always indicated This can be up to 20 luminaires of different manufacturers The Guide Rx Indoor Lighting Edit room Insert New Room BRL Load OXF file A Double click ft Edit Room Geometry on a Plugin to g Insert ceilings ground and Open k columns Aj Insert windows and doors GL See Lean M Insert equipment B BP AGAT Sse bii pien a Place Furniture Select Texture Double check Plan lighting Opens Inter i e aii cy Select Luminaires page of the Ch Insert Single Luminaire LIGHTRORECE BW a manufacturer ae GLASHUTTE LIEUR RA Insert Luminaire Field ES Insert Line Arrangement a Insert Circle Arrangement Calculation objects Insert calculation surfaces Insert calculation points z Picea chia TL Teed Lighting wor TOMS Gee WLA 75 TOL STAF Linking t Outdoor Lighting rine Cta my nline RIO catalogues E aG Street Lighting D thera thie Light scenes TL THOGA bohig AA TLS LH 2S ARTON STAFF lt malui P nN ia luminaire Emergency Lighting oF DIAL 1 Sova files with out oe DLE DR aHes FI ugin Daylight ive Pa Gr ten wie tun Fig 139 Launch luminaire tree DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 100 DIALux Version 4 7 Online Catalogues In DIALux it is possible to insert luminaire files over so called Online Catalogues functioning similarly as instal
193. eseneeess 129 194 Non spectral light calculation ccccceeessseeeeeees 130 195 Light colours in the DIALux colour tree e 131 196 Colour information for a selected spectrum 131 197 Colour rendering indices of the CIE test colours CIE Eo ietcdecte nth sad ches a T Tae 132 198 Spectra and colour rendering properties of different ONE SOUCES catina nce nnd 132 199 Drag and Drop of a spectrum onto a luminaire with rotatable eleMent cccccccccsessesseeeeeees 133 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 331 DIALux Version 4 7 Fj g Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 200 Drag and drop of a filter spectrum while holding down the control KEY essssssrserrreerrrrrerrrrerrn 134 201 Drag and drop of a spectrum filter on a rotatable element of a luminaire while holding down the SHITE KEY aaien asain sus dbauseontincsadies 134 202 Spectrum of the lamp the filter and the resulting radiation Click on the triangle on the bottom right to get the Ra values cecseeeeeees 135 203 Technical information of colour filter 136 204 Resulting spectrum of a luminaire with two times the same filter but different light sources 136 205 All the spots are using the same colour filter
194. ess control for 3D rendering 148 226 Extended SettindS cccccssesecssseeeecssseeteneesersaeseetens 148 227 Export of light SCONES c sseseesssseeeeseeeeesaneeeetens 148 228 Types of emergency HIGNtING cccsecssseseeseeeeeerens 149 229 Emergency lighting SCONG cccccssssseessseseesenereetens 150 230 Property Page of emergency lighting 0008 150 231 Output Emergency lighting data sheet 151 232 Emergency lighting Modify escape route 152 233 Emergency lighting Insert escape route lighting 152 234 Escape route lighting ccccccccscssseseeeseeseeeeeeeeaes 153 235 Escape route lighting Visualisation cen 153 236 Open area lIQNtiNG cccccccsssseeesseeeeseereesanereetens 154 237 Insert open area lighting ccccccesessesseesseneeeeeneeens 154 238 Properties of the open area luminaire arrangement atacand uta cat AE onan Otten E AT 155 239 Calculation dialogue Without furniture 155 240 Emergency luminaires in the CAD view 008 156 241 Emergency lighting INSpPeECtOr eerren 156 242 Emergency lighting data sheet 157 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 332 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fi
195. essaeesss 96 Duplicate Copy Rooms Scenes Streets c cceceereeeees 99 Duplicate an Existing ROOM ccccccsssssesssserseeeerens 99 Insert and Edit Luminaires and Luminaire Arrangements A ah aee susie vante eens E 100 Online CataloQues ninnaa 101 Individual LUMINAINES wziscrssveeesccsvetiwerasnonsesneerewneaneune 101 Aligning LUMINAILES cccccssseseeseeeeeseeeseeseeeeeraneeees 104 Inserting Luminaire FieldS cccccsssesssseeeeseeeerseeeeees 106 Inserting Luminaire LINGS cccccesseeeeseeeeeeeseersneeeees 110 AGING LONS oncs 112 Inserting Luminaire Circles sesssserrrerrreerrrrrrrrreerrns 112 Separating Luminaire Arrangements seee 113 FOO CIC MENG aaen uhstdengiedeunniese ible ie 113 Inserting floodlight illumination esere 113 Arranging floodlighting ssi iavdiccsiudeieiaiesiiekiraiinaans 115 FO CaN OMS senario eri Ei 115 Modify the position of a Luminaire eeen 117 Luminaires with articulated joints 118 Luminaires with several articulated joints 0 119 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 5 DIALux Version 4 7 Unrestricted lighting arrangements 119 Aligning luminaire arrangement seeren 121 Calculation of luminaire geometry included 122 Illumination strategies ccecceeceessseeeeseeeeeeaeeeeranesensees 123 Insertion of luminaries with direct planar lighting EENT EE EE E TEE E TE 123 Insertion of luminaries with vertical planar lighting A T A 126 Coloured NOE cissncite do
196. et the layer colour If a layer of the dxf file uses a certain colour you may overwrite this colour DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 271 DIALux Version 4 7 Filename Layer Coordinates system UCS Scale Shor Colour Laver Mame I C DLXDESCR ME LFO EE CLS E GLeLuM 7 DLYSCENE Force layer colour for elements with own colour Fig 443 DWG DXF settings Edit a Room based on the DWG DXF Ground Plan To move the room to a certain position of the dwg dxf ground plan just click on this point with the right mouse button and use the option Set DWG or DXF origin here oy Fig 444 Move the dwg dxf origin with mouse and context menu After you moved one corner of the room to the origin of the dwg dxf drawing you can adjust the room geometry The easiest way is to drag the corners of your room after selecting Edit room geometry from The Guide DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 272 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 445 Drag the corners to align the room with the drawing Now you can insert further elements like doors and windows based on the drawing Fig 446 Insert doors windows furniture Working with the DWG DXF Background in the 3D View You can use the CAD drawing as a background image in the 3D view Usually it is recommended to use the option Represent 2D projection of dwg dxf in 3D view from the Property Page DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 273 DIALux Version 4 7
197. etermining maintenance factor In DIALux the user is able to select whether he wants to have a global all inclusive maintenance factor for the whole room or whether he wants to determine the respective maintenance factor for every luminaire luminaire arrangement The easiest way which is the method used in early DIALux versions is to use the classical method After a room or exterior scene was added to a project the user can make the maintenance choice in the Property Page ja General Maintenance plan method r Room Surfaces Alignment All inclusive Maintenance factor 0 80 Reference Please select an application e Estended EN 12464 er clean room low yearly usage f Clean room 3 year maintenance cycle Ambient conditions Exterior installation 3 year maintenance cycle Intenor or extertor installatian high pollution Maintenance Fig 84 Edit room data Selection of a reference value for the maintenance factor For the classical method the reference application examples are listed which appear in Mr Stockmar article Maintenance factor theory and practise in Licht 6 2003 from table 1 Of course the user can also enter any other value of maintenance factor in the maintenance factor field After choosing a luminaire the user can place it in any arrangement Also there is access to technical details of the luminaire DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 65 DIALux Version 4 7 Ge Gut Yew
198. f EN or the complete method of CIE The simplified method approximates the veiling luminance produced by the environment Lve with the formula L 0 035 x p X Enay X mt Where p is the average reflection and Epa the average illuminance of the area Unfortunately this area is not exactly defined DIALux uses all ground elements as the area The complete method of CIE 112 1994 uses the correct veiling luminance produced by the environment in front of an observer Here the illuminated area is considered to consist of an infinite number of small light sources The veiling luminance produced by the environment Is n E L 109 2 defined by the formula ii wheren isthe total number of small light sources Of course this calculation is more accurate but more time consuming too The DIALux outputs state which method was used to calculate GR values Name GR Observer Position of GR observer 3 180 A Y 27 685 27 685 685 1 500 500 1500 m Angle of indination Step width viewing angles from to Simplified calculation according to EN8599 exact calculation according to CIE 112 b Fig 347 Property page of the GR Observer To calculate GR values DIA Lux provides the GR observer tab Any GR observer can be placed just like any other DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 216 DIALux Version 4 7 calculation point There are some special properties an inclination angle viewing angles from a start to an end a
199. f the object are taken from the rotated bounding box DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 179 DIALux Version 4 7 p Name Geometry Surfaces i Origin Define origin K 1936 m Y 2 090 m 0 500 m The position of the furniture origin can be modified without changing the position of the furniture itself This simplifies positioning the furniture Set origin to centre of the furniture Reset rotation of origin Fig 280 Resetting the rotation of the origin of an object or furniture Editing Object Surfaces In DIALux you can assign any colour reflectance material and calculating grid and textures to any surface To edit object surfaces select the object and click the Surfaces tab Dee y WEITER EA p rf mang T eye z aj mij E a ija af i a Ap i ai f eei l E F Fig 281 Editing surfaces In the Inspector the Property Page with a list of existing surfaces appears If you select a surface surface 1 in this case this is highlighted with a rubber band line in the CAD In the right hand side of the Property Page you can select a material a reflectance or a colour By clicking on the empty field behind the name of the surface in the listbox on the left hand side the name can also be modified DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 180 To receive output on furniture surfaces check the Result Output checkbox DIALux Version 4 7 Projektmanager Maternal Calculating Grid T 4 r M O
200. f the geometry will be straightened A higher degree of Anti aliasing can be selected in the POV Ray editor See advanced settings DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 303 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 495 Smoothing edges with POV Ray Autobumpmaps If textures are used which have a surface texture e g wood or tiles you can produce a better 3D view with the activation Autobumpmaps They should be activated if the light dark information of the texture Is identically with the high low structure E g water bricks wood The bump map texture will be calculated from the grey values of the image Within POV Ray also there are independent bump maps that can be placed Lighting preferences With Subdivide luminaires you can specify whether the influence of each individual luminaire or all luminaires should be calculated together The Subdivide luminaires setting generates a better result however the calculation time extends Without this option the light rays are starting only in the middle of the light emitting surface If a long luminaire is placed near to surface the resulting image seems unrealistic If this option is switched on for each pixel depending on the distance to the light source the luminaire is subdivided into small luminous parts Of course this increases the calculation time With Indirect calculation you can specify the influence of the indirect lighting on the result The higher you select the part that indirect lig
201. g Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 243 Specify dimming values of the control group 159 244 Select the location cccccscsssssssecsssssnssevvensnesseereans 160 245 NORM ANONMIMENE oarra 160 246 Edit daylight faCtOls viciscsicsvsieesiatevssivesvesetensesennene 161 247 DAVGNUTACKONS vcrir 161 248 Output Value chart of the workplane 162 249 Obstruction in CAD VIEW ccccecssseseeeeeeseeseneeenens 163 250 Sun and shadow visualisation ccccccesssseeeeeeeees 163 251 Calculation GialoQue cccesscecssssseseesessseseeeeans 164 252 Evaluating a staircase from the upper storey 165 253 Toolbar for switching between modes 165 254 Change perspective and focal distance of the camera Gurren E TEA O NA EE E anaes 166 255 Show calculation results in 3D View seee 167 256 Save a 3D view as jpg file ieesiisessrirerrrrernn 167 257 Open the 3D render ingd cceccccssseserseseeeeseeeeetens 168 258 Copy the 3D rendering into another software 168 259 False colour IIIUMINANCES ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 260 False colour LUMINANCE eeecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 ZOL NIGWS GOOID ON remana 170 262 Working IN VAFIOUS VIQWS ccccccseseseeseeeseeseneeeenens 170 263 Multiple View arrangement cccccccssseseeesseseerens 170 264 Closing CAD WiNdOWS ssesssssesrrreserrrreerrrrrererrreeern 171 265 Save camera view via context MENU n se 171 266 Save camera view via
202. g 158 Scale a luminaire line If you pull the cross in the middle of the line with the mouse you change the position The angle and the length of the line remain constant With the blue end points you can modify the length and the angle at the same time It is not necessary to switch between scale mode and rotate mode k s 1 ilor plan ihs i JO Mew ab x lz mT ooo d Lij L T H T al l IB jiy and darkat Copy Along 2 Ling Ei fed hs conia pin l eij to haier g Gra 3 E pu A Cut B i A Di E 1 p a a 3 a E a hem 175a Opm NH Fig 159 Edit a luminaire line If the luminaires within the arrangement have not been rotated the CO of the luminaires is directed towards the row axis from the start point in the direction of the end point DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 111 Alignment of lights on a track Alignment of luminaires within an arrangement Fa a le Use this option to switch on the luminaire help rays and the CO arrows The help rays indicates Gamma 0 DIALux Version 4 7 Aligning Lights If you select individual luminaires in an arrangement via CAD you can also modify their rotation within the arrangement The position of the luminaires remains constant You may also use the function set illumination point Fig 160 Aligning individual luminaires within an arrangement To be able to select individual luminaires within an arrangement
203. g 380 Insert street elements via context menu When you select a single street element in the Project manager or in the CAD view you can see and modify the properties in the Inspector DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 233 DIALux Version 4 7 Projektmanager p General Street Coating Surfaces Name Roadway width p OU ri Number of Lanes 2 Fig 381 Properties of a roadway General For example the properties of the roadway can look like e Width 4 000m e Number of lanes 2 e resulting width of a lane 2 000m The tarmac and the luminance coefficient can be modified in the Property Page Street Coating Projektmanager a alas o General Street Coating Observer Tarmac i q fo 070 Uniformity Coating on Wet Roadways w3 q 0 200 Fig 382 Properties of a roadway Street coating Each street has an observer whose average age can be varied individually for the calculation of TI Projektmanager Sy General Street Coating Observer Surfaces Average age of observer 23 Tears Position of observer Fig 383 Properties of a roadway Observer DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 234 DIALux Version 4 7 DIALux positions the observers automatically according to the default of the EN The observer is always 60m in front of the valuation field in the middle of the respective roadway at a height of 1 5m above the ground Normally every roadway has an observer who lo
204. ght sources this is even more important than with good values much depends on the scenery and the other settings lower values do not necessarily lead to better results error bound 1 8 error bound 0 4 error bound 0 02 If there are artefacts it often helps to increase count it does affect quality in general and often helps in removing them the following three pictures use error_bound 0 02 count 2 count 50 count 200 The next sequence shows the effect of nearest_count the difference is not very strong but larger values always lead to better results maximum is 20 From now on all the pictures use error_bound 0 2 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 323 DIALux Version 4 7 nearest count 2 nearest count 5 nearest count 10 default The minimum reuse is a geometric value related to the size of the render in pixel and affects whether previous radiosity calculations are reused at a new point Lower values lead to more often and therefore more accurate calculations T minimum_reuse minimum_reuse minimum_reuse 0 1 0 001 0 015 default In most cases it is not necessary to change the low_error_factor This factor reduces the error_bound value during the final pretrace step pretrace_end was lowered to 0 01 in these pictures the second line shows the difference to default Changing this value can sometimes help to remove persistent artefacts DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 324 DIALux Version 4 7 e
205. grid angle and the grid distance can be adjusted In the graphical way first the start point has to be defined with the first click The second click defines the position of the end of the first axis of the grid The third click has to be made in a distance perpendicular to the second point to define the width of the grid area Initially the grid distance Is set to 0 625m This value can be changed in the inspector or graphically by moving the dragger next to the start point T a rz oe Et 7 SS ee ee oe igo a TEELE E f i E i tt ve let eal Litre j i r ih pr Bes ee i imei tikk 3 Seiny iha grid sine Z ote a nee click be mms p l Fig 306 Defining a help grid The grid has snap points on each edge on the lines at half the grid length and in the middle of each grid element hy Maen Larnaratr re ei d a Fig 307 Snap points on the help Of course it is possible to place grids in other grids This is useful if a luminaire arrangement should be placed within one ceiling element DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 191 DIALux Version 4 7 Copy and paste with CTRL C CTRL V and CTRL H With CTRL C objects can be copied into the clipboard This can be single objects or combined objects even those ones of different types With CTRL V the copied objects will be placed next to the original objects in a distance of 1m in X and 1m in Y direction With the keyboard shortcut CTRL H the object in th
206. h Lis Lies GE Fig 81 Edit Rooms 3D view Edit Room Data If you select a room in the Project manager you can specify different properties via the Inspector In the General tab you can define the room s Name and a Description text General Maintenance plan method f Room Surfaces Alignment Name A oor 1 Description Fig 82 Edit room data General New in DIALux 4 is the maintenance plan method tab Here you can determine maintenance factors and set parameters for a maintenance plan based on EN 12464 1 and CIE 97 The maintenance parameters of the inserted luminaire arrangements can be optimized to a target maintenance factor It is possible for the user to use the maintenance factor as a consistent value for all luminaires in the room The lighting designer is required since the introduction of EN12464 to providea maintenance plan for the lighting design Now with DIALux 4 this is integrated into the lighting design workflow and is automatically provided DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 64 Maintenance plan method for determination of the maintenance factor DIALux Version 4 7 5 ri General Maintenance plan method Room Surfaces if Alignment All inclusive Maintenance factor 0 50 Reference Please select an application Extended EN 12464 Ambient conditions Norral T Maintenance Annually T Fig 83 Edit room data Maintenance plan method An easy method for d
207. hat the Inspector differentiates between individual luminaires and a luminaire arrangement B Luminaires A s Individual Luminaire basse ta 1 x DIAL 3 65 900 Leuchte ngur Line Arrangement A 5 x DIAL 1 SINOVA nur Field Arrangement A 9x DIAL 18 HALOSPOT EL F 50 W KLR Em Circle Arrangement 4x DIAL 6 Optikleuchten Ba Fig 53 Luminaire arrangement and its luminaires in the project manager ph Luminaire Positions Mounting height Rows f Luminaires per Aow fs a Ja 000 mo 0 000 rm Rookations Arrangement Start Point End point E 5 400 mo r 2 600 m a Em BFE lx E FOU Em total 1191 x Fig 54 Property Page Position of the selected luminaire arrangement DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 49 Here you can change the properties of individual luminaires within the luminaire arrangement but not the properties of the luminaire arrangement itself Property Page colour appearance Switch DIALux to the Edit Room Geometry mode The Guide 1 x Indoor Lighting Edit room w Insert Mew Room dxf Load DF File F Insert ceilings ground and columns DIALux Version 4 7 Technical Data Color appearance Rotations General q Luminous emittance 1 Luminous Flux Im Power WW Correction factor Correction reason Po amp O Project 1 El Luminaires Used Oy 12x DIAL 1SINOVA Room 1 _ Workplane el Floor il Ceiling H Wall surfaces E Luminaires 5 2 Field Arrangement Oy 12x DIA
208. he Mounting tab you can make various settings for the mounting Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting m V Y 1 800 m 2 2500 m Aottions x foo y 10 0 200 ar uminaires 72 lk 144 90 x 181 Ix Surface Mounted hi Suspension 10 000 Mounting Po m Height above 1 976 m Room Height2 800 m Workplane Height 0 750 m Fig 143 Mounting tab Additionally information is shown giving the maintained and initial illuminance due to these luminaires and due to the whole room Praja kE rnirar _ Technical Data Retstions Light scenes Control groups General F Karras Dua JES 300 Leushin Pritt a Larter ed Lae OF Gs DEAL 4 ahah OF x DEAL 10 ALGOT DLF Od WL OF Ox HA iua TE Ox DOL 1 SO OF 1 x GOAL 3 BS Se Leche SS hewn L Wor hyplawes al thes E Cede Wiad colt wal Ea walt ZECE was Gores es ath Dreika Lunina oF DA 36S aiy Fig 144 M odifying the technical data of luminaires To modify the Technical Data of the luminaires these must have been inserted into the room In the Project manager the luminaires contained in the arrangement are listed beneath the respective arrangement type An DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 103 The CO level of luminaires with a rotation of 0 is directed lengthways in the positive X axis Gammao points vertically from the top to the bottom DIALux Version 4 7 individual luminaire ar
209. he Furniture directory and use them in DIALux See also page 81 M oving the Coordinate Origin of an Object If you combine multiple objects the centre of the en compassing cube automatically becomes the coordinate Origin This is not always the preferred position because when you insert an object into your project via Drag amp Drop the origin is placed at the height Z 0 Before you save a new object you should check and position the Origin You can do this in the Inspector when you go to the Property Page Origin DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 178 To move the coordinates system of an object press the Alt button DIALux Version 4 7 tu a0 fim im at Tie a i E Fig 278 Specify the coordinate origin To define the origin visually press the Alt button When you now move the object s coordinate cross the coordinate origin is moved instead of the object itself To change the height or to deactivate the pick grid when movements are made use the Shift and Ctrl buttons If you now save the object the new coordinate origin is also saved Fig 279 Coordinate origin which was moved outside the cube Resetting the rotation of the origin To create complex models from several simple ones sometimes it is necessary and useful to reset the rotation of an object To achieve that you have to click the Reset rotation of origin button in the Origin Property Page of the Object The length width and height o
210. he complete area of the room These assessment zones can be displayed in 2D and 3D views of the associated DIALux room Daylight supplied and non daylight supplied zones are distinguished by color ATM MAES Fig 465 Display of assessment zones in CAD windows second icon from the left DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 285 DIALux Version 4 7 E Fig 466 Display of assessment zones of an energy evaluation room in 3D view Assessment zones are both the bottom and the most important level of the energy evaluation The actual evaluation is done on this level all needed parameters are determined here Energy demands are explicitly calculated only for assessment zones all other results for energy evaluation rooms utilization zones or the complete energy performance project arise from summing up results of involved assessment zones Of course you can also use The Guide to navigate through the complete energy evaluation process The Guide ax Indoor Outdoor Street Li Light sce Emer gel te Daylight Energy E p Energy Evaluation a Ea Insert Energy Evaluation 45 Select Energy Evaluation Standard Create one energy evaluation room per room in the DIALux project t Create new energy evaluation room without link to a DIlALux room o Display Assessment ZONES T Edit Utilisation Profile fonly DIN 18599 Edit the features of the creaked assessment zones Mark one or more zones in thd
211. he user all make working much easier and much faster rere EISTE E oo Jaar fpuazj Spee oe Bek TETTE a eet mee tC Mer coir rE Barr EA oe s imma Project manager with Inspector e e ba me sy Fig 32 DIALux user interface The DIALux user interface is divided into three main work areas e CAD window e Project manager with Inspector e The Guide These three work areas enable effective and clearly arranged planning of lighting installation with DIALux In each of these areas you can access certain software functions or edit objects The Project manager includes the Inspector and the respective tree structure project furniture colour luminaire and output DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 34 DIALux Version 4 7 The CAD Window Raum 0D Few Fig 33 3D view of a room Beams Bien Raum 1 Foor plan ax Fig 34 Ground plan view of a room In addition to the 3D and ground plan views you can also use the side and front view for interactive planning The CAD window Is used for the interactive lighting design With the mouse you can graphically rotate zoom move and roam the room the street or the exterior scene The PAN or move option can always be accessed via the middle mouse button The Zoom option is assigned to the wheel if using a wheel mouse DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 35 Please note Open context menu with right mouse button DIALux Version 4 7 The rig
212. ht from bottom to top Really good results depend a lot on the unique situation and how the scene is meant to look Here is a higher quality rendering of this particular scene but the requirements can be considerably different in other situations global_settings radiosity pretrace_start 0 08 pretrace_end Ome Al count 500 nearest_count 10 error bound 0 02 recursion limit 1 low error factor 0 2 gray_threshold 0 0 minimum_reuse 0 015 brightness 1 adc_bailout 0 01 2 higher quality DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 327 DIALux Version 4 7 List of figures Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig TPAC SOUL Disa stesacttittct ounce N acatulins 12 2 Selection of the components to be installed 13 3 DIALux CD DVOW SER sacaccsapsacinsencrencustugnianinseparenedoneinasinss 13 A DIALUX online MENU cccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetessaenereeenees 14 5 Online update of luminaire catalogues s es 16 6 DIALux Light Wizard DIALux Light ICON 19 7 DIALuXx Light Wizard Start ceccccssesseesseseeeeeeeenens 19 8 DIALux Light Wizard Project information 20 9 DIALux Light Wizard Data INDUt ceeceeeeeeseeeee ees 20 1
213. ht mouse button is very important when working with DIALux Depending on the selected object the program mode and the working area different important options can be accessed Fig 35 Right mouse button Additionally you can move scale rotate or select objects inside or outside the room Right click to access a context menu aoe a m EFE FPH i igh iv ie S E i hid Er j prey ee a ow ld aS aa iani LEi ili Fig 37 Ground plan view context menu In the project manager you can right click inside the room to select the 3D or the ground plan view If more than one CAD window is open you can arrange them as desired via the Window menu If the window is full DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 36 Fe a Please note The red rotation point enables a rotation around the red axis likewise the blue and the green rotation points enable rotations around the blue and green axis respectively Please note Context menus are accessed via the right mouse button and Properties in the Inspector via the left mouse button DIALux Version 4 7 screen you can change to another view via the tabs at the top of the screen Simultaneously working in multiple windows is only recommended when working with a high screen resolution and a good display adapter If an object has been inserted into a room its context menu can also be accessed with a right click rotate around th
214. ht scenes together by means of the checkboxes Projektmanager vs Brightness Extended Settings IY Use Automatic if Optimize light scenes together Daylight Apply Here you can corect the exposure E steria Interior Fig 226 Extended settings Export of light scenes Now DIALux offers the option to export light scenes in the dlc format DIALux Light Control You find this function in the menu File gt Export gt Save DIA Lux light scene file T lle SS o l E t Jeagea soa be E ET E j 2 s ssa i af al m i a a Ga U H Te C Fa ia rE E mreki eg Gr ig pee y Ss Fig 227 Export of light scenes DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 148 DIALux Version 4 7 Emergency lighting Global Emergency lighting can be calculated according to the European standard EN1838 In the introduction of the standard EN 1838 on page 2 It is stated that only the direct light has to be taken into account and not the reflected indirect component for the calculation of the emergency lighting scene Also the special regulation of the Lighting Guide 12 LG12 from the SLL in the UK that the first reflection of direct light onto a ceiling Is selectable for the calculation In DIALux additional calculation methods are required for escape route lighting and open area lighting Emergency Lighting l Emergency p Standby j Escape Lighting Lighting Escape Open Area High
215. hting plays the longer the calculation time becomes This option starts an elementary radiosity Without this option those objects which are not directly hit by rays are invisible The higher the accuracy that is chosen the longer the calculation takes but the quality increases For exterior scenes sometimes it could be better to skip the indirect calculation For a first preview the indirect calculation should be switched off or standard should be selected If directional lighting mainly spots is used high to very high indirect calculation should be selected For DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 304 DIALux Version 4 7 diffuse uniform illumination standard settings are adequate This setting defines the number of rays used for the calculation of the indirect light on each pixel The more rays there are the more correct the results are e Project preferences After POV Ray completed its work by default the rendered image bitmap bmp is stored in the directory as standard preference in C Program Files DIALux Raytracer Room 1 mp e Additional preferences are possible You can display outer walls of rooms transparently or daylight obstruction by using the checkboxes Image preferences This defines the size of the picture in pixel Any size can be selected The aspect ratio is 4 3 This ratio is correct for projectors most monitors and TV screens Modern TVs and laptops can have ratios of 16 9 or 16 10 T
216. i aria T Caloulstion pinis Dakar EA bean frre Fi Hitan p Merilai Fa Heis B y Giga Puree ARS Gda Fig 117 Create furniture Saved furniture Import Furniture and 3D model Files You can import furniture files from other programs e g Auto CAD over the menu File gt Import gt Furniture Files DIALux imports furniture files with the ending SAT sat and ending m3d m3d DG or DOF file Export Import ord ait 30 modii r Tague fies LA Print Preview Print urinaire fies Sailings Calculation Grid Fiet Lust Fropects Opened Arteta Fes Exit Fig 118 Import furniture files Also 3D model files can be imported with the ending 3ds 3ds To do this select menu File gt Import gt Import and edit 3D models to start the importing wizard The wizard has a few steps including File selection Selection of object data Specifying measurement units Setting origin of object DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 84 DIALux Version 4 7 Mirand far Gp and meri A like Weloome to the Wizard for importing Mi peed gupoorbs ou een inpor are equa a try we ape ame a Fi a he eee el Defining the unis and the rocedinate ong Prete Of Bap bel 2 ee ere Tha eoira kA Fact r Cpm edition a 1 file eles han H object hak a Pian deira Pe certs laren Heme gee bc ba aed Poe hha aor Ta igs a pakene mechealepes ta one penne of dares _ Ciepar ation het Tatil
217. ial e g the texture of a wall a transparency between 0 and 100 The selected value is taken into account by the DIALux calculation Please be informed that solely the direct orientated part of transparency Is calculated correctly As a matter of fact it s unfortunately not possible to simulate dispersion like for example for using frosted glass This transparency cannot be visualised directly in the DIALux CAD For a realistic visualisation please use the raytracer preview or the PovRay Raytracer Roughness Roughness points up if and if yes how much texture a surface features Info Roughness Is only considered for mirroring surfaces and highlights Mirror effect The orientated grad of reflection can be changed by using the integrated slider A highly mirroring surface should be obtained with a high mirroring effect Please mind that the mirroring effect is only viewable in the Raytrace preview and in PovRay Raytracer Info The mirroring effect does not affect the calculation results M aterial By selecting a standard material from the material list you can define your surfaces properties for calculation in DIALux as well as for the Raytrace preview and PovRay Raytracer M etal Plastics Both feature different characteristics regarding reflection Therefore please choose the appropriate settings for your surface s Raytrace preview Since DIALux 4 7 you are able to generate a preview of your actual rendering i
218. ick Then an installation program activates and you can follow the instructions on the screen After completion of installation you can restart DIALux and in the luminaire tree a new Plugin is now displayed see page 39 You can activate the Plugin by one double click from DIALux If you want to install a Plugin from a manufacturers CD close DIALux before proceeding if it is open then just insert the CD Under normal conditions automatically a start window opens and you can follow the instructions If no start window opens please start the Windows Explorer and select the directory of the Plugin of the CD One double click on the Plugin opens it and you can follow the simple installation instructions Online update of luminaire catalogues The list of manufacturers which offer luminaire catalogues for DIALux changes constantly Since DIALux 4 7 you can update the list of Plugins easily online without the need to install the latest version of DIALux To proceed with an online update please choose Luminaire Selection from the project manager and select either DIALux Luminaire Catalogues or Not Installed Catalogs by clicking right onto them Afterwards please choose Refresh list from the Opening context menu DIALux asks you thereupon if you agree to connect with the internet By choosing Yes the data on your PC will be updated following DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 15 DIALux Version 4 7 got My Database
219. id page 204 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 329 Creating a measuring grid In the tab Measuring grid different settings can be made These include defining which grid points and which measuring points should be used Similarly it is possible to make a setting which visually highlights the measuring points in the calculation grid more clearly by hiding the grid points in the calculation grid Calculation In the tab Calculation you can define which values of the calculation grid are to be calculated You have various options for selecting illuminance and also for changing the values for rotation in 2 and or the height in m individually in the respective selection boxes You can make changes as follows e vertical e horizontal e vertical including angle of rotation e semi cylindrical including angle of rotation e cylindrical e camera oriented e in relation to the outside line e hemispherical In this context illuminance is calculated at specific points e g at a measuring or calculation point To obtain results output carry out a calculation in DIA Lux with at least one luminaire DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 205 DIALux Version 4 7 Jame Calculation Grid Measuring Grid Calculation 4 gt Tlurninances Rotation Height m Perpendicular C Horizontal C vertical C Semi cylindrical C Cylindrical CI Camera C Outer Line 1 Quer Line 2 F Guter Line 3 L Outer Line 4 4
220. ig Fig Fig Fig Fig 53 Luminaire arrangement and its luminaires in the project ANAC CN aatinaa 49 54 Property Page Position of the selected luminaire arrangement sarsii a 49 55 Property Page of the luminaires within the selection 50 56 Room context menu right click ON room 51 57 Room edit Mode esssssssssrrsressrrrresrrrrrssrrrrresrrrrressns 51 58 Insert a New COMET ssssssssrrsesrrrsrrrresrrersrrrerrrererrns 52 59 Edit a ground element ssesssrsessrrrrrssrrrrresrrrrressn 52 60 Create a polygonal Task Area above a desk 53 61 Taking over the shape of a helpline for the room GeOMOEN eiaa n a a es 53 OZ MENU SENNO S painnran n a a a 54 63 General Options Standard Values ereen 55 64 General Options Global ssssessiserrrerrrreerrrerrrreerrn 55 65 Automatic reminder to save data 56 OC IIC OPUN S i A 56 67 GIDC INO GC ao S O 57 68 General Options Output ssssssssrrreresrrrrrerrrrresrrrns 58 69 General Options Contact ssessssserreerrrrrerrrrerrrrerrr 58 70 Ment CUStO MISS rerai 59 71 Reset user interface sessssssessrrressrrrrresrrrrresrrrressns 59 72 Create a New proje tenrian aaa 60 73 Insert project details ccccssssseeesessseeeeeseeeseseeseeens 60 74 Insert Project data LOCAtION ccccccccssesseeesseesereeens 61 75 Open a project in the startup dialogue ceren 61 76 Open a project in the MENU ccccseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeees 61 Td POJE DEVE
221. ig 302 M ouse symbol to select a help line for copying Once the desired help line is selected the inspector offers the possibility to define the desired number of copies and the distance between them DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 189 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 303 Copying in the standard setting with placing objects in the vertex If the standard setting is selected DIALux places the first object in the start point the last one in the end point and in every vertex also a copy The distance between objects placed within two vertices will be averaged to keep the number of objects and the resulting distance close to the desired values in the inspector If the second setting is selected the distance between the objects is fixed The first object is placed in the start point and every following one has the exact distance as defined If the length of the help line is not integer literal of the distance the complete length is not used and a rest of the line remains Si af 2h ie a Fig 304 Copying along a help line with fixed distance In this way It is also possible to copy objects along spline help lines and circular help lines Help grids In addition to the help lines it is also possible to insert help grids into the scene To start this action click on the insert help grid icon DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 190 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 305 Insert a help grid In the inspector start and end point as well as the
222. ight click to add a lighting scheme Ter EIT E fS i i _ F i LE E L of himm h m o a p Tea m rg a ba m ssr ii mis mm a E ama ae Fig 229 Emergency lighting scene If you want to design an emergency lighting project for the UK market it will be possible to define here the calculation according to Lighting Guide 12 to take into account the first reflection of direct light on the ceiling s This of course will be automatically switched on if the user selected the standard settings according the UK market global options like UGR SHR and illuminance quotient You can define for each light emitting object whether it is used for emergency lighting Projektmanager i T R S Control groups General Description Emergency Lighting ah Luminous emittance 1 M Use for emergency lighting Only for Emergency Lighting In addition to normal use Emergency lighting li E mergency power mode reference Emergency lighting luminous 3350 Im Colour rendering index a0 Ei Project 1 HS Luminaires Used Fig 230 Property Page of emergency lighting DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 150 DIALux Version 4 7 For each luminaire and each LEO Light emitting object a luminaire may have more than one light output of a luminaire there will be a luminaire data sheet for emergency lighting available This datasheet offers important information about the LEO The first one will be a graphic for the Disab
223. ight scene 2 Fig 247 Daylight factors To calculate a light scene with daylight the necessary calculation options must be put in the light scene If the checkbox Calculate Daylight quotient is activated the settings are made accordingly Sky model of overcast sky No sun No consideration possibly of available luminaires As a result you get as usual a calculation including visualization and in this case the output of the daylight quotient as a component of the work plane If you want to know the daylight quotient at other positions you can insert suitable calculation surfaces or calculation points In the following figure the value chart of the work plane is displayed Currently beta version it doesn t show the daylight quotients but just the illumination in the DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 161 DIALux Version 4 7 suitable positions Also the outputs for Dain Dmax and Dm need to be shown as percentage values Room 1 Light scene 1 vWorkplane Value Chart E 360m Ste 2h De JS Sk ee eee Hi JE Fe fda me Z 1 bd ek ets Ge J61 1 25 me Z BT nd iit ets Ge 6 1 25 BOG 28 Gn S62 0 od a __ so s2 E H6 _ sn _ 2G 255 HG E S62 32 550 30 2 E HE 255 36 36 Saf Saf bS eS Ti T13 T13 WS Sn ST JE TE Je ST Sn eS BBS T15 Ba SN ST BE Be J SNT SN eS Geo T19 Tia T13 e5 Sm GG HG FR N bo es T19 mia Tia T13 st Set J6 A3 2 H SE S62 5A Er bs We 2 25 255 HG 562 S62 550 nha We 25 52 52 61 ed eo ad a
224. ih Ago ater eed at Beret oS ese E Tectures oF Luan fj Capt Fig 245 North alignment The north direction can be defined in each case for the room or the exterior scene To recognize this easily the north arrow is drawn near the coordinate origin In the room windows or skylights must be included in the plan as before These can be easily placed as a line or field if one uses Copy along a line function DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 160 DIALux Version 4 7 Projektmanager a General Position Size Daylight factors Material Texture a gt Degree of Transmission Typical Glass Material fao z Pollution Factor Typical Environment Pollution i O0 Framing Factor Wooden window fined d fo a5 Wooden window ried t Plastic window fived Metal window to open Metal window feed q Skylight with bars Fig 246 Edit daylight factors Of course all the important parameters can be defined for windows and skylights As usual DIALux already includes a selection of the most current choices Projektmanager F ae ental _ Light scene Daylight Factors Dimming values W Take davlight into account during calculation T Calculate Daylight quotient Date 21 03 2005 Time 10 28 00 El eal Sky Model Clear sky z I Direct sun light E Project 1 Fey Luminaires Used E Room 1 Ln LJ workplane E a Light scenes El Oy Pale scene 1 o heef Control group 1 H Og L
225. ility Glare Zone In this graphic the maximum intensity values of EN1838 Table 1 will be listed and in two sketches the maximum intensity values of the LEO for the flat floor and for the uneven floor will be given The second graphic table will show the maximum distances for the mounting of the luminaire to achieve a desired illuminance for example 1 Ix It will list several mounting heights 2m up to 5m and the mounting options wall to transverse transverse to transverse transverse to axial axial to axial and axial to wall proton G geet et r ae Sohiaten EM 1OHALOSPOTE CLF RL Oita Heat emergency larting Lemi CL E LO Te BL a ee Legge bybiegraris i ir l ia E K CF s a we ob Eh LES a Lies beg H eg fl i j 7 Jj 4 l JEB E asr ait He 10 bi ET ET AT Lr 1 T G mi EF am 1m F ini ET Am Ait k EH GH a K Emren reran ee i Fig 231 Output Emergency lighting data sheet Escape route lighting To do an escape route design you have to insert one or more escape route calculation object s The escape route can be edited by entering the coordinates or by moving with the mouse With a right click additional points can be inserted to add a kink to the escape route The width can be set to a maximum of 2m DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 151 DIALux Version 4 7 e oe ee a iy lia a p il cul a E himm iad eee Heer E te E EEEE E s m
226. indows v3 6 or you can find the information at http www povray org Fig 503 The rendered image The output of the rendering is a bmp file that you can print import into other software or use with an image processing program DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 310 DIALux Version 4 7 Manipulation of the POV file and editing in POV Ray Start of the adapted POV Ray Version POV Ray Is freeware available at www povray org DIAL changed POV Ray to adapt it to the needs of calculation with real luminaires The POV files created by DIALux can only be modified by the POV Ray version installed by DIALux If the user tries to open these files with the regular POV Ray an error message will occur To start the DIAL POV Ray version open the PVENGINE EXE file in your DIALux directory e g C Program Files DIALux and by a double click Smoothing edges The Anti aliasing function can be set in DIALux and with more parameters in POV Ray To edit a POV file you have to start the POV Ray program first and then load the pov file created by DIALux The following pictures are showing the same scene without smoothing edges with the setting switched on in DIALux and with a higher level defined in POV Ray This is normally only necessary for small detailed textures in big distances Calculation time increases with the level of Anti aliasing DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 311 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 504 Smoothing edge
227. ion Save position Save position Save position Save position Save position Save position Save position Redo position Redo position Redo position Redo position Redo position Redo position Redo position Redo position Redo position Redo position DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid ODNAUAWNEPEOONAUAWNE _ Left mouse button Shift Left mouse button Ctn ESC ll Left mouse button Alt Ctr l Ctr 2 Ctr 3 Ctri 4 Ctr 5 Ctri 6 Ctr Ctri 8 Ctn 9 Ctri 0 Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Alt 5 Alt 6 Alt Alt 8 Alt 9 Alt 0 page 343
228. ions e g inserting a floodlighting arrangement or a TV camera are possible Inserting a sports complex There are many options for inserting a sports complex First of all you must create an outdoor scene you will find out how to do this in the chapter Exterior lighting exterior scenes Inserting a sports complex or a sports field can be done via the Guide via the Paste menu or via the tab Objects in the DIALux project manager Create Scene h ieee Aigo hin my inert Eei Sree Pm Looked DWG or WF fis Anse Sport Site E Insert Sort Peek Pian liging ov Select Luminar fc inset Pog Arrangement 1 Calculation objects ie OTE eres Pdr Ti Femi iku esl oe treet fala fe Lvabuatiit 3 Rat Corum he Gunn Fig 415 Inserting a sports complex via the guide DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 253 DIALux Version 4 7 Paste New Scene Luminaire Orrangement Street Element Fa Furniture Room elements Windows and doors Exterior scene elements OT AT Calculation surfaces Calculation points Calculation Grid GR Observer Fig 416 Inserting a sports complex via the menu According to your individual requirements you can now select from a total of eight different sports complexes Each sports complex has its own symbol and has its own Spatial geometry according to the type of sport port facilities a E A CG ye Ce S T C fa Pole Position
229. isplay of the values must be activated beforehand under Display Now you can read the values according to the illuminance option selected directly in CAD le ke pi we gio Ai pie Lica ects Siu mie ie l mE i od J a z i Pee ke ee eT E r i E 1 Piima Ha O a 1 iaramn s 1 1 oer umbe ar Eral Tee Iah ie em di m l ia bi m ho _ i i oa E i T i fee ee es ee ee il haar a Semel Pap a T a Emane f Fig 333 Procedure and values in real time calculation After changing the calculation option e g from perpendicular to vertical not only are the values change in the calculation grid but also the orientation of the calculation points see previous screenshot If several cameras are available the camera oriented illuminance option allows you to select each camera in turn to set the measuring height and the rotation of the camera lation 4 Gradients f Display Real Time Calculation 4 Calculation options O Perpendicular Illuminance Horizontal Illuminance O vertical Iluminance amera Orientated Illuminance TY Camera 1 Fig 334 Camera oriented luminous intensity selection and settings DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 208 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 335 CAD output of camera oriented luminous intensity Isolines Isolines display equal values of illuminance measured in the vicinity of a luminaire Isolines can be displayed in CAD in the calc
230. iture Colours q4 Luminaire Fig 46 The Colour tree When you select a texture in the texture tree the Inspector shows a preview of it After the import the reflection is calculated according to the RGB values of the texture You may modify this value later It is important to specify the real size of the texture The default value is 1 x 1 m If you take a photo for example of a building s facade and import this photo as a texture you have to enter the real size of the building length and height After you drag a texture onto a surface you may modify it scale rotate Once a texture is placed on a surface you can flip mirror it by entering a negative length e g 0 4m This will only be used for the selected surface DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 45 Please note The Output button in the Guide and the Output tab open the output tree DIALux Version 4 7 The Output Tree Yet another tree structure exists for the output selection You can open it by clicking on the Output tab in the Project manager e Output Fig 47 Output Tab or by selecting the icon in The Guide Outputs whose page icon is highlighted are immediately available The output types which are not highlighted can only be obtained after the calculation has been done a Room 1 wi a Summary J Input Protocol i Luminaire parts list Maintenance plan J Floor plan d B Luminaires layout plan d B Luminaire
231. ization zone but can be moved to any other utilization zone Sp Pojk 85 Larrai ee Lee a Free Praha z i Ubikestion Zone LiL er are 1 Uistin fore 2 Ween Pore 3 Fig 463 An energy evaluation room with a selection of utilisation zones to which it can be moved Utilization zones are a main issue in DIN 18599 where they are used to collect energy evaluation rooms with the same utilization conditions to provide them with a common utilization profile Anyway utilization zones are a good way to group energy evaluation rooms Caution Utilization zones can not be created explicitly they are only generated during the creation of energy evaluation rooms E Projekt 1 GS Luminaires Used E e Energy Evaluation 4 Utilisation Zone 1 Ely Utilisation Zone 2 E h Room 2 energy evaluation project Assessment fone Daylight 1 haa Assessment Zone Daylight 2 Assessment Zone Won Daylight 1 Fig 464 Energy evaluation room in project tree with its assessment zones Each energy evaluation room has one or more assessment zones Each assessment zone Is either completely supplied with daylight or not Assessment zones can not be explicitly created removed or changed in any way They are exclusively created respectively adjusted to geometric and daylight dependent conditions Each energy evaluation room Is divided into assessment zones that do not intersect one another and that build up t
232. jects into DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 211 DIALux Version 4 7 the ground plan they are inserted at a default height of 1 2 m This is the standard value that is used for a sitting observer If you place them into the 3D view they are placed on the surface you touch with your mouse For example if you place them into the 3D view of an empty room they are positioned on the floor at a height Z 0 Ee E me ES SS es ee ET A J eboea E L J sec Se ee Bl abe af ewe ke i a Fal ie ha Himi l Fig 339 Insert UGR objects into a room A second way to insert these objects is to use the Property Page You just enter the numerical values of the position the size and the rotation and click on Insert It is the same Property Page that you can use to modify an existing object Adjust Viewing Direction of UGR Observer and UGR Area To adjust the viewing direction you can use the corresponding Property Page A direction of 0 means that the observer looks lengthways the X axis A positive angle means a counter clockwise rotation An arrow shows the viewing direction Te B m p ml ee l l j La ce f oeaA i ja jean PERIS S ee Bas 2 LTTE E Cem ies a emma i i Lei oe i W k h hh h Viewing direction of UGR area Direction of 99 means lengthways the Y axis ph sr is ie ie me Fig 340 Viewing direction of an UGR observer DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 212 DIALux Version 4 7 Exterior
233. k on the respective control group for the context menu and then add a new light scene In Fig 163 the suitable control group already exists SEE OE gt TITTET E 2a rj casa EH BMD lo ey era ooro aal e a e ae aai E bem p bees be bika mma Fig 214 Context menu control group Add to light scene If you select the light scene in the Project manager the accompanying Property Pages open The same happens to the control group available in the light scene The Property Page light scene contains the name of the light scene which you can customise DIALux has the option to define light scenes as an emergency light scene and to include the first reflection on the ceiling in the calculation LG 12 You can make these adjustments in the checkboxes of the light scene Property Page DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 142 DIALux Version 4 7 TO ba eraa an E eee Lighten Serre oy Pree 3 Cy Liared iy Pec Li maiaa J Cii e H pi ured ge j T at fonird gems 2 ij Ped eer E e DFi dep are eee iG ar Frm eee i oe bie ETT Fig 215 Property Page of a light scene Light scene The Daylight factors tab enables the determination of the position of the sun for the daylight calculation You have the option to make various settings in the Inspector with respect to daylight Activate the checkbox Take daylight into account during calculation that way you include the daylight in your project If the checkbox is deactiv
234. l buildings Member states of the EU were committed to implement this directive into national right As a guideline the EU created a general framework for the calculation of energy performances of buildings which stated which aspects the calculation methodology must at least include These aspects are heating ventilation air conditioning hot water supply and lighting To support the implementation of the directive in the EU member states the European committee for standardization CEN created a set of CEN standards This set consists of more than 30 parts includes more than 40 standards and drafts and covers 5 CEN technical committees A good overview can be found in http www buildingsplatform eu epbd_publication doc P Q2_EPBD_ CEN Standards p2370 pdf The part concerning lighting is EN 15193 Energy performance of buildings Energy requirements for lighting Besides the European implementation there are national implementations for example in Germany the DIN 18599 Energy efficiency of buildings This standard uses an integral approach for the calculation of the energy balance That is a joint evaluation of energy demands for all parts of the building heating ventilation air conditioning cooling humidification domestic hot water and lighting taking into account interactions between them and impacts on others For example the energy consumption for lighting is not only part of the energy balance for ligh
235. l key while you drop the texture onto a surface all surfaces e g the walls the ceiling and the floor of a room get the same texture Edit Placed Textures When a texture is not placed properly on a surface you can correct this afterwards DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 92 DIALux Version 4 7 Jenoex E i keai Ej a vA i ce e amla BEL LoL aff Fig 131 Edit textures on an object Select the object in the CAD view The Inspector shows the Property Page Surfaces of the object with the additional information about the texture If for example the texture has the wrong rotation you can correct it on the Property Page Texture similarly you can scale or move the texture If you want to mirror a texture you can easily do it by entering a minus symbol in front of the length or the width or both of a texture You can use it only for the texture placed on a surface not for the texture itself Delete Textures You can remove a texture from an object by using the Eraser from the texture tree on the corresponding object Thereby the object gets assigned again the origin colour Projektmanager orschau x General Raytracer Options Textures Use a Name Eraser drag and drop action to pull l fioo an object into a Length 1000 if O ics window Width fi 000 m Or Eraser EI Lg Textures re Indoor been g Ceiling eo Door a Wall Em ar Window ci ir Outdoor I ia Colours Fig 1
236. l layers adopt the colour and activation properties of the base layer For luminaires Its name is also adopted and supplemented with a consecutive number if applicable Options Draw CO direction at light emission locations Length Info in units of the DWG DXF File write luminaire information legend designation dimming value to separate layers The information can thus be switched on and off independent of the luminaires and the legend The layer name consists of the name of the base laver with Es added onto the name Fig 453 Settings for the luminaire export DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 277 DIALux Version 4 7 DWG and DXF Export General Object selection Layer Options I Luminaires Legend lsolines Value chart Adapt the designations used in the legend For the luminaires by changing them in the Following list Designation Name of luminaire Luminaire details in the legend Pieces Luminous Flux Power JLuminous Flux emergency lighting Wattage femergency lighting Fitting Fig 454 Definition of the luminaires legend DWG and DXF Export General Object selection Options Luminaires Legend lsolines Value chart Colour f Value TT gt E 400 0 I P 500 0 lx Standard specifications 600 0 lx User default C1 700 0 tx Even
237. lan front and side view there are rulers located on the left and on the top of the CAD window This ruler will show you the mouse position in X Y X Z and Y Z direction From this ruler you can generate helping areas which are defined in a specific position and are useful to align objects to TF P M FT A pia E i fas 4 T F To muet a helping area double Chick in the ruler or drag and drop an area from the nder into the CAD To invori naenencal values jurai make d reghtclick r the ruler or on tho aren Fig 290 Creating helping areas in the ruler You can create those helping areas by double clicking in the position of the ruler or drag and drop the helping area from the ruler into the CAD It is called helping area because it is active in two dimensions If you place a helping area in the ground plan view parallel two the X axis It will be available in the side view as a parallel line DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 184 DIALux Version 4 7 facing from top to bottom as well If you place a helping area parallel to the Y axis it will be visible in the front view Having them available in two views makes it easy to place objects not only in a desired position but also in a correct height If there are already objects in the CAD window available the helping areas can be snapped to those objects as well Working with help lines Help lines are objects which can be placed in any 2D view When they are place
238. lare LIGHTCORRECTIONVALUE 1 0 declare CAM LOCATION lt 1 23 clock 11 1 15 3 11 gt declare CAM LOOKAT lt 12 4 1 5 1 0 gt In DIALux the 3D view was turned in that way to enable the camera path to go through the whole room In the beginning clock 0 that means the position X is 1 23m DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 319 DIALux Version 4 7 Clock will be counted up in 25 steps from 0 to 1 value from the Ini file The X position of the camera changes from 1 23m in the first step to 1 23m 1 25 x 11m 1 67m in the second step The last X position is 1 23m 25 25 x 11m 12 23m The clock variable can be used a number of times in one file It can be used for translation and rotation in the Same animation So the camera moves along a path turning the viewing direction around its up axis For example declare GAM M A 1 4 declare AM BIENTLIGHT 0 0 declare LIGHTCORRECTIONVALUE 1 0 declare CAMLOCATION lt 1 18 clock 11 1 15 3 13 gt declare CAM_LOOKAT lt 12 4 1 56 1 02 gt global settings ambient_light AM BIENTLIGHT assumed_gamma GAMMA tonemapper low_value 1e 005 high_value 0 8 camera location CAM LOCATION right lt 1 33333 0 0 gt up lt 0 1 0 gt sky lt 0 1 0 gt angle 77 look_at CAMLOOKAT translate CAM LOCATION rotate lt 0 180 clock 0 gt translate CAM LOCATION In this example the rotation is reduced to 180 degree and it is added to the POV file which already includes
239. lculation grids With DIALux 4 7 you can insert not only calculation surfaces but also calculation grids The basic difference from calculation surfaces is the limitation of the number of calculation points Calculation grids have a great number of associated outputs All soorts complexes have at least one calculation grid You also have the additional option of inserting additional calculation grids You will find these either in the project tree under Objects or in the menu under Paste gt Calculation Grid DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 197 DIALux Version 4 7 ih File Edit view CAD Pick Paste Luminaire Selection Output Window ida hR Sh i Projektmanager Geometry i Calculation Grid Position a ooo im Yi 0 000 m ft 0 000 m Pav Size u 5 000 lm amp 5 000 im H 6 000 rn Riokation Je cg Ta Calculation Grid a 10 0 oe 10 0 eee 1 0 pm a a am l m A Standard elements _ ee Room elements ag Windows and doors ol Exterior scene elements Ee Sport Facilities E Calculation surfaces Calculation paints ES Calculation Grid SES Calculation Grid Files E FE Spork B A Furniture Files Outdoor H a Indoor Grid User Defined Calculation Grid Fig 318 Inserting a calculation grid via the project manager By simply using the drag and drop function you can now insert a calculation grid Just select a calculation grid cli
240. le arrangement esssssssserreerrrnsrrrerrrrerrnerrrerrrrerre 248 407 Insert Street Arrangement Arrangement 248 408 Street arrangement Optimise arrangement 249 409 Calculation field in the ground plan view 249 410 3D visualisation of the street ccccsssseeeeeseeeeees 250 411 2D visualisation of the street s es 250 412 Insert street into exterior Scene 251 413 Street in an exterior SCENE cceeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeees 251 414 DIN 5044 for the road lighting calculation 252 415 Inserting a sports complex via the guide 253 416 Inserting a sports complex via the Menu e 254 417 Selecting a sports COMPIAX ceeeeseessseeeeeeeeeeees 254 418 Opening the project manager for editing a sports COMDE erna AEA 255 419 Inserting sports field elements neiere 255 420 Inserting a pole position with the Inspector 256 421 Aligning a TV Camera cccccseeseeeenseersueeeersneeersanens 257 422 Example of outputs for a sports complex 258 423 O tPUT SENGS sienien 259 424 Output header line ccecccssseseeesseseeseeeeersaeeeensaess 259 425 GION Al settihgS nrerin 260 426 Monitor output of a big table aeree 261 427 Print preview generation Status esere 262 428 Print previeW cccccssesccsseeeeeaeeeeeseueeetsneueetsaeesersness 262 ADS Umit result outu Ciasna a 263 430 Output Seting S oinas 263 431 3D CAD at the top left for editing purposes and
241. led Plugins You can open an online catalogue by double clicking on the corresponding symbol in the luminaire tree Afterwards the online catalogue opens and you can insert a luminaire from the internet page of your manufacturer directly into your DIALux project In this way you can constantly access current files of your manufacturer ike a a Ca is rat omer p Em er hi ga ow Dou be chek opens the online catalogues Fine hapa ve hea Ya PTET Pro poll eget J J er e Peedi ile h ars iy o Ea ee bh ajam Boe aren Ad ae ee Pe Pee oo PU pmi W i 1 E Fa ria Hh Pg ni rE r ms I Fa ni i y et Th Ce i pe a rr 1 a 2 T ae ire ce a i E mi om hanna pase ae i a napa y f pa Fig 140 Launch online catalogues Hint Inserting luminaires over the online catalogue works only if this service is offered by the corresponding manufacturer Individual Luminaires Individual luminaires can be inserted into the room from the project or luminaire tree via Drag and Drop Simply pull the luminaire from the tree to the room The luminaire is inserted into the room at that position X and Y coordinates where you release the mouse button The way it is inserted influences the arrangement type Via Drag and Drop you can position luminaires only inside rooms DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 101 DIALux Version 4 7 In the future
242. lighting data information DIALux can t do any automatic subdivisions into assessment zones for such energy evaluation rooms no statements concerning daylight are possible and there is no information about luminaires and lamps All parameters for the energy evaluation have to be set manually by the user In this process the user Is DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 289 DIALux Version 4 7 restricted to just editing the consumption values of the energy evaluation room directly or working on lots of parameters to calculate consumption values Hamn and tescriptinn Caluate Results 7 F Groun aes 200 m E Drect input of energy demands ignara a pnmnnhrs Energy dermani Lighting ZL kahja Parastie Standby oe hah Farski Ernir jc ii uate Total Kathys z LL Propect 2 Lumiraires Used i Ererge Fadushion i ication Zone E Utilization Fore gt D Dragar Dvalustion Room 2 Mp Armen Zone Mon furdight 1 Fig 473 Working on the assessment zone of an unlinked energy evaluation room The possibilities of working with unlinked energy evaluation rooms in DIALux are relatively rudimental right now Each such room has exactly one assessment zone without daylight More assessment zones can t be created daylight provision can t be added However their main purpose is only to include rooms in the whole energy performance evaluation process which have no light planning and whose energy consumption values a
243. like here on the page Maintenance plan The classical method is the default method when a new room is added Ts L ALUX Wohl Upiti ELELSELI F kipi Room 1 Maintenance plan Regular maintenance is essential for an eAectee lighting installation It is tie only way to lima the light loss over fee ctadation s Me lima The minima valsag ef the illuminance angehend in ihe EN 12464 ara mainanangs valueg ie thay are based oa new vale ol mallaton ma meinienance o be preetried The same i of Gorse rue aloo for the values calculabed in Olax They can thereon be reached only if this basic maintenance plan is diligently canned aul General room infer mvatbon Environment comd ions of reymi Mommal Hanbenande mberval of roim Aviraaly Line Arranqenbent DIAL 7 BS S004Lewehie Hiert ad ne lechnd roam uta cas amall ik lt 1 6 Flux distribution Caract Manbenance mberval of luminaires Annal Lammar Hpt Giod IPS face CIE Antal bunt lime fin TOD Preura us Ac placement interval lamps Animually Lacnp bype Dn etphors fluceacen kings Jace Cl Spee lamp ropbeendne Yas Room aace mainbeanes Tacha 4 Lurr ir Prdavenarmece facta Dez Larne lumen maintenance factor 0S3 Lamp surm iral factor 1 00 Mainiugnance lector Date Fichi Asangqement DUAL 3 ES 900 Leachte Effect of redhectnq room surfaces amall k lt 1 8 Plus drar buan Diret Mantenancn interval of luminains Animally Luntmiare type Clatad IPs Fa CLE
244. lly into absolute numbers or as an angle for each individual luminaire Arrangement Illumination Points Rotations Nai 4 gt Illumination Points m Beam angle x y z 1 0 400 10 900 0 000 2 0 000 0 000 0 000 gt New Illumination Point DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 115 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 166 Options for changing the illumination points A further option for changing the illumination points is simply to slide the illumination point to another position Just use the left mouse button to click on the illumination point and slide it to the desired position Fig 167 Moving an illumination point manually The alignment of each luminaire to its illumination point is displayed in the CAD window as a blue arrow The red arrow s belong to the original luminaire s which is are mirrored in the project Symmetrical mirroring helps to save time when positioning the luminaires If in specific positions you need different or more luminaires or even different illumination points you have the option to insert a further floodlighting illumination in addition to the existing one Alternatively you can cancel the existing floodlight illumination With the right mouse button simply select the item Cancel Symmetry in the context menu o Bh eee p 1 e te Fig 168 Cancelling the symmetry of floodlight illumination DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 116 DIALux Version 4 7 An arrangement of individually a
245. lues are calculated And that s it almost All other characteristics can be derived from these values M onthly values can be obtained with the help of redistribution factors values for energy evaluation rooms are nothing else than sums of values of their contained assessment zones values for utilization zones nothing other than sums of values of their contained energy DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 293 DIALux Version 4 7 evaluation rooms and so on Even the Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator LENI from EN 15193 is nothing more than an area weighted value For assessment zones that are add to another assessment zone or to the super ordinate utilization zone things are different Such zones are not calculated independently Name and Description Calculate Power Tir 4 gt O calculate by itself Add to the following assessment zor Assessment fone Daylight 1 wt C Add to the superordinate utiisation zone The assessment zone is nok calculated by itsef Instead it receives proportional results From the assessment zone it is added to It can be added ony to those assessment zones that are caculated by themselves C Projekk 1 El Luminares Used a Energy Evaluation Eid utilsation Zone 1 E D Room 1 fenergy evaluation project _ Assessment Zone Daylight 1 Assessment Zone Non Daylight 1 Fig 481 An assessment zone that is added to another assessment zone Name and Description Calculate Power Ti
246. mbH L denscheid page 109 DIALux Version 4 7 illustration above the luminaires and the lamps used in the field can be modified without having to delete the field Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting height Rotations Entire Field x 0 0 ai v o o i z o o Individual Luminaire bo 2 vpi 2 sfooo n an Synchronized Individual Rotations Fig 156 Rotating the arrangement and the luminaires Both the rotation of the entire field as well as the rotation of the luminaires within the field can be modified numerically or graphically To rotate a single luminaire within a field it must be selected individually Additionally there is the possibility to synchronize individual rotations Projektmanager Luminaire Positions Mounting height Rotations Arrangement Rows 2 Luminaires per Row f2 Start Point i fo oo0 m Ja 000 m End point x 5 400 mo 2 600 m E Em 257 E AGU Em total 257 e Fig 157 Luminaire field position The position of a luminaire field can also be modified numerically or graphically Inserting Luminaire Lines Luminaire lines can also be positioned via the Wizard or manually After a line has been inserted the length the position or the angle can be graphically modified DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 110 DIALux Version 4 7 Pisco i Floorplan Ron hi view bx A DAN a LA pP Ere tpn HA kp A Ti BA rated 1 it Fi
247. minaires Total Planing value 1713 Is 1306 lx Hew 2608 2045 Mounting Pendant ng Suspension fo 500 m Mounting 2 300 m Height abore fi 494 m Room Height 2 800 m Workplane Height 0 750 m E Fig 90 Determination of the number of required luminaires To access the Property Page M aintenance factor right click on an item below Luminaires in the Inspector for example Field Arrangement or Individual Luminaire then from the context menu select Edit maintenance Factor All parameters can be edited associated with maintenance factor for this luminaire If a luminaire has several LEOs their parameters can likewise be individually edited DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 69 DIALux Version 4 7 Dao amp Jang ajs a mja HRF l jE Aie aly Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting Arrangement Maintenance factor Luminous emittance 1 Luminous emittance 2 Lafl Maintenance interval Every 3 0 years T Closed IFs Hours of operation per 2 58 G day sinale shitt year in 1000 hours 2 58 5 day single shift Replacement interval lamps in years fi O Lamp type Tri phosphorus fluoresce M Individual replacement of defective lamps Luminaire type Edit individual factors manually WE D ASk D LHF J LF LSP a s8 EN 0 73 0 93 7 i o Mote New values directly from manufacturer Umi aires Total Planing value 1653 x 1846 Ix New 2608 x 2049 lx Fig 91 Property Page M aintenance factor On this
248. minaires in the room or exterior scene just hold down the CTRL key while you drop it on any luminaire Luminaires with rotatable elements can have a filter with each light emitting object individually Coaction of spectral distribution of the light source and colour filter Most lighting calculation software has for each light source only one spectrum or even just a RGB value But this is not enough for a professional lighting designer The resulting colour is defined by the spectrum of the light source and the transmission spectrum of the filter Adl dhd la Fig 204 Resulting spectrum of a luminaire with two times the same filter but different light sources The two pictures above are from the Property Pages of two luminaires In both cases the same colour filter was used However the light sources are different one is a high pressure sodium lamp and the other is a metal halide lamp Of course the resulting spectrum is totally different Also the transmission factor is different The DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 136 DIALux Version 4 7 transmission factor given for the filter at D65 is even higher at 41 6 Li r 1 i P Fig 205 All the spots are using the same colour filter but have different light sources From the left Incandescent Flourescent 830 D65 high pressure sodium metal halide ceramic and metal halide quartz To get rid of a filter you can either click on the Remove button in the col
249. move it again from the list CL ao fewer Lge ve Em ammarr brir om eT i hr sar i la Ma ii agem ri ana bina E a i Lae ey Tir d iali ia E 3 E LEJE e u rE EEF Area Core eS A a et pS ol eT Fr sLhe aw eS LE z fan imis acm Fig 365 Luminaire selection At last you can specify the parameters for the arrangement to be optimised like pole distance height above working plane or light overhang For not variable parameters you can edit the values of the fixed parameters also the arrangement type If you leave this window by clicking on Next the calculation of the optimal arrangement will be started automatically our ee eprrerss pasar ee eS p ee ee hee ee ee eed ee ie yp a F nk beiei Pa mela De eee h eed a F F rer ee ee ee Per Swe oe ee eae aa i i He baa ag cr Laie ae Secs Pen oo Eee Fig 366 Variable arrangement parameters After the calculation DIALux offers you possible positioning suggestions The suggestions are divided into suitable largely suitable provided that you have activated the substitute list and inadequate DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 226 DIALux Version 4 7 arrangements You can open or close these three groups individually via a click on sign in the list The results can be sorted depending on the several parameters up and down while you click on the suitable column header in the result list DIA Lux shows you in the footer the
250. n 0 degrees and smaller than 180 degrees In the camera area of the POV file the settings for the camera can be changed camera location CAM LOCATION parameter for the position is defined in the beginning of the file right lt 16 9 0 0 gt right vector of the camera up lt 0 1 0 gt up vector of the camera sky lt 0 1 0 gt Vector for the sky angle 77 viewing angle look_at CAMLOOKAT viewing direction of the camera The primary purpose of the up and right vectors Is to tell POV Ray the relative height and width of the view screen In the default perspective camera these two vectors also define the initial plane of the view screen before moving it with the look_at or rotate vectors The length of the right vector together with the direction vector may also be used to control the horizontal field of view with some types of projection The look_at modifier changes both the up and right vectors The angle calculation depends on the right vector DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 314 DIALux Version 4 7 up upwards vector camera look at right right vector age camera location image plane Fig 509 Camera look and location This picture shows the definition of the field of view The blue plane Is the image plane DIALux exports those values as they are defined in the 3D view of the CAD Depending on the camera type used those values can differ See POV Ray
251. n 4 7 WLP ATELIER YET Quick Planning Wirard Lummarh Saket HESS Select a lumens for the MLE hom wou PAU of search line naled HOPERELSIER ew pet ee ee tn i IHAN L ti Piegse sebezi te krae io berred Lurrik oun 365 Ailse Takat ha ganii ha Luara ernaria 1 Lamp ta TH Se x f Heme you can iaae Bus poari Lures Flic FFA in TORLAS SR AL TRILLE WA TUM TOSEL STAPF ETE Fig 23 Working with Wizards Luminaire M anufacturer Selection If you click in the dialogue of Luminaire Selection on Databases you can launch the installed Plugins or start the User Database Always a few luminaires are arranged in the user database In the user database you can save your favoured luminaires in order to have fast access to your frequently used luminaires Genai Laer Corer Four 30 Whi h hrinn ane you locking for 7 A r DHAL Sha hilehhe ACEC PRETO BEREN DIAL Aufsaudtahler DUAL Optkewchten BS Be Leuehee mit BAP Ipiegelrasrer divekestrahlesd beebglane SLSEleet bempe LJEN cI Fig 24 Working with Wizards Plugin User Database Select the desired luminaire with the help of the filter functions of a Plugin or the user database and then click on the button Apply Then please click on the Close button DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 29 DIALux Version 4 7 Quick Planning Wizard f o Ea Luminaire Selection a Select a luminaire for the arrangement from pour Favourites or
252. n Display guide window Is in the menu Window Tl Pt Tr m ts Pao rfieaz PERLITE Po cE ike ee i EE BRE Sn a T E Fea mra min Vis F ee E ee ee ean e e T ifn Uf ee is Ls 1s EP Fig 51 Display guide window The Inspector With the Inspector you can view the properties of each object selected either in the CAD view or in the Project manager Here you can also change the properties Some values have a grey background These cannot be modified here DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 48 Changes to individual walls or to the global setting for the entire room Changes to the luminaire or to the luminaire arrangement Here you can change the properties of the entire luminaire arrangement but not the properties of individual luminaires DIALux Version 4 7 Projektmanager V Automatic Hi US 2b osr Project 1 ea Luminaires Used HAD Room 1 d Workplane ijl Floor wo Ceiling B Wal surfaces wall 1 wall 2 Wall 3 wall 4 Fig 52 Property Page of the selected room in the Inspector In the previous example you can see several properties of the selected room Click on the Room Surfaces tab to change the reflectance properties globally Beware Here you can only change the reflectance of all walls together If you wish to change the reflectance of individual walls you need to select the corresponding wall and then change Its property in the Inspector Please keep in mind t
253. n Surfaces ij noom 1 bve L ses n Fhir plari 1PX Bimi Hal HIMA iHa hE es i Fig 314 Transparent calculation surfaces A calculation surface is an area in which the illuminance can be measured without affecting the light distribution themselves Various calculation surface norms exist for instance the work plane the correct reading level for hospitals etc A calculation surface is displayed as a transparent surface as the example shows The surface which DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 195 DIALux Version 4 7 appears transparent Is the surface which provides the calculation results The surface Is invisible when viewed from the other side No results are calculated for the invisible side These objects can be scaled and rotated like all other furniture Exception windows and doors are always plane parallel to the respective wall Calculation surfaces for different types of illuminance The calculation surfaces in DIALux can now calculate different types of illuminance As well as calculating the normal namely the planar illuminance perpendicular to the receiving plane it is now possible to explicitly calculate vertical planar horizontal planar and camera directed planar illuminance and also semi cylindrical and cylindrical illuminance er er s sj penown gt see ee ey kija af ala i fF is Pa T s mp ssil Fig 315 Different types of illuminance A re m i lt Geometry
254. n create new folder and you can delete existing ones All this is available by a right click on the furniture or on the folder Now DIALux saves the furniture as m3d files The benefit is that the preview pictures are saved also in that file That makes it much easier to share DIALux furniture with friends and colleagues Of course you can still save them as sat and jpg files The Colours Tree since version 4 3 formerly Texture Tree DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 44 DIALux Version 4 7 You can use the Colours tree to modify the properties of surfaces via drag and drop similar to inserting furniture into a room In the textures tree you find predefined textures Surface pictures RAL colours and you have the option to organise your own textures You can move and copy textures from one folder directory to another Also you can create new folder and you can delete existing ones All this is available by a right click on the texture or the folder The subfolder Light colours and Colour filter will be explained in the chapter Light Colours General Raytracer Options Name Tiles brown Rho Ta Size X mo Y mi Preview rr Textures Lg Exterior E G DIALUx 4 2 L Inside el gi Floor rr Concrete rr Tiles rr Wood rr Linoleum L Fitted carpet L Ceiling L Window L Furniture L Doors cg Wall Fe Colours Fer Light colours Ley Colour filter Lv Used Textures CH Project urn
255. n different quality grades by the usage of the Raytrace preview At first please calculate your actual project with DIALux and click next on the Raytrace preview symbol in the DIALux toolbar DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 96 DIALux Version 4 7 p _ Raytrace preview j Fig 135 Selection of the Raytrace preview The DIALux inspector provides the user with two different settings options for the Raytrace preview Quality The integrated slider allows you to set up the grad of smoothing edges from low to high The higher you move the slider the more beautiful the rendering will get Asa matter of fact the calculation time will also increase fundamentally Highlights On reflecting surfaces high luminance e g due to direct light from luminaries could cause intense gloss effects If these gloss effects should be paid attention to in your picture please select Calculate highlights As a matter of fact the calculation time will also increase fundamentally in this case Additionally in some scenes there might not be any changes viewable Therefore please choose this option carefully Raytrace parameters Quality J Low High Calculate highlights Fig 136 Raytrace preview parameters Our tip Please generate a picture rendering in lower quality and without highlights first Thus you will recognise very quickly if your chosen perspective meets your demands and furthermore if the whole scen
256. naires within the arrangement field line DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 132 DIALux Version 4 7 circle or single get that spectrum To add a spectrum just to a single luminaire within the arrangement just hold down the SHIFT key while dragging and dropping tt The luminaires show the replacement of a spectrum with blinking for a short time and the light emitting surface will appear in the colour of the light source if available including the colour filter If you want to put a spectrum to all luminaires in the room or exterior scene just hold down the CTRL key while you drop it on any luminaire Luminaires with rotatable elements can get a spectrum and filter for each light emitting object individually If you just drag and drop a filter onto a luminaire with adjustable elements all the luminaires of the same arrangement and all light outputs will get the spectrum filter 2 Pe ee ee oe ee Liz foo cI I a i i a j 77 J a eee ae al Fe eee Fl Pha Ce ENE EP Fig 199 Drag and Drop of a spectrum onto a luminaire with rotatable elements The filter is not used on the luminaire of the same type which is in a single luminaire arrangement in the middle neither on the luminaire of a different type If you hold down the CTRL key while drag and drop the filter spectrum all luminaires and all light emitting elements get the spectrum This includes those of a different type and in another arrangem
257. nce condition Illumination Conditions Wizard x Finishing luminance conditions Wizard You have completed the wizard successtully All of the basic requirements have been calculated for your street illumination Determined Illuminance D4 To exit the wizard and select the calculated illuminance conditions click Finish lt Back Cancel Fig 376 Illumination Conditions Wizard Final dialogue After finishing the wizard DIALux incorporates directly the illuminance condition in your street project The wizard has already considered which kind of roadway element you have selected For example typical requirements of the roadway do not appear with a sidewalk The user has the option to determine the maintenance factor in the Property Page maintenance plan method DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 231 DIALux Version 4 7 ky 5r Edt ew caD parme Luminaire Selection Gupt Wade 2 DEGUAAAlA 3 e Low s fa 2 RIBS Bel J e lt a Generel Maintenance plan method Arrangement m zom Mairtenance factor Jaco Pinas seinra an application e Fig 377 Maintenance plan method A standard street may contain certain street elements which you can add sort or delete in the Property Page Arrangement To sort the street elements e g sidewalk bicycle lane lay by you can select one of these and use the Up or Down buttons see Fig 378 a pe Be Yew CAD Pate lumingo goeien Quip Window 7
258. ngle and a step width The inclination angle defines the observer s viewing direction towards the horizontal Start and end angle define the observer s vertical viewing section Here 0 is the direction along the positive X axis positive angles move counter clockwise Step width defines the different viewing directions between start and end angle GR observers can easily be placed as a line or even as a field by using the function Copy along a line Obtrusive Light ULR Calculation The ULR Upward Light Ratio value is the percentage of luminaire flux of a luminaire or a lighting installation that is emitted above the horizontal where all luminaires are considered in their real position in the installation Sky glow limitations depend on the environmental zone of the lighting installation The standard defines four environmental zone categories from E to E E category is used for intrinsically dark landscapes like national parks or areas of outstanding natural beauty E category is used for high district brightness areas like city centres Sky glow limitations reach from 0 to 25 DIALux states the ULR value on the Planning data Output page for exterior scenes DIALux considers only luminaire flux that goes directly into the sky Luminaire flux above the horizontal that is both used for lighting of vertical structures such as facades and Is restricted to these structures will not be considered S DIAL
259. not need into the Command tab You can extract the functions which you need from the tab to the desired position DIALux supports the standard Window s Shortcuts which you can launch by combinations of shortcut keys You can specify additional combinations in the tab Shortcut Keys The tab Options provides the ail to select more settings in the menu Taia Deea a ated Cpa aromaer pect War em ber wl tm a om ansaa mi ia dag toe wa ov Taka Commas pine Cosas E E E E Si bisg Fem ii me rF LIN d ape F n Fig 70 Menu Customise You can reset the user interface of DIALux in the menu to restore the default setting at the next start of DIA Lux ee j i Soe cee ee i O iad ol a gg R m a Paord ean Gls e m eee ee ee Fig 71 Reset user interface DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 59 DIALux Version 4 7 Create a New Project If you click on the New button you will generate a new project DIALux can handle only one project at a time An already opened project must therefore be closed before the new project can be generated In the Inspector you can define the Project Name and Descriptions of the project DIALux adds automatically the creation date Alternatively you can edit the date by deactivating the Automatic box g File Edit View COD Paske Luminaire Selection utp NG aio i 3 PaL E e s Qe Projektmanager p Project Contact Address Details
260. nscheid page 270 DIALux Version 4 7 DWG and DXF Import and Export With DIALux you may import DWG and DXF drawings and use them for your work After you finished your planning you can export the room geometry the room elements the luminaires and the furniture into your CAD drawing DWG DXF Import o Create an empty rectangular room If you work on an exterior scene create that o Goto the ground plan view o From the menu File Import use the option DWG or DXF File The wizard asks you to select the dwg or dxf file Welcome to the CAD drawing import wizard This wizard supports you when importing and adjusting a CAD drawing Selection of a DWG or DXF file to be imported Defining the units Defining the planning origin To continue dick Next Fig 442 DWG DXF Import options o Let the wizard read the file o The units used in the dwg dxf file are not yet defined When you select the probable unit the size of the drawing Is listed in two fields o You can place the origin of the planning at the Origin of the global coordinates system 0 00 0 00 0 00 or you can choose a point defined in the file or you can place the origin at the gravity centre of the used area the middle of the drawing Basic DWG DXF Settings and Layer Selection With the menu CAD you can change the properties of the dwg dxf file and of the layers similar to the CAD program You can decide to show or hide single layers and to s
261. nts Aarne PEE L TE EE E EAE E E E E 119 177 Context menu of the unrestricted luminaire ALFANO eIMent basanan a hitee vee 120 178 Modify the new luminaire arrangement 120 179 Remove from luminaire group ceeeseeeeeesersneeees 121 180 Aligning luminaire arrangements Context menu 121 181 Set illumination point Aligned luminaire field 122 182 Selection of a direct planar lighting situation 123 183 Alternative solution to insert a direct planar lighting SIGUA Ol muerte ters cist EE A A A aan 123 184 Insertion of selected luminaries into the direct planar HQ FVENAG SIFU GUC Nieran ante eset aun dirt 124 185 Insertion of additional points to the lighting situation EEEE TEA A E EE A EET 124 186 Changes in Mounting Height 1 Arrangement of luminaries 2 and Rotations of single luminaries 3 at vertical planar lighting solutions 125 187 Editing the single axes direct planar lighting 125 188 Selection of a vertical planar lighting situation 126 189 Alternative solution to insert a vertical planar lighting SUAIN oria 126 190 Insertion of selected luminaries into the vertical planar HOUN SOUM aranaren a 127 191 Changes in Mounting Height 1 Arrangement of luminaries 2 and Rotations of single luminaries 3 at vertical planar lighting solutions 127 192 Editing the single axes vertical planar lighting 128 193 Spectral light CalCUlAtION ccceesseeeseeeesee
262. nufacturers Plugin Now you use the option Insert Street Arrangement and choose the product from the luminaire list Luminaire Pole Boom Arrangement Joint rotations Luminaire DIAL 29 Mastaufsatzleuchte 1 HME 80 Luminous emittance 1 Lamp HME 80W ka Luminous Flux 4000 Imi Power 89 0 wW Correction factor 1 000 Correction reason Cre cet Fig 405 Insert Street Arrangement Luminaire The Property Page Luminaire allows you a choice of luminaires as well as the entry of technical data for the luminous emittance DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 247 DIALux Version 4 7 Luminaire Pole Boom Arrangement Joint rotations Boom Boom Length a 0 000 m Boom Angle b 0 0 ii verhang 0 500 m Distance Pole to Roadway 0 500 m Angle of Rotation 0 0 z Pole Arrangement Mounting Height 0 000 m Height 3 299 m No of Luminaires per Pole 1 Pole Distance 15 000 m Longitudinal Displacement 0 000 m Fig 406 Insert Street Arrangement Boom properties and pole arrangement In the Property Page Pole Boom you can define specific properties of the boom as well as the pole arrangement The drawing in Fig 406 illustrates the Boom Length and Boom Inclination The Overhang defines how far the middle of the luminaire plane centre of gravity of the luminaire overlaps the roadway The Distance Pole to Roadway is measured between the root point of the pole and the border of the road
263. o define such a ratio see advanced settings For a first picture you should always start with a small picture like 640 x 480 Render image with POV Ray Indirect calculation Brightness preferences Quick preference Image preferences Picture dimensions in Pixel x 24a pixels Fig 496 POV Ray Image preferences Indirect calculation In addition to the settings of indirect calculation of the quick preferences in this dialog the indirect calculation can be defined in a more detailed way DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 305 DIALux Version 4 7 Render imape with POV Ray Quick preference Image preferences Indirect calculation Brightness preferences Lighting preferences use Radiosity count 70 error _bound 1 600 pretrace start 0 080 pretrace_end 0 040 gray threshold 0 200 Note incorrect values can lead to the scene being incorrectly rendered or not rendered at all You can Find out the exact significance of the parameters in the POY Ray Online Help Fig 497 POV Ray Indirect calculation The checkbox Use Radiosity switches the indirect calculation on and off e Count The integer number of rays that are sent out whenever a new radiosity value has to be calculated is given by count A value of 35 is the default the maximum is 1600 When this value is too low the light level will tend to look a little bit blotchy as if the surfaces you re looking at were slightly warped
264. o exterior scene You can work on the individual street elements and luminaire arrangements in the same way as you did in your street project All street elements are shown in the exterior scene as ground elements aame oN eae Ce sal ij te mee ee r ee ee ee I O 2 ee b a T Fig 413 Street in an exterior scene Luminance Calculation according to DIN 5044 In 2005 EN 13201 was established for street lighting planning DIALux users can do street lighting planning according to that standard from version 3 1 5 But sometimes it is necessary to do planning with obsolete DIN 5044 for example for checking old street luminaire arrangements For such circumstances DIALux allows street light planning according to DIN 5044 In a street s Property Page General you can select DIN 5044 from the Illuminance Conditions selection DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 251 DIALux Version 4 7 p General Maintenance plan method Arrangement Description DIN 5044 J Wizard O Project 1 E Luminaires Used 4g Exterior Scene 1 Fig 414 DIN 5044 for the road lighting calculation DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 252 DIALux Version 4 7 Sports complexes In DIALux 4 7 you can insert sports complexes of different kinds as well as standard roads into an outdoor scene There are sports complexes for seven different types of sport as well as a general sports complex M any different individual funct
265. oks in the direction of the driving direction On the basis of the resulting symmetries a rotation of the observation direction is not necessary The Property Page Surfaces offers the possibility to set material texture and Raytracer Options All settings only have an effect on the visualisation but not on the calculation results gt Projektmanager General Street Coating Observer Surfaces Material Texture Raytracer_4 t Color L Reflection D f U Material Fig 384 Properties of a roadway Surfaces In the default setting median parking lane and grass strip have no valuation field Nevertheless this can be inserted while the respective street element is marked in the Project manager and with the right mouse button the option Insert Valuation Field is chosen ha fle Ek Yew AD Pete LuminareSelection utput Windows PESJAK gg a L Street i Moor pla mio l P E bret Le Ld TEE im Haf Cnergency Lane I af Grass frp l a af Bivachwaey F E Er DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 235 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 385 Insert valuation field via context menu Similarly a valuation field can be deleted or renamed by means of right mouse button The new EN allows the use of common valuation fields for different roadway elements In the wizard this is possible by choosing the suitable checkbox If additional validation fields are selected several more steps are neces
266. on Zones Utilisation Zone 1 Summary 0 E Room List S F Room 1 fenergy evaluation project fo Summary Assessment Zone List E Assessment Zones Assessment Zone Daylight 1 Summary 0 Parameter H Assessment Zane Non Daryligt Utilisation Zone 2 Utilisation Zone 3 Ill Fig 483 Outputs for an energy evaluation There are several outputs for an energy evaluation to show the calculated energy demands for different objects The calculated total energy demands for lighting and other energetic characteristics can be shown for the complete energy evaluation project for each contained utilization zone each energy evaluation room and for each assessment zone A subdivision in monthly values is also possible for each object Energy Evaluation Summary Energy Evaluation According to Following Standard EN 15193 Location London Eng Longitude 0 10 Latitude 51 50 Results Total Energy Lighting 10068 05 kWh a LENI 40 98 kWhi a m Total Energy Visual Task 10068 05 kWh a Total Energy Parasitic Total 0 00 kWh a Total Energy Parasitic Standby 0 00 kWh a Total Energy Parasitic Loading the Emergency Lighting 0 00 kWh a Total Area 245 71 m Monthly Results Visual Task Parasttic List of the Participating Utilisation Zones e Utilisation Zone 1 e Utilisation Zone 2 e Utilisation Zone 3 e Utilisation Zone 4 e Utilisation Zone 5 Fig 484 Output for the complete energy ev
267. orge cuca Fig 129 Calculation dialogue DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 91 In order to occupy only one surface of an object with the texture hold the SHIFT key In order to occupy all surfaces of an object with the texture hold the CTRL key DIALux Version 4 7 Insert Textures Insert via Drag amp Drop You can insert textures into your project with Drag amp Drop Pee er k0a 8 i i ls SRI eB see seen Cee i Hure ae bee e l Eefin iia i Snare hE j Lafi eee Caer yi g Ea E Aa eh Lmg Tips es qm Fig 130 Insert textures via Drag amp Drop If you want to assign a texture to a surface you simply go to the colours tree select the desired texture or colour hold the left mouse button and drag it to the CAD and drop it onto correct surface You can place textures and colours on every real surface furniture walls windows doors but not on a virtual calculation surface The light colours and colour filters can only be used on luminaires Inside of an object room or furniture the texture is assigned to all surfaces with the same colour or texture For example if the walls in a room have the same colour and you drag a masonry texture to one wall the texture is assigned to all other walls at the same time When you want to assign the texture only to one surface you can hold the Shift key while you drop the texture to the surface When you hold the Ctr
268. otal evaluation multiple times How often should this room be taken inko account count CJ Projekt 1 E Luminaires Used Energy Evaluation El utilisation Zone 1 El Room 1 energy evaluation project Assessment Zone Non Daylight 1 Utilisation Zone 2 Fig 471 Possibility to change the linked DIALux room for an energy evaluation room Links between energy evaluation rooms and DIALux rooms can also be changed in the properties page Name and Description Energy Evaluation Room without Link to a DIALux Room Links ta the Following DIALux room Room 1 wr The results of each individual energy evaluation room can Flow into the total evaluation multiple times How often should this room be taken into account count E Projekt 1 E Luminaires Used B E Energy Evaluation El utilisation Zone 1 E Room 1 energy evaluation project Assessment Zone Non Daylight 1 Utilisation Zone 2 Fig 472 Possibility to cancel the link of an energy evaluation room to a DIALux room Caution Each DIALux room can only be linked with one single energy evaluation room As soon as there is a link between a DIALux room and an energy evaluation room there can not be more Therefore there are only rooms in the selection list that are not linked to energy evaluation rooms And what makes an energy evaluation room without a link to a DIALux room different Because of lack of both geometric and
269. otation around the up axis Remember Y and Z are exchanged compared with DIALux Clock is a counter which is going upwards from 0 to 1 The definition of the clock has to be done in the Ini file of POV Ray To do this open the Ini file by clicking on the icon In this Ini file a section with the correct resolution anti aliasing and step width of the clock has to be added Example 320x240 Animation Name Width 320 resolution width Height 240 resolution height Antialias Off anti alias switched off Initial Frame 1 Image to start with Final_ Frame 25 Image to stop with defines the number of images Initial Clock 0 0 start value of clock Final Clock 1 0 stop value of clock After changing the Ini file POV Ray has to be closed and restarted After the restart of POV Ray this section can be selected in the top left area of the editor Initial Frame and Final_ Frame define the number of pictures to be rendered In our example there are 25 pictures Initial Clock and Final_ Clock should be taken without changing In Europe there are 25 frames per second in PAL format commonly A 10 seconds lasting film needs 250 pictures frames In our example we create 25 pictures coded as a PAL movie it will last 1 second In the POV file we have added the line rotate DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 318 DIALux Version 4 7 lt 0 clock 360 0 gt From Initial clock 0 up to Initial clock 1 the camera is turned around 360 POV
270. ou are asked to specify the directory and the name of the PDF file Exporting to PDF can take some time if you have a large project but usually it is twice as fast as printing the output Once you have the PDF file you can send it to your customer The PDF file cannot be modified DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 268 DIALux Version 4 7 Export Output Graphics tables text and graphic When the output in DIALux is opened double click on the desired output sheet any type of output can be selected for copy and paste by a right click on it Further on tables graphics and text can be saved in a file Eri pim PF Ti i i Eg Tjj fu ia i OE E l m Fig 439 Export the output table to a file or copy it into the clipboard Fig 440 Export the output graphic to a file or copy it into the clipboard You can export the graphical output DIALux created to almost all other Windows software like Word or image processing software To do this open the according Output in the output tree and adjust the settings e g steps colours font size Now click and hold the left mouse button in the output window and drag the output image to the other program The image Is copied to this program as a wmf image DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 269 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 441 Export of output graphics to other programmes Of course you can also copy text and tables to other programs with Copy and Paste DIAL GmbH Lude
271. ou use the pvengine exe in the DIALux subfolder Look for the green lines in the pov file Right click on next line and select Copy xxx to Command Line to render animation KFIO KFF249 As written in the first line please make a right click on the line KFIO KFF249 Depending on the setting of your animation the values for KFI and KFF can differ DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 316 DIALux Version 4 7 Jee eee ed bebe es e Chee h Rerun CETERE v KFs krz Messager Lined GHAL ure pirs fend fend f Tonemappir br igiiness 1 F I Right click an meat line and gelect Copy ama to Command Line t render a KETO hPP Pa ee F aif clprk_mi declare CAMLE edeclice CAMLI clag aif Cframe_niai fdec lace CAHLi edeclace CAML aor eit iframe ma Sde las CAhiLi edeclace CARLI ih if iframe ma declare CANLI Sdeclace CAML e Lel joe Cocey A F bo Commie if tramp mal Ae Cue Fii Cara darclarea CANLI Sear a declare cam_ OTN Far Pai Adler PENE ef iframe ma Properties Odore eve O an daclare 38 lbw ees Mi ft Sri Srina Sdeclare CAMLOGRATS lt 8 HE22 2 F922 68 isis PENE adf framewneeber 5 declare CaML OC aT Towe lt 7 06055 7 HIAL Ga SA0Gs Al d Copy fe cring HIDI FF bo the ibare LH ea ire Fig 512 Starting an anmation in PovRay using key frames M aking a right click a context menu appears Select the Copy xxx to Command Line comman
272. our appearance Property Page or you drag and drop a no filter filter onto the luminaire No filter is always in the top of the filter subfolders Light colours in the ray tracing The used light colours and colour filters are automatically handed over to PovRay There is no further setting necessary to use colours in the ray tracing visualisation White balance The white balance is used to adjust the rendering on the monitor to the colour temperature of the lights in the scene Digital and analogue recording of videos and pictures offer the option to use white balance to correct pictures This imitates the ability of the human eye for chromatic adaptation Fig 206 Four identical photos using different values for the white balance Source wikipedia foto Thomas Steiner DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 137 DIALux Version 4 7 In the menu view you can select Set white balance Selecting this function you can choose different settings for using the white balance Please keep in mind that also your monitor has a setting for a white balance or at least for a colour temperature These settings can counteract the software settings White balance Carry out white balance Use Automatic Manual white point 3300K 6500K 10000K l I l l Here you can set the colour temperature manually which is to appear as white The automatic system attempts to use optimal settings based on the light peene Apply Fig 2
273. perties are displayed in the Inspector A right click opens the context menu for that object just as it does in the CAD view The Luminaire Selection Another tree structure exists for the luminaire selection This becomes visible if you click on the Luminaire Selection tab at the bottom of the Project manager Double click on a Plugin to open it Double click a not installed Plugin opens the internet home page of the manu fac turer FAITE LMG pk Hisi Egi OT Marn Lighireg TL H pya Hn TAS GPL oe WLA With a double click on the online catalogues a lumi naire can be selected of the internet homepage of the manufacturer Ce Sera A e ris Cate EEGA iro T umire Pira a Pee ail Lar os oe Cid j cei F DUAL 2 BG EL Bia Pe tee u FES a I Wes pee e aeaa Fig 40 Plugln Tree Luminaire selection DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 39 Create your own luminaire database Insert delete search for specified criteria Display of luminaire images and technical data DIALux Version 4 7 Installed Plugins are automatically recognized by DIALux 4 7 It is not required to reinstall the Plugins after updating from older DIALux versions Double click on a Plugin to open it You can also access this option via the Luminaire Selection menu Plugins provided by our partners that have not yet been installed are located a bit lower in the tree structure A double click on a Pl
274. r I gt Calculate by itself Add to the Following assessment zor Add to the superordinate utilisation zone The assessment zone is not calculated by itself Instead it receives proportional results From the superordinate utilisation zone C Projekt 1 ah Luminaires Used Energy Evaluation El Utilisation Zone 1 SO Room 1 energy evaluation project Assessment Zone Daylight 1 wae Assessment Zone Non Daylight 1 Fig 482 An assessment zone that is added to the super ordinate utilisation zone When an assessment zone is added to another zone or to the super ordinate utilization zone then this zone Is no longer calculated independently that is on the basis of its parameters Instead the results of the other assessment zone respectively the results of the super ordinate utilization zone are allocated to the dependent assessment zone Such dependent assessment zones get their results as soon as the independent assessment zones are calculated Results are simply allocated area weighted There are two main constraints concerning adding of assessment zones to others First you can only add to DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 294 DIALux Version 4 7 such assessment zones that are independently calculated Second each utilization zone needs at least one assessment zone that is independently calculated Documentation of energy evaluation results oof Summary B Utilisation Zone List Utilisati
275. rameters and watch the changes of the third one There is only one calculated value of the third parameter that results from the other ones Nevertheless the third parameter can be edited in the usual way There may be special circumstances or information that define this parameter differently So when you edit such a parameter this will be stated in the output The documentation will include not only the edited value used for the energy evaluation but also the initially calculated value resulting from the other parameters In such cases you are well advised to state why you changed the calculated value in the description of the assessment zone If you want to return to the calculated value you can easily reset it by pressing the Reset button Within a DIN planning the Absence Factor is only readable because it belongs to a utilization profile The Factor for Occupancy Control is only readable as well because it is only changed by the selection of With DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 292 DIALux Version 4 7 Occupancy Sensor yes or no For the Occupancy Dependency Factor the same holds as with EN 15193 There are a lot of relations and dependencies between parameters They all have one thing in common the compliance of the documentation to explain and circumstantiate calculated energy demands Calculation and results When the complete building is subdivided into utilization zones all energy ev
276. ran enter ee 261 MOUNN CLOG enana aa a Gubens 102 NOW Valuessaan a Winrncainaeen 103 Not installed PIUGINS issis irria 40 ODSEIVOI S iie a a EE A ENTA 235 QO SUMICTION rioni A 162 omni directional glare control ssessssesrrreerrreerrrreerrreerrrreens 265 Optima Noies nnana a aa a 248 OJ 0 2 EUO a nr rent eater cre etace eer eente nner arte 109 output combinations of output types cccceesesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 267 multiple output simultaneously ssssisssssrneessrrrrresrrrreersnn 46 SCHOEN rnea a a a 46 OULDUL SEEC ssa ee isi earn 46 DORKING HONG arioso e a ai 232 235 D A A N A E T A E A A A AE 268 photometric FEQUIFEMENKS ccccceeeseeeseeeeseeeseneeeeeeeens 223 237 DECKO uyaran a i TN 175 POIS siete ical N 248 OT OW GO cagna a 261 DINE DREVICW osiensa a 262 DIOlCCE TCC cisusiarodeinsnhi eee NAA 39 103 PONE UO a naan ntteg pane devoted pase tence 34 FO JC CE NVC wi tetndtiegnanthunnvaetidananiiih A 38 DOD GUEICS iS accasries jaautunasinucin stag winatebantaayne EN 48 Quick Street Planning WIZAI cccsecseessseseeseeeeeersneesenaness 222 OTS CTOU ACC ON tats easel teeta a A eeccn tos 49 180 FENOEHNG Sk aie nee ee keane a eaten 263 RESUIE OULD US cina T TN 214 HONE MOUSE DUTON 36 FOC ON EAE E annie T EE PEE ames 229 231 SElECHON TICE aois sanaa sounneaeeonmbe ens 107 semicylindrical MUMINANCE sesssssessrrreeesrrnnesrrrrneerrrererrrrens 237 TL EE E E E ee E ENE 232 SKV MOA GIS nono a EN 158 SK
277. rance Fore scent lamps ee a digi Cite roia J Rehr Bete hd call ie ae ms res CAD vero Tha s oriy a theoretical vole peel onl 4 Lagi S E oa 2a il Al i oo Liht ppi IT Epia A 5 Light goia 2 Coser IRR NE iE pm E Farboemoeretur Tage L Hr aa h 1 x F i iW G laad ap ae ie tn HJ Incandescers lero Legh 23 lutrescent lamos scundaalicelieed i Plo ii ae TI Cots Atte a il l Pali yr amis Eh A Ciar a e li h Citar correo Ale ul a aj Mgn temperature fe Lagi inier Lah Fike and simge bghing gern A5 Er Liaj Tarare Fig 196 Colour information for a selected spectrum Selecting a spectrum in the colour tree the inspector shows a graphical preview of the spectral distribution and a value for the correlating colour temperature This value is only exact for a thermal radiator The colour appearance of this spectrum is displayed as the background colour of the spectrum itself on the right hand side A click on the lower right corner of the diagram in the inspector shows a preview of the CIE test colour samples illuminated with the spectral radiation of this light source For each colour sample the colour rendering index is given and the Ra is also calculated DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 131 DIALux Version 4 7 it ee a Loder apptarance Floorescent lamps Jri b Greg id ae Co inmate 2 akari B seer So p an b we j ip a CAD mriw Thal a pi a Ea vie e T E
278. rangement in this case If you select one of these luminaires you can modify its technical data If you select multiple luminaires in the CAD you can modify the values of all selected luminaires Aligning Luminaires In DIALux you can switch on Help rays for the luminaires In the menu View you can find the function Help rays for Luminaires Se fe cee eee ed F Kan ial j m ne e J E il DF E J P i T il 12458 foe i i a Eo l afl ido i pee Pa T ws See fester F imren Tel j man Eka Sp Ee ee ee ee Lim a 2 laa Fig 145 Help rays for luminaires When you click on this icon a CO arrow red line which indicates the direction of the CO plane anda yellow line degree of light radiation gamma 0 appears at the inserted luminaires The CO planes of the luminaires always show towards the X axis If it wasn t rotated With DIALux you can switch on the 3D Light distribution curve LDC This function is useful to check the correct placement of luminaires with asymmetrical distribution ai jini tom a E i gt i a ee g EEE i i p al a L k EE eel ie D r ss he a ia oF a E al i gt m ipie 4 i a rs FB ie tte eee 7 oo mfe j a E E E E 1 hF Tras al TT n t Femma tal b p Tei de Ba E a BE i o oi a Sj eo ni wis imm u am Fig 146 Luminaries with 3D LDC DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 104 Set illumination point gt align to Imax DIALux Ver
279. re trademarks of the POV Team Any other trademarks referred to herein are the property of their respective holders DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 2 DIALux Version 4 7 DIALux Version 4 7 The Software Standard for Calculating Lighting Layouts Function Overview Welcome to DIALux 4 7 This manual is intended to assist you to work fast and effectively with DIALux If you have experience with Windows applications getting started in DIALux will present no problem DIAL regularly offer courses where the professional use of DIALux can be learned Information regarding the course dates and contents are available under www dialux com and www dial de or 49 0 2351 1064 360 Latest information and updates are also available on our homepage In the following you will find a short description of the functions available in DIALux DIALux offers a number of textures that you are free to use for your lighting layouts The following companies provided those textures e Texturenliste SuperFinish Immobiliendarstellungen Jochen Schroeder www immobiliendarstellung de e Arroway Texturen www arroway de e Ulf Theis www ulf theis de e Texturenland Konstantin Gross www texturenland de e Noctua Graphics Herbert Fahrnholz www noctua graphics de e Thermopal www thermopal de e Rathscheck Schiefer und Dachsysteme KG www rathscheck de They offer many more textures Check their websites for further textures DIAL GmbH
280. re known from other sources In fact you could do an energy performance evaluation in DIALux completely without linked rooms But by doing so you would abandon all advantages DIALux Is offering for simultaneous light planning and energy evaluation You would have to define and work on a lot of aspects that would be in place automatically for linked rooms So our recommendation is to work with linked energy evaluation and DIALux rooms as far as possible Working on parameters For each assessment zone you can adjust a lot of parameters influencing the energy demands of that assessment zone There are partly different parameters for the EN 15193 and the DIN 18599 When using the DIN 18599 there are some parameters taken from the so called utilization profile of the super ordinate utilization zone That can t be done in EN 15193 since there is no such profile DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 290 DIALux Version 4 7 Operating Hows Day 2649 h Mig au h Erin Maarienance waks Duranacce be Wace ohare Haagh Oa im Marere Fathi Taek Areas E T Absence Factor A Partial Dipasti Fa hia d iha Paklau Tt Operator Time for Lighting Typical Ubdeshen Profiles Ostler lice F f peru 3 Sy Cine Eding 2 Lunas Ube iy Eng Evakui i Utissa Dore 1 i Se Office energy evaluation project es Unbeaten Tone 2 fe i Utisation Zone 3 Fig 474 Utilisation profile of an utilisation zone in a planning according to DIN 18599
281. re 1 amp Eda a a ie Prem anergy evaluation penject Auer Tone Morente 1 B Assessment Zone Non Dabah 3 E Eikii Fone 2 E Usin Jore A Breerery Evaka aor Biren 2 B imot Zone Morante Biserarnendt Dona honish 1 Fig 470 Energy evaluation rooms with and without link to DIALux rooms DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 287 DIALux Version 4 7 The linking of energy evaluation rooms and DIALux rooms has many advantages M any aspects of the started or completed light planning can be automatically transferred to the energy evaluation with such links The complete geometry of the DIALux room Is analyzed for the energy evaluation and this does not only mean the ground area and height but even the daylight relevant information like position and properties of windows and roof lights the orientation north alignment and obstruction etc One of the most important steps during energy evaluation the determination of daylight supplied assessment zones happens completely automatically All technical information about luminaries and lamps are transferred as well You do not need to think about mapping of total power values of luminaires and associated parasitic power values to assessment zones or even use some table or rough calculation methods to get such power values All lighting data is determined from the light planning and assigned to the energy evaluation And the advantages are not limited to the creation of en
282. re as with online catalogues By right clicking onto DIALux luminaire catalogues or Not installed catalogues within the luminaire selection DIALux downloads the latest information available Changes in existing functionality e DWG DXF Export Additionally to the already available features in DIALux writing into DWG and DXF files version 4 7 is capable to export the results of calculation grids and calculation points as well e Direct calculation Calculation grids allow you to get calculation results in real time directly into the CAD without considering reflections Newly integrated in DIALux DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 10 DIALux Version 4 7 4 7 is the output of constancy Emin Emedium and Emin Emax also directly into the CAD e Output for radial and uneven distanced calculation grids Particularly projects of great size need a clear illustration of calculation outputs DIALux 4 7 meets this demand especially for radial and uneven distanced calculation grids e New standards for street lighting The list of street lighting classes for calculation grids in DIALux has been extended by Danish classes L1 L7 LE2 5 and El E3 and South African classes Ala A4f e Arrow of flood light arrangement In previous DIALux versions the illumination points of a flood light arrangement was modified in height if the beam angle has been changed Since DIALux 4 7 the beam point is lowered to the ground sp
283. real life to grasp the articulated joints and adjust them spots fully suspended systems floodlights street lighting The manufacturer defines the articulated joints the maximum rotation and even the increments of articulation You simply click on the luminaire and turn it to where the light should be directed Of course you can do this numerically or graphically Permit Prohibit Selection of Rotatable Luminaire Parts Fig 173 Selection of rotatable luminaire parts The third icon from left allows the selection of rotatable luminaire parts If you have activated this icon you can turn the luminaire with articulated joint to the desired position or you can specify the rotations in the appropriate Property Page DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 118 DIALux Version 4 7 a z TYT E i ipg ESA Si iwa ales GED r 7 iamm l jij Pee jai je Cte vim p L F a lE OF ey a i eS E F pipi insan 0 he PA 1 ip bom Fig 174 Turn the rotatable luminaire part by mouse pointer You can also align the luminaire with articulated joint to C0 G0 C90 GO or Imax see similar chapter Aligning Luminaires Ce oe ne MH i i ECE PI a gt m aoea jor sep E Ea pal i 6 a ee OO ok gf to L 3 n Sa OO 1 umn E H m t un E m ia jja res OFF Gn ems SO TEO TE e a Al TR are y E ya ee ee Ti oDi berman een n F cae A E TA a A j f T e 1 P j emm lt P i 4
284. reumiber of rir im Wiard far anporting and tihi a H file Pe Soul y eee area Piihi H hp drr of ee rtd Fie Thek aria hd AE Pll re rect olen y efron k end comin ated bey Uns ir aha Fike w The pigeni eipig of the Me derrarg hon Sr lengh of thie deng mi Tih o he cheery 5 no El 2nd reii Hi Wi iik m and haj E aE Tekst inte cents of the d at H ce Ward bar imponing and edeicg a Ar tile Finishing the wizard tor importing a 30 draaing pacer ibs np ey E B Pile bebe gape alec e Behr Mayes be dated beer bee deel u Gyia hr pos beer are Paani hae Sacer cick on iret Fig 119 Importing 3D wizard Extrusion Volumes New to the standard elements Is the furniture Extrusion Volume To create an extrusion volume just drag and drop the object into a room or an exterior scene A cube with edge lengths 1m x 1m x 1m Is displayed Simultaneously the familiar room editor is shown in the Inspector With this editor you can assign the extrusion volume any polygonal form you like both numerically by DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 85 DIALux Version 4 7 inserting coordinates and graphically by dragging points or lines or by inserting coordinates with right clicks After the extrusion volume s form is defined any extrusion height can be selected An extrusion volume can be rotated combined subtracted or saved as new personal furniture Of course colours and te
285. ririraTr Bte rie l numeric interaction a B eee ee f kis en ih EP graphic aoe interaction _ Mig fs Ci pc eh fii itt bii Ls ne Fig 57 Room edit mode Interactive room editing By clicking on the walls they can be moved interactively within the CAD view parallel to their previous positions Click on the room coordinates to move them to another position in the room as desired Right click on any position on the wall allows you to insert a point at this position via the context menu DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 51 DIALux automatically recognizes whether luminaires are positioned inside or outside the room Calculation surfaces and ground elements can have any polygonal shape DIALux Version 4 7 Apply Cancel E 30 Standard view Fe iL Floor Plan Y Level Symbolic F9 I I I I I I I I I I I I i Insert Point I k I I I I I I I I I I I I I Fig 58 Insert a new corner Further room coordinates can be added or deleted in the Property Page by clicking on the corresponding row and selecting Insert Coordinates or Delete Coordinates Then you can enter the coordinates numerically You can also enter the maximum room dimensions via length and width All lengths are then correspondingly transformed Please note that in the previous example Fig 57 the luminaire at the bottom right will not be displayed or calculated after the new coordinates have
286. rniture Export furniture ccccceeceeeeees 83 117 Create furniture Saved furniture seere 84 118 Import furniture FIIOS cceeeesseeeereeeeersaeeeeeeeneeetens 84 119 Importing 3D WIZAMC ccccecssseeeeeseeeeesaneeeereneeeeees 85 120 Creating an extrusion VOIUME c cccsseseesesseeeeeeees 86 121 Mask and unmask glass objects 86 122 Examples for objects of glass before and after using the Ray Trace Preview cccecsccesssseeseeeeeeeees 87 123 Subtractions from a VOIUME cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 88 124 Resulting VOIUIMG wi ctoessbiestotinencetonceauenlaccpatiocans andes 88 125 Selecting specific surfaces from a volume se 89 126 Drag amp drop for windows and doors sesers 89 127 Context menu decoration Object cccccceeeees 90 128 Decoration object in the project tree eeen 91 129 Calculation GialoQue cccccscccsssseeseceeseeeeeesaneeeeees 91 130 Insert textures via Drag amp Drop ssssssessrsserrrrerrreerrrres 92 131 Edit textures on an ODJeCt cccceccsssesseeseeeeeeeeees 93 132 Delete textures ccccecccceeecseessssseeeeeeeeeesnsaseeeeeeeees 93 133 Import textures into DIALUX sssessssesrrreerrrerrrreerrrres 94 134 Opening the material dialogue of a surface 95 135 Selection of the Raytrace Preview ccseeeeeeeeeeees 97 136 Raytrace preview ParamMetelS cccccceeesecesssseeeeeees 97 137 Output of the Raytrace Preview cccccssssseeses
287. roject manager the control group appears with a link to the luminaires The control group has the Property Page Name DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 140 DIALux Version 4 7 Cannot pea 7 a a al TETE Bway ZELE FELE a iuit i A Od Ai di o Lite ape E Pani Beer a Purr Er Tide Wem ih he Fig 211 Property Page of a control group If luminaires are deleted these are also removed at the same time from the appropriate control group provided that these belong to a control group In the menu Paste you can insert a light scene in your project G File Edit View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Output windo i E Pn he New Scene e p Pi Re T Eg AHE Luminaire Arrangement P Li Projekimanager Street Element a Control group 1 e al Sat at oe O Project 1 Fig 212 Insert a light scene via menu Furniture Room elements Windows and doors Exterior scene elements Calculation surfaces Calculation paints Textures Contral group Alternatively you have the option to insert a light scene from the context menu of the room DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 141 DIALux Version 4 7 at a ETETE FET E E i aac AEE K Biilives eee ccuo bal marianae jees a r a Ga a ee a ee ha pS ie M pan a e meae m o e m e a a fe Bia bw mm Fig 213 Context menu of the room Insert a light scene If a control group was inserted already you can access it by a right clic
288. rotatable luminaire parts e Allow or restrict the selection of furniture e Allow or restrict the selection of surfaces e Allow or restrict the selection of windows doors calculation surfaces e Allow or restrict the selection of calculation points tec i rios ple Room 10 view ia a m Fig 151 Manipulating a luminaire within an arrangement The figure above illustrates how individual luminaires within a field arrangement can be modified The selection filter allows the selection of individual luminaires The luminaire position is unchanged This option for example can be useful when directing individual spotlights in a luminaire arrangement towards furniture pieces In the Inspector the luminaire properties can be changed Here it is possible to select the arrangement type and the dimensioning type of luminaire fields DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 107 DIALux Version 4 7 gt Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting height Rotations Arrangement Arrangement Dimensioning Symmetrical Luminaire Wwrithin Luminaire Centre Luminaire Edges to Luminaire Outer Edge to Outer Edge Fig 152 Selecting the arrangement type of a luminaire field The selected arrangement type as well as the dimensioning influences the field properties Symmetrical within Luminaire centre to Luminaire centre Luminaire edge to Luminaire edge Fig 153 Effect of arrangement typ
289. round elemMeN Ensei nnen 52 213 214 hemispherical WUMINANCE ccccccseseecssseceeseeeeeseueeeerseeeeetens 237 horizontal illUMINaANCE sessssssesrrrreerrrrnerrrrnnenrrrnerrrrrnesrrrres 237 E aena a a G 41 Wuminance CONGILIONS enancia a 229 HUmiNa tonm eaS S inann a EA 223 illumination class wizard ssesssesrreserrrnerrrnnnrrrnenrrrenrreerrrree 224 UII AE ON DON Cittanntnntct hndeacnaiiiate tania 105 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 339 DIALux Version 4 7 IMAGE processing SOTCWAME ccceeccesseseeeeesseeeeeeesaneeeeeeeees 168 I Serta O INE uasin aa 51 INSEMU COOKGINGUES wets es ediaeeia suena ei eceeia uae 52 NEST ING CS a ctesa vette Gar Sntmbseeiahedotatancesuetenadsduedavehbtacrgemstanneateds 240 PE Ortada EE E natch E T E 69 Hantalstipution CUNE secsi Grn aac aaden 104 EION SCENES r e sa 139 E H E PEET E AEE AEE a A A E R 41 luminaire oude OT a OOM naaa e 52 lUMNAre CENTE nina E T 109 Luminaire Selection arean a ea 39 40 IAI aI OCC nesne a i 101 LUMINANCE diagram ciin E 265 NV OS INEN SI anaana a a Ta 105 WIETE i E A ar Raa men nae na 166 Malhtenance facto aquaria anata tieneie 223 MAINTENANCE FACCOIS arnir a 64 maintenance plan method cseccccssseseeseeeeeeeaeeetsneeeersaeess 64 maintenance valUe ssssssisssssrrrrrrressrrrrrrrressrrrrrresssens 66 103 AUCH al saurna a T RET 180 Medan oari a raenceetete hie ea nanaanedadcetes 235 MOOO roU 010 ceemerneente cen ren ner mere ortean renter nee mnn
290. s After loading the POV file into the editor the user can enter additional values for different parameters directly into the edit field in the top middle of the screen The command for Anti aliasing is a followed by a number without a blank e g a0 001 The lower this value is the higher the smoothing Is Sar Gi bisti Tad E Go Ff Gop ite hisi E z Cim rom E 500x600 AA 0 3 F bHdiitj a LS p Fig 505 POV Ray for Windows When the POV Ray editor is started the user can always open the help by pressing F1 to get information for any command Picture ratio Images created by DIA Lux are always in a ratio of 4 3 This is for the most presentation techniques a good value TV projector monitor Modern laptops or TVs have another ratio e g 16 9 and 16 10 After loading the POV file the user can search for the camera command in the text The search command Is one of the drop down menus at the top of the window In the menu search you can select find and enter camera Below camera there is a command for the right vector of the used camera There is written lt 1 3333 0 0 gt 1 333 is the ratio 4 3 To achieve a ratio of 16 9 enter there lt 1 7777 gt or 16 9 E g right lt 16 9 0 0 gt It is important to define a correct picture size with the same ratio The DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 312 DIALux Version 4 7 following pictures of the same scene are made in 4
291. s coordinates list Colour filter fayout Furniture layout plan Furniture coordinates list Room elements layout plan Room elements coordinates list Calculation surfaces coordinates list Workplace coordinates list UGR surfaces coordinates list control group commissioning ff Photometric Results LJ LJ LJ LJ Ei Project a Furniture Fig 48 Output tree To view an output on the screen double click on the corresponding icon To view multiple output types simultaneously right click an output icon and select Open in New Window You can view all types of output on the screen The output types which have a tick made in the checkbox are printed or displayed as print preview when the File gt Print or File gt Print Preview commands are used The observer position used in the CAD is used for the output 3D rendering You may save the 3D rendering as a jpg picture Just move the rendering into the required position and select in the menu File gt Export gt Save CAD view as JPG Here you can select a directory and enter a filename DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 46 The Guide The connecting element which guides you through the programme DIALux Version 4 7 Im m LERRA i Paborhisacy aa w Ge able f LECE et pe a Ta Ps die id agria likimo gia braj E y a a a i oe pi SS m iji a ae a ee J a thy er niente o ero eaber a lied
292. s 290 Calc lation ANG TOSUIES inarrit 293 Documentation of energy evaluation results 295 Making videos in DIALUX ccsscsssssessseseseesererseerentans 298 Fig VLG Cl ccs dcacewsienssaqeosanesaondsssndsicaseiacatsistesueu wesscouces 302 BACK OOUIMNG rerainan ners 302 POV Ray Settings within DIALUX ccccccseeeessseeeees 302 Photo Realistic Images with Raytracing cc 088 302 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 8 DIALux Version 4 7 BaSiC SCLEINGS iscehcivwnusdevtadscvntiatensidie acuta a 302 QUICK Dret ren ES sussen iens nnen Secara aaa 303 Image preferences cccccssesccceseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeereaees 305 Harececaledai o neaei E 305 Brightness Preferences ccccccccsssseececseeeereeeeeeereaees 307 Raytracing Options for Surfaces 308 3 D Standard View for Raytracing serere 309 Stantmo POV Ray innsir n NA 309 Manipulation of the POV file and editing in POV Ray AREE E EEA EAE A A 311 Start of the adapted POV Ray Version seen 311 SMOONNG EUG ES issiria 311 Picture Walt lOvaveuctaseunietienstauaers aaa 312 Camera saia tre ttel ateatebaidenarerear beat 314 AAO TN iarten ER EN 316 Animation with KeyframesS ccccccssssessseeeesesesersneeeens 316 Translation ANIMATION cccsececseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeersneseees 319 Bro 60 gece erence re earn tenet rn re er rye 321 Further functions Of POV Ray ccccsssessersseeeeeeeeeees 321 ESE OG HOUTE Sneue beeen ne eawcammeauee nooner ee a 328 INGO EAE E E A
293. s activated and you can align the luminaire arrangements see also chapter Aligning Luminaires DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 121 DIALux Version 4 7 errr ee ye ara Gil 8EHMH A S vasf eee cooo aaj Eea memana i em nmm gee Bes iai oe oe See ae bam pi is bhs ye Fig 181 Set illumination point Aligned luminaire field Calculation of luminaire geometry included On request the user can now include luminaire geometry in the calculation This is not necessary with normal surface mounted or recessed luminaires Extended pendant luminaires which emit light directly or indirectly may hang in their own shadow perhaps making it necessary to consider the luminaire geometry DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 122 DIALux Version 4 7 illumination strategies Insertion of luminaries with direct planar lighting To use direct lighting solutions one or more luminaries should be selected from the DIALux database Initially Afterwards the selected luminaries should be added to a DIALux project By clicking the button direct planar lighting in the DIALux toolbar it is possible to insert a new direct planar lighting solution Be el eh ESPET ER F TTET ee PRAF cs MENDORE 12a 2 4 Ble elo o EFFAN Gs Ee lt Projektmanager pa la Room 1 Flac Fig 182 Selection of a direct planar lighting situation Another way to insert a direct planar lighting situation is through the selection of
294. s oo low_error factor low_error factor 0 5 low_error factor 1 0 0 01 default low_error_ factor low_error_ factor 1 0 0 01 gray_threshold reduces the colour in the radiosity calculations As mentioned above the blue sky affects the colour of the whole scene when radiosity is calculated To reduce this colouring effect without affecting radiosity in general you can increase gray_threshold 1 0 means no colour in radiosity at all gray threshold 0 0 gray threshold 0 5 gray_threshold 1 0 default Another important parameter is pret race_end Together with pretrace_start it specifies the pretrace steps that are done Lower values lead to more pretrace DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 325 DIALux Version 4 7 steps and more accurate results but also to significantly slower rendering pretrace end 0 2 pretrace_end 0 02 pretrace end 0 004 It s worth experimenting with the things affecting radiosity to get some feeling for how things work The next 3 images show some more experiments ambient 3 instead of ambient 0 5 instead error bound 0 04 ambient 0 forone of ambient 0 forall recursion limit 2 object objects sky ambient 0 Finally you can strongly change the appearance of the whole scene with the sky s texture The following pictures give some example yellow blue gradient light dark gradient light dark gradient DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 326 DIALux Version 4 7 from left to right from left to rig
295. sary DIALux defines for every surface except median parking lane and grass strip a valuation field Now if you want to have for example a bicycle lane and a sidewalk with a common valuation field you must first cancel the existing valuation fields Then select both roadway elements for which you would like to have a common valuation field by pressing the shift key and clicking those roadway elements Then do a right click on the marked objects and choose Insert Valuation Field Now you will get a common valuation field for both roadway elements ieee p i a 1 9 F oft Sy el ey s i a a 2 ee pT s pete pia mj mu j Be mg fia m lj amp TE oe Fig 386 Common valuation field If you mark a valuation field in the Project manager the Property Page calculation grid opens in the Inspector Projektmanager p Calculation Grid luminance Class ME 4a wizard Additional llurnination Classes L Vertical luminance F Semreeplindical luminance Grid f Automatic C Points Fig 387 Calculation Grid DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 236 DIALux Version 4 7 The grid is generated automatically according to the EN13201 If the checkbox Automatic is chosen the right number of calculation points is always chosen If you want a grid different to the standard here you can give the number of the calculation points in the X direction longitudinal direction of a roadway and the Y direction
296. se components you really need Missing components can be added easily later by starting the setup again DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 12 DIALux Version 4 7 DlALux Setup Select Packages Please select the program features that you want to install Program Features Ev Furnitures Languages you can choose for GUI and Textures output Indoor Outdoor 6 m Languages Czech Danish German English GB C English U5 Total space required 299 1 ME Fig 2 Selection of the components to be installed Installation from CD If you want to install DIALux from our CD insert the DIALux CD and automatically a welcome screen starts You can then click on install DIALux If the installation program finds that your Microsoft Internet Explorer is later than version 5 5 you will be requested to install a newer version DIAL Prey eee DIALux Fig 3 DIALux CD browser DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 13 DIALux Version 4 7 Online Menu Online Update il Bipi are See Aahe and feedback Send probien ropi Fig 4 DIALux online menu In that new menu there are several useful features listed to contact DIAL After selecting Online Update DIALux automatically checks for newer versions of the software and for new online Plugins M anage Newsletter subscription Here you can enter your email address to subscribe or unsubscribe to the regular
297. seeeeeeees 163 Settings in the calculation dialogue 163 Working in the 3D VIE W ccccceesessseeeeseeeeeaneeersneeeees 165 Setup the 3D VIEW cenaa a aa 165 Check Calculation Values in the 3D View 166 SVE SD VIEW ae a aAA hockii 167 Presentation of false colour rendering 169 Working in Various VieWS sessssesreerrrerrrrerrrrerrreerrn 170 Save 3D CAD VIEWS oraninin aaa na 171 Wireframe M OG els wessecsseiuvisssnrancamrvotairnrsinensecenaanens 173 Editing Inserted ODJ CtS ccccccssseeeeseserseeeeeseneseesees 174 MOVING ODIECES reiini a 174 Moving and Rotating Objects without Pick Grid 175 SCAG Oh rotal cease 176 Rotan ODIECIS seccnciotsstnievatarcucedaeniaracatiensiasxecaiess 177 Scaling O DJe Cl i cccvesscicietiva inci rretveastanvetac nay ee 177 Combining and Saving Objects cccceeeeeeeeeees 178 M oving the Coordinate Origin of an Object 178 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 6 DIALux Version 4 7 Resetting the rotation of the origin essere 179 Editing Object SUITACES cssescesessseeeesseeeseetanens 180 Arrangement AICS cccccseseseeseeeeeeseeeeeaeeeetsneeeetaneseees 182 Measurement Of GiStaNCes cccccseesseeeseesseeeeeeeens 182 Working with the Snap grid ccceccesseeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 183 Automatic help NES conia 183 Helping areas defined In the ruler eerren 184 Working with help lIN S ccccccsessseseesseeeereeeeeneees 185 Simple MEI NINES entai
298. seeeees 98 138 DUDHCALC LOOMS enasna as 99 139 Launch luminaire tree ceeeeeessseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeees 100 140 Launch online catalogues cccccsececesssssseeeeeeeeees 101 141 Insert individual IUMINAIPES cccccceeseeserseeseneaeees 102 142 Luminaire selection dropdown list s es 102 143 Mounting LAD irai aa aaa anteeaa 103 144 Modifying the technical data of luminaires 103 145 Help rays for IUMINGIPES cccseeeseeseeeeeeneserseeeeens 104 146 Luminaries with 3D LDC ccecscesseseeeseeesersneeees 104 147 Mouse mode to define illumination point 105 148 Selection of individual IUMINAIPES cceceeseeeeees 105 149 Align a spotlight to a picture ereere 106 150 Insert luminaire fields without Wizard essee 106 151 Manipulating a luminaire within an arrangement 107 152 Selecting the arrangement type of a luminaire field svat be A EE E a meta T 108 153 Effect of arrangement type and dimensioning type on the luminaire field GIMENSIONS 088e 108 154 Luminaire field insert frames depending on the arrangement LYPEC cccsscesssseeseeeeseseneneaeees 109 155 Luminaires used in the arrangement 109 156 Rotating the arrangement and the luminaires 110 157 Luminaire field position cccccseeseceseseeseeesersneeses 110 158 Scale c NUIT AIES NVC morare 111 159 Edit a luminaire LING sesssssesrresrrneerrrnerrrrerrrrerrrreern 111 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid
299. set the typical speed of the main user by selecting from four options Please confirm each of your steps by clicking on Next Illumination Conditions Wizard x Typical Speed j Enter the typical speed of the main user type j How high is the typical speed of the main user in the street Main users include combinations of motorised traffic slow vehicles bicyclists and pedestrians If motorised traffic is one of the main users enter the typical speed of the motorised traffic Typical Speed of Main User ls High gt 60 kmh Medium Between 30 and 60 km h Low Between 5 and 30 km h Walking Speed 5 kmh lt Back Cancel Fig 374 Illumination Conditions Wizard Typical Speed Specify the permitted traffic participants in the window Main Users and Other Users DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 230 DIALux Version 4 7 Illumination Conditions Wizard x Hain Users and Other Users Enter the main user type and the other permitted user types Main users are all traffic participants motor vehicles slow vehicles 40km hl bicyclists and pedestrians Main users are pedestrians Other users are not permitted f Main users are pedestrians Motorized traffic slaw vehicles 1s 40 km h and bicyclists are permitted lt Back Cancel Fig 375 Illumination Conditions Wizard Main Users and Other Users Afterwards a final dialogue appears with the information of the determined illumina
300. sion 4 7 To show the LDC click on the icon 3D Light Distribution Display or select the menu View gt 3D Light Distribution Display In DIALux the alignment of luminaries is improved with the function Set illumination point which allows you to align the yellow help ray gamma 0 with any point on a selected surface The alignment of luminaries has further been simplified in DIALux Beside the function of the alignment of the luminaries to CO Gamma0 and C90 Gamma 0 the illumination point can be also aligned optionally to the maximum luminous intensity lmax a i etrtrre j Hi ila ejaz i igaj wee phita Ang sel Radel badali i J i Ee emer oe giie ie Fig 147 Mouse mode to define illumination point To set the illumination point you have to select a single luminaire first Maybe you even have to activate the single luminaire selection to select a luminaire inside of a luminaire arrangement Rite obe peon eee See Bee ee l af pe n a SI anes nee See FH e P p E r Mi la ikee ise T i jaa aes ye Fig 148 Selection of individual luminaires DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 105 DIALux Version 4 7 When you have selected the single luminaire you can use the mouse mode Set illumination point and click on the position surface or furniture you want to illuminate i Aa anjaga I Ea ic eed Gls SED Bes ave Pses cooo val frie hn St a lc ime S a 2 TIE EN 1s
301. sly switch of the icon for the help line snap Fig 294 Icons to switch on and off the snap to help lines A help line is defined by clicking for the starting position and again clicking for the end position Ea te Fig 295 Inserting a help line In the inspector you can see the numeric values of start and end point Further on you can see the angle the help line is rotated compared to the horizontal and the DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 186 DIALux Version 4 7 vertical axis of the 2D view That s way the axes changes from ground to side views The possibility to create parallel lines is also very useful Just enter the number of parallel lines you need and the distance they should have To delete help lines just select and press the del ete key or select delete from the context menu Help lines can be selected to be displayed or not To switch between this modes press the glasses icon with the help line on tt Fig 296 Display help lines Poly help lines A poly line is working like a simple help line but instead of defining just a start and end point there can be any number of vertices in between The line between vertices is always straight forward Each left click defines a new vertex To stop the poly line mode press the ESCAPE key or make a right click In the context menu you can choose between closing the line between first and last point or just stop the mode at the last
302. some luminaire manufacturers will supply Plugins from which luminaires can also be positioned via Drag and Drop He jE Ce fee fees eee z i F a mi Pe E si i EES i Cs i Oe tr i i ria a a EmA ul By uakkc af eee Tr Dim ae imi a eee ma Er Se mim ia as um Fig 141 Insert individual luminaires If you click on Insert Single Luminaire in The Guide a corresponding Property Page opens in the Inspector In the CAD the arrangement is highlighted by a rubber band lines in the Property Page initial values are displayed and at the bottom of the Property Page the Insert and Cancel buttons are located Depending on the currently activated tab you can adjust the Position the Rotation as well as the M ounting height of the arrangement In the Luminaire Property Page you can select the luminaire to be positioned Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting Luminaire DIAL 385 900 Leuchte DIAL 4 Stehleuchte DIAL 18 HALOSPOT EL F 50 W ELA DIAL 5 Autbaustrahler _ DIAL T SiNDVA DIAL 365 900 Leuchte Luminous emittance 1 Lamp TCL BoM Luminous Flux 3350 Im ci 43 Power ft an x Correction Correction Fig 142 Luminaire selection dropdown list In the list displayed in the illustration you can find the luminaires that you have inserted into the project as well DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 102 DIALux Version 4 7 as the last luminaires you have used According to t
303. stration data in the user database and in the DIALux Demo Lamp database DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 16 DIALux Version 4 7 DIALux directories Background information Microsoft has more and more strictly separated the user and the administrator privileges in Windows Vista and XP So misuse of the computer by unauthorized persons or by malware was complicated On the other hand users administrators and manufacturer of software are more and more forced to follow the guidelines of the Operating system strictly To make sure that also users with restricted privileges can use DIALux with all its features it was necessary to change some directories used by DIALux Furniture textures my database These directories are now placed in the application data common folder This standard directory can be changed by the administrator The following examples are standard settings after a windows installation Windows XP Windows 2000 C documents and settings All Users application data DIALux e Drive is the system drive standard C e subdirectory documents and settings is localized Standard Documents and Settings e subdirectory application data is localised and hidden Standard Application Data Windows Vista C ProgramData DIALux e Drive is the systemdrive standard C e subdirectory ProgrammData is hidden Projects and raytracing files Since DIALux 4 4 the DIALux project files and the raytra
304. t several light scenes exist GP le gdt wew CAD Pate Luminaire Selection Quput Window I IG uian 4 TRTE r hj oy band Led EY ES Fl ea Bla s 8 ap va QE Fig 219 Icons for showing dimming values and light scenes in CAD DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 144 DIALux Version 4 7 POETRY TETEE A S Faairhwazi A gt APE el ee e af eee tous E PM te rem rel hte inde en ll ae ee be H Fig 220 Viewable dimming values in CAD If luminaires with more than one light output are used the dimming values for each light emitting object LEO can be adjusted separately In the Property Page of the control group in the lighting scene you can define the dimming values for each LEO This dimming value will be multiplied with the dimming value of the control group Example The control group will be dimmed to 100 In this control group there is a luminaire with independent direct and indirect light output The direct light should be switched off the indirect light should be completely on Settings Dimming value of the control group 100 Light output direct 0 Total 100 x0 0 Light output indirect 100 Total 100 x 100 100 If the indirect light should be dimmed to 50 you can either dim the control group or the LEO Either Total 50 x 100 50 Or Total 100 x50 50 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 145 DIALux Version 4 7 Total dimming value Da Specify the dimming values of the lumin
305. ter Fig 189 Alternative solution to insert a vertical planar lighting situation After clicking the button a project window opens You are now able to draw a line which represents the arrangement of the selected luminaries By clicking the left mouse button and dragging a help line is drawn By default every 1 metre a luminaire will be positioned The button Paste on the left side will execute the insertion of the selected luminaires DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 126 DIALux Version 4 7 _ o mii Fig 190 Insertion of selected luminaries into the vertical planar lighting solution As well as direct planar lighting solutions the project manager provides you with several possibilities to modify settings individually Amongst others you are able to make changes in Mounting Height Figure 182 1 Arrangement of luminaries Figure 182 2 and Rotation of single luminaries Figure 182 3 i Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting Height Arrangement 1 gt Mounting Type User defined v Suspension Height 0 095 m Mounting Height 2 895 m Height above Workplane 1 940 im Room Height 2 800 m Workplane Height 0 850 m i Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting Height Arrangement lili Chessboard arrangement Position every second luminaire Standard positions Offset 1 O Offset 2 Offset 1 2 Rough calculation Em of planned surface 279 x Em of entire scene 284 Ix Em of entire
306. the exterior scene the north direction can be set To show this clearly the north arrow Is drawn near the coordinate Origin a General Maintenance plan method Room Surfaces Alignment Morth alignment gt 0 0 Deviation of north from the Y axis Clockwise Fig 101 Edit room data Alignment M odify Properties of Individual Walls Select a wall in the 3D view so that it is indicated In red Alternatively in the Project manager you can select the corresponding wall and then similarly it is indicated in red AS soon as you marked an object the properties of the wall selected will appear in the Inspector Here you can change the name of the wall and you can display the output results If a shadow is displayed after the calculation e g in the 3D rendering you must define the calculation grid in the outputs A better display will result from a smaller calculation grid by increasing the number of points Naturally the consequence of a smaller calculation grid is an increase in the calculation time for your computer DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 75 DIALux Version 4 7 p ge _ _ _ Fha ad a Sesion ie i Juan HER Ama Be ee sBde a eee cco Aol a eee Brees meee nea e e u ee po nif gr ie ie ba ma smh Lacs Pe I topes mjii Fig 102 Properties of a wall Name On the second tab M aterial you adjust the material properties for the wall The reflectance value changes in
307. the CAD and choose Select this surface from the context menu The desired surface is selected in the Property Page and can be assigned a colour a texture material and so on DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 88 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 125 Selecting specific surfaces from a volume Windows and Doors Windows and doors can also be inserted into the layout via Drag amp Drop They can only be positioned in walls Fig 126 Drag amp drop for windows and doors Since windows and doors can only be placed in walls the door in this illustration is automatically placed vertically in the nearest wall These objects automatically face the right way Decoration Objects With furniture and models you can create attractive projects to improve the visual impression However especially nicely designed furniture often exist of numerous surfaces whereby the calculation time of the project is increased If these models concern of purely DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 89 DIALux Version 4 7 decorative used objects which have no influence on the ophotometrical results this additional calculation time is unnecessary Decoration objects are treated under unequally as the usual models in DIALux Indeed they are completely taken into account into the calculation of the direct light However the indirect part is determined strongly simplified Decoration objects also reflect no light Good examples of decoration objects can be
308. the four views and then arranging the windows e g Tile Horizontally Fig 263 Multiple view arrangement DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 170 Close views via the X icon Saving of various CAD views camera mode DIALux Version 4 7 Click on the X Icon in the upper right corner to close the window EE E ii m J Tres ES eo J dar uash ak a 5 EPL yl a hae f tes pona es p T aa a FP N Close a single view Change the view Fig 264 Closing CAD windows Save 3D CAD views In the 3D view it is possible since DIA Lux version 4 0 to Save camera perspectives of 3D CAD displays with certain key combinations Turn and zoom the CAD into the required position and then press CTRL number This view will be saved in the project The view can be set again automatically by pressing Alt number The numbers 1 to 10 can be allocated as wished You can also do this with a right click in the CAD or under the menu CAD PEE PET COTTER ie oo Jaacrf ary 4B ia sects ea 2af i ove hi et i a Fig 265 Save camera view via context menu DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 171 DIALux Version 4 7 E oo J aar nanal Fp A ll a fl Fig 266 Save camera view via menu The function redo camera view accesses the saved views You can proceed via the context menu within the CAD view or in the menu gt CAD ct fe oe iii E E g a7 5 8 a toe ee E Bs be sheers cece Aal n SS ee Fig 267
309. thing C Room Exterior Scene Standard street Units Which system should be used For dimensions lengths areas etc i Dimensions Metric 51 im cm etc Which system should be used For photometric dimensions illuminance light density etc Lighting engineering European 50 fx cdjm etc w Note Changes are not seen in open windows in the Inspector Close and re open a window or open a new window to see the changes Fi Automatic notification For saving every me minutes Fig 64 General Options Global DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 55 DIALux Version 4 7 A convenient and practical functionality is the automatic reminder to save data You can set the time intervals individually During work on a project when the set time has expired an info reminder box appears automatically This allows you to carry out an initial saving of the project or if you have already stored the project to re save it Reminder fx The last time you saved the project was 2 minutes ago SAYE Mou Do nok save Fig 65 Automatic reminder to save data If the CAD Window tab is selected you can select the Background Colours for your project and for the printout Direct3D as an alternative to OpenGL DIALux uses the most modern techniques for visualisation of the lighting design Before OpenGL or the MESA mode was used Because several graphic card drivers especially those from the chip on board cards
310. ting but also an inner heating source and so an important part of heating and cooling For more information about the directive please visit site www buildingsplatform eu This site really covers everything about the directive that is worth knowing Why energy evaluation in DIALux In the medium term the energy performance for buildings directive means more work for lighting designers Besides the well known lighting data DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 281 DIALux Version 4 7 characteristics they will also have to pay attention to new energy performance characteristics Fortunately most lighting designs already contain a great deal of the necessary information for an energy evaluation This information can be analyzed and reused for the energy evaluation So if the energy evaluation is integrated into the lighting design process as efficiently as possible the additional effort for this evaluation can be reduced significantly That s why DIALux 4 7 offers the means to include an energy evaluation according to EN 15193 or DIN 18599 A DIALux user can include an energy evaluation project into a DIALux project with only two mouse Clicks wk a pa E EET ieee gren F a J m a F a Dee i i ima af ubas Fig 457 Insertion of an energy evaluation project into a DIALux project via menu Paste and via the context menu of the DIALux project The rooms for lighting design can be transferred to the energy ev
311. tion A standard street can contain several street arrangements of luminaires but no other luminaire arrangements or furniture The valuation field is defined with the first street arrangement To insert the street arrangement you can use The Guide DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 245 DIALux Version 4 7 The Guide hx Indoor Lighting Outdoor Lighting Street Lighting Edit street aq Insert Standard aime Edit street elements Plan lighting a Select Luminaires a Insert Street Arrangement Ji Evaluation E Start Calculation aj Output More Copy standard street into new exterior scene Fig 402 Insert street arrangement via The Guide or the menu Insert gt Luminaire Arrangement gt Street Arrangement when you have selected the street in the Project manager Jidah nn TE j i Dean m ABRE _ ma Fia by a MES i eT TS E m jia its a qre Fig 403 Insert street arrangement via menu or by means of right mouse button after you have picked the street in the Project manager DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 246 DIALux Version 4 7 aie a amp a fokig io i paji JE Ey T isj j i a i a i fae ig Sree e tee hm y SS See nea fe mi aie Fim pmi ey ee ee TS e im ioe ar Fig 404 Insert street arrangement via right mouse button DIALux offers all the key parameters for positioning street luminaires To position luminaires first you select the type of luminaire in the ma
312. tion grids The quadratic and user defined calculation grids are conceptually similar size and shape However with the user defined calculation grid it is possible to change the height of the grid s position of origin and the quantity of calculation points The radial calculation grid enables individual changes to the internal and external radii and the original coordinates Editing As well as inserting calculation grids you can also edit them and save them for later projects Just click with the right mouse button on the calculation grid you have inserted and then in the context menu which then appears select the item Convert for editing Then right click on the grid and select Save calculation grid DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 199 DIALux Version 4 7 Please note When you do this all automatic scaling options of the grid will be deactivated is ae f Saree Can r Gira Gl Obedience aie Spe F Tapir Opia k gn ard distribute t Gapa irg a rne Spares e G l ee al ca aj coy fete Fig 321 Converting the calculation grid Conversely you can then insert additional grid points or change existing points via the context menu under the sub item Edit grid points eyed Don rd ere oF Obeerees e ae Depia Cpa e E E e r Dapy Alors a Lire Cee ang e a hele bse j a Cony Damis Fig 322 Editing grid points You can adapt grid points either
313. tive of the 3D CAD view DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 167 DIALux Version 4 7 o Change to the output and open the 3D rendering l Him oo Sunray E put Fratia ie E Liraina jaart lee E Pisce plan Liria Laa pala E Lupwresines ooordinabes beh E Purtture lout plan Furbo poised i bet E Roce elenents aout plan Aon dhania oond let Gakeulatien anle deria it S raea raue Tone F Lamae Gomt Displays the selected oput paja ina mea vando Fig 257 Open the 3D rendering o Start the software that should import the image This might be Word Excel or any image processing software o Click and hold the left mouse button on the 3D output and drag the image to the other program eee SS pll l H O ECCERE j ij sa ie eo J aorJuarh See oe eee en Sae ere oe ze ii ema Pe Fig 258 Copy the 3D rendering into another software o The image is copied into the other software with a resolution of 2000 x 2000 pixels DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 168 DIALux Version 4 7 Presentation of false colour rendering With DIALux the user has the option to display the 3D rendering in a false colour rendering presentation The presentation of illuminance and luminance with freely scalable value ranges and definable colour gradients Is now available el ol EE ELDE E awm Daiat ary PERAL BE ale sf ee lt cous Fh mi em Yia i be E j T Fig 259
314. tness Erant vea x Level Fo General Sde view 1 2 Level pu m ae Wireframe Cenplay ange Display Textures a Display baht per dinning values i AD GE Hale Rays for Luraraires Trgi EP BD ph bembution Display Fig 223 Adjust brightness via menu or in the context menu within the CAD window E IENE OTA Ts DA a Edit Borm Geometry 2D Standard view ru ly Floor Plan 1 Level Symboke F9 Sone CAA VESA k Redo camera view k A jl Te 4 TES T e aies B ab 3 04 elim Siama 71m Mom HM Fig 224 Adjust brightness CAD window The Property Page Brightness allows the setting of the brightness distribution in the room After you have shifted the brightness control in the desired position click on the Apply button so that the currently displayed window can be refreshed in your 3D Rendering DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 147 Light scenes can be optimized together Export light scenes in dic format DIALux Version 4 7 Projektmanager pr Brightness f Extended Settings Brightness Control for 30 Rendering c i Here vou can set the brightness of the 3D display of the rendered rooms The modification applies to all subsequent 3D renderings Click on Apply to refresh the currently displayed window Fig 225 Brightness control for 3D rendering In the Extended Settings tab you can correct the exposure time of the CAD Additionally you have the option to optimize lig
315. to the origin of the element can be rotated Any geometric changes made are shown in the inspector for the element under the Geometry tab There is a Calculations options tab that allows if the use as decorative object box is checked for the object to cause no obstruction to light in the space with regard to output results The object does however appear as a decorative object in any 3D rendering Another example is that you can insert a sloped ceiling that cuts the existing wall surfaces and creates new surfaces called ceiling 2 The other room elements like the flat ceiling become a part of the room as well and you can create new room surfaces at the same time b os TETE j i i SOL e Bag a a g F Tm j mi a a Se oe oe Fig 105 Edit rooms Insert room element To insert room elements into a room first of all you have to open the Furniture tree Then select the file Room Elements All room elements are displayed in the centre of the window You can Insert these simply by Drag amp Drop into the 3D view or the ground plan view You can likewise create the room elements in the ground plan view Particularly the scaling option of the room elements is easier in the ground plan view You can scale and rotate the room element simply by using the mouse DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 78 DIALux Version 4 7 hs Paitin ik Bm Fer pee bent Ligers sirare 7 B r un a be i am t nu eR E
316. tures in DIALux 4 7 for floodlighting are very suitable for uniform illumination of large areas e g sports complexes Floodlight illumination consists of an arrangement of one or more luminaires which are mounted separately on a pole or traverse In DIALux you have the additional option of mirroring such a pole etc either vertically horizontally or a combination of the two and thus achieving uniform illumination of the whole area Inserting floodlight illumination In order to insert a floodlight arrangement in DIALux select via the menu Paste gt Luminaire Arrangement gt Floodlight Arrangement At the position of the origin of the scene a luminaire is now placed in the bottom left hand corner The default setting is that the floodlighting illumination is aligned to the origin of the ground element You can make a pre DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 113 DIALux Version 4 7 selection of the luminaires to be used as well as their arrangement quantity mounting method and mirroring properties Please note A luminaire which is added to a floodlighting illumination must already be available in the project If several luminaires are available in the project you can simply select from these in the project manager for floodlight illumination After confirming with Paste the floodlight illumination is inserted into your sports complex Fig 163 Inserting floodlight illumination in a sports complex
317. u pick the room maintenance interval After the selection of a luminaire the user can place this in any arrangement You also have access to technical details of the luminaire This Property Page is identical with the one associated with the easy method Ls File Edit View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Qutp 1g hla os fp L EATEN o mek Projektmanager p Luminaire Mounting Maintenance factor Luminaire WILA 1138 53 Sentic pendant luminaire T Lamp Luminous Flux Power Correction Correction Fig 89 Technical settings of luminaires with different luminous emittances DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 68 DIALux Version 4 7 If you use a luminaire with several different luminaire emittances LEO Light Emitting Object you can set each LEO lamp choice and correction factor Both the initial illuminance and the maintained illuminance will be indicated as in the easy method Also the initial and maintained illuminance of the whole room is shown The user can see the contribution of this luminaire arrangement compared with the layout in the whole room In this case the values are different because other luminaires are in the room L File Edit View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Output MEE EITI aee a oa E Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting 4rrangement Maintenance Factor Rows 2 Luminaires per Row poo Start Foint me ooon mo t o oo m Endpoint gt 5400 m 3600 m E o I Suggestion U
318. ugin which has not been installed opens the Internet Explorer window and the homepage of the luminaire manufacturer is displayed if available Some manufacturers provide individual luminaires or entire Plugins for downloading here The User Database The user has the possibility to select those luminaires from the various manufacturers Plugins which are regular used in the DIALux project These luminaires can be saved in the User Database It is also possible to search for luminaires and to delete luminaires User Database dharar Litp Oi Wha h r no ane wou becdeng for Ashe le marbr Baralichrer Lier Hemi BS B LEuehee mit BAP Lurinaie Type Iniegeloancer divgekestrahlesd beehglane SLSEleet bempe LJEN cI Fig 41 The User Database Use the Import button to transfer luminaires to the User Database One or several ULD Idt Eulumdat ies or cib files can be imported from any desired directory If a luminaire has been imported into the project i e it appears in the luminaire list it can be copied to the user database via a right click Insert Luminaire Files into DIALux DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 40 DIALux Version 4 7 A Search gt Folders S S X 9 E Eulumdat File g HOFO1 1 LDT 1 KE Eulurmdat File eB HOFO14 LDT 1 KE Eulurmdat File 1 Setti 1 KE Eulurmdat File 1 KE Eulumdat File i Ye Insert into DIALux Project les 2 He Insert into Gwin DI
319. ulation grid during work on the project Select the sub item Display isolines in the tab Display In the CAD you will now see the isolines of the inserted luminaire s in real time Real time calculation only functions up to final visualization of the calculation results mo Tsh sere 7 7 F ii To E os mO Fi E a POPE Beery E ibn J E ip d 7 m isur pe l isai st dawe Le ere ee Jae i b ki bi ual Ea m SET E P Parian its n a Fi iie A P z kinie Smii E a Ld j Fa Fig 336 Displaying isolines in CAD All settings at this stage also apply automatically for false colours The graphic lines illustrate the level of illuminance according to individual settings These settings can be changed and adjusted in the tab Isolines Isolines DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 209 DIALux Version 4 7 created in this way can be saved as user default settings in DIALux In addition it is also possible in DIALux to open standard specifications To do this select the required isoline profile in the sub item Standard specifications For example profiles for sports complexes or emergency lighting are available Gradients Display Real Time Calculation Isolines 4 fio Standard specifications Colour value AH Inside Outside Emergency Lighting Even Save as user default Fig 337 Selecting an isoline profile Calculation Points To get
320. utput Results Surface 10 Cirkace 17 El Fig 282 Calculating grid and furniture surface output To include the calculation results of a certain surface in the output please check the Output Result checkbox in the Calculating Grid tab Time and again it is necessary to work on single surfaces of an object With complex objects with very many surfaces it may take a lot of time to find the required surface in the surface list of the object s Property Page To make this simple you can now select a single surface graphically Just right click the object on the required surface in the CAD and choose Select this surface from the context menu The required surface is selected in the Property Page and it can be assigned a colour a texture material and so on If Output Results is checked the surface selected appears in the project tree of the project manager It may be helpful to rename this surface in the project tree so that results are easily identified Preprhimasage remt Teer Jy kd TE L ee Da E E kanu f F pa Fi fice ee iinr Fig 283 Selecting a single surface with the mouse DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 181 DIALux Version 4 7 Arrangement aids Measurement of distances Using the tape measure it Is easily possible to find the exact distances between objects in 2D and 3D view To start the tape measure just click on the icon or select the tape measure in the menu CAD y
321. vertex fh P mis Fig 297 Insert a poly line stop the mode with a right click In the inspector each vertex can be changed numerically and by ticking the checkbox the poly line can be closed To move the complete poly line after it is defined once hold down the ALT key while the mouse is above one vertex and holding down the left mouse button DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 187 DIALux Version 4 7 n al a EROR i F 7 A La Seg 05 2 7 T haa E a of a nil oy Se ide es s a i e ha me Cii AN 5 peiie j perie a oe r i hpa k Tem i e E a a a a E E P m e E ees Fig 298 Move the complete poly line by holding down the ALT key Spline help line The spline help line can be placed like the poly help line The lines between the vertices are not straight but curved to follow a smooth line between the vertices In the start and end point there are draggers which can be used to change the line towards the start and end point p sa n IE e r E E a Teer ETETE j Gi F E ET E CELE EFTE E T po See wir fA eu ee eee T i i a ry r i 5 1 A i A ie ia hi i a ae ee jo E ik 2 liee yp ige i l E i ape E F i oe Fhe at Fig 299 A closed spline help line In the start and end point are draggers to change the line To move the complete spline help line after it is defined once hold down the ALT key while the mouse is above one vertex and holding down the left mouse
322. w CAD Paste luminare Selection Output Window 7 BRA IE peT 2 Pa L JP 2 RSBla SE ia Geile E oe Projektmanager Vorschau Geometry Room elements Use a drag snchcron clion fo pull an obpect mio a CAD varve Pe rel i Fi TE fom _ 2 Sire it fi 000 E fi oo0 ele fi W a Fictabor apo So yo Se ef m Standard elements Room sements GB Windows and doors a Exterior stent cements fl Calculation surfaces Calculation points E Furniture Files H Indoor fA Qubdece CB Projen FS Fur Text W Lummi g Output Flat ceiling For Hein oress Fi Fig 110 Edit rooms Insert room elements via Property Page DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 80 DIALux Version 4 7 Insert Furniture Insert Furniture You can insert furniture into the project in the same way as room elements by using Drag amp Drop or the Property Page Eee E py EE SSS SS _ shag a n Pehle E i faig Sil Ej us Lar pu A ij i a F af a ae EE beme mr 5 a a ar nmm Tiai aime F j ma Ta o i in jj Jo oo a o m le 4 Er 8 ji i E Fei e b Se ees St at ee amehg as ay e E a a a Fi ie Fi om P z a p Comme m Sas ga el fF oF r il d 2 hal oe i Ei e ai p fe bha m ss i ibe bma hi me Fig 111 Drag and Drop of furniture Insert via Property Page You can also insert objects numerically by entering coordinates in the furniture Property Page
323. way Additionally you can specify the Pole Arrangement here Under property page Arrangement you can define the place along the street where you want to install the luminaires A list of arrangement types is available to yOu Luminaire Fole Boom Arrangement Joint rotations Arrangement type Single row bottom r Sketch Ca ee Fig 407 Insert Street Arrangement Arrangement DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 248 DIALux Version 4 7 To insert the luminaire arrangement in your street project please click on the Paste button In the context menu of the street arrangement you can optimise individually the arrangement of your luminaires To do this select with the right mouse button the street arrangement in the Project manager a T Guise a LE E a Fig 408 Street arrangement Optimise arrangement The luminaire arrangement always defines the valuation field If you insert several luminaire arrangements the resulting valuation field depends on each case of the maximum pole distance between two luminaires shown in the following example see Fig 409 The luminaires of the lower arrangement therefore specify the calculation field a LLL peanj E Mi eeg e ey i lt FT ee oom 1er pa Tea Cie E s m sst a a CELTI E mmi me Fig 409 Calculation field in the ground plan view The starting point of the arrangement relatively to the calculation field can b
324. width of a lane after you have activated the checkbox Points NOTE Then the results are no longer according to the standard EN13201 Projektmanager liminance Class Wizard ME 4b Vertical luminance Wes F Semi culindrical lun Grid f Automatic Points E Project 1 Fig 388 Calculation Grid Illuminance Class Here you have the option to specify the illuminance class Either the given illuminance class is selected manually from the available list or by using the wizard to determine the illuminance class in according to the European Standard CEN TR 13201 1 The illuminance class contains a Summary of the photometric requirements for your project which depends on the visual needs of specific street users using different kinds of traffic surfaces and their environment Additional illuminance classes can be chosen according to street situation for vertical and semicylindrical illuminances q v EN13201 1 chapter 6 4 For valuation fields requiring illuminances rather than luminances it can be necessary within the scope of the norm to calculate each of four illuminances dimensions dependent on the interpretation criteria according to EN13201 2 These are e horizontal illuminance e hemispherical illuminance e semicylindrical illuminance e vertical illuminance DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 237 DIALux Version 4 7 Horizontal illuminance is always calculated However in some countries h
325. within the Inspector Select the object in the furniture tree enter the desired position in the Inspector and click on Insert Create Furniture You can create your own furniture by combining standard bodies The following example of a small shelf describes the procedure rr e p j j j Fe E ee FF E TEELE f i ia i SSS a Ei sare E al mi mE e i T CIN cae ae a at Pull the cube into ssj EE the CAD window ee be op smh iit a m Fig 112 Create furniture Standard bodies DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 81 DIALux Version 4 7 Modify the geometry of the cube in such a way that it corresponds to a bottom shelf by using the Property Page Eee B ii IE a jn ewe eee dait ea a Se eoe x E i j azj EEREN om ajsan aal e Bi et 5 d Fian piP dim TE ies k 4b BES rr E yN i Laas ae i Er ak ee LIS i i LB 4 a Fig 113 Create furniture Modify the dimensions Subsequently you can copy the bottom shelf and move it to the desired position Possibly the height Z axis will need modifying Saale E ne Abo ore d ria p Copy long a Lina A DA J4 Doty Fig 114 Create furniture Copy Afterwards you can generate the side panels and position them correctly Subsequently select all side panels and shelves and combine them via the right mouse button Combining is very important particularly for the calcul
326. x 2045 Ix Fig 93 Insert another arrangement in the same room Now an optimum number of luminaires can be determined here for the project as a whole The maintenance factor also can be seen in the CAD view Because luminaires in certain room zones can be subjected to different conditions for example higher pollution or different operating hours the maintenance factors of the individual luminaires can be shown in the CAD view Local differences in maintenance factor consequently can be easily understood You can display the maintenance plan factors either in the menu gt view or in the menu bar in the CAD window Ze PR gt P Se ee ja S Nea ew ea L ja j 4s PER ep pnb eee cGeue A of ete Ee Fe porter aa Oy eee as i ie GT e l e l a iie uina buma am Fig 94 Show maintenance factors in the CAD via menu DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 72 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 95 Icon Show maintenance factors in the CAD The user has the ability to edit the maintenance factors from the menu Edit oe ie e a er T e TrErr e E i ere es y a ikja af t a OLLI amp all ee ee scl Fig 96 Menu Edit Edit Maintenance Factors or in the context menu of the luminaire arrangement Ee ee tet ee Oe ee l guai rao a fangas s oe Ae panci ee a ey fale Loss Obes Aal ims bma bma A Fig 97 Context menu of the luminaire arrangement Edit M aintenanc
327. xcerpt from the POV Ray online help you get when you press F1 after POV DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 321 DIALux Version 4 7 Ray is started Furthermore you will find additional information under www povray org Here follows an abstract of the POV Ray help 4 2 3 Radiosity without conventional lighting You can also leave out all light sources and have pure radiosity lighting The situation then is similar to a cloudy day outside when the light comes from no specific direction but from the whole sky The following 2 pictures show what changes with the scene used in part 1 when the light source is removed default radiosity but recursion_limit 1 and error_bound 0 2 with light source without light source You can see that when the light source is removed the whole picture becomes very blue because the scene is illuminated by a blue sky while on a cloudy day the colour of the sky should be somewhere between gray and white The following pictures show the sample scene used in this part with different settings for recursion_limit everything else default settings recursion limit 1 recursion limit 2 recursion limit 3 DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 322 DIALux Version 4 7 This looks much worse than in the first part because the default settings are mainly selected for use with conventional light sources The next three pictures show the effect of error_bound recursion_limit 1s 1 here Without li
328. xtures can be assigned to the volume s surfaces EE a ee ee ee ee eee eee eee T CE ak al al oP si oe i Ts ee y Wia bel Hi LS m BE oF g nE eae i mir bi Lara mpr 1 bhii aTe m F kanam Tart Bii i oe a OE a 1 am a lel iene E piraan ote i reBvrctrrad Fig 120 Creating an extrusion volume Glass objects Glass objects have been introduced in DIALux 4 7 in combination with the Ray Trace preview Contrary to other objects glass objects can be masked or unmasked Fig 121 Mask and unmask glass objects By combining two or more glass objects the feature of transparency will trail off As a matter of fact glass objects include the same features as the common standard objects Therefore scaling rotating and moving is possible For the usage in the Ray Trace preview and in PovRay glass objects feature predefined propositions for transparency and reflection Please use glass objects for modelling room divider showcases and many more glass objects DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 86 DIALux Version 4 7 Fig 122 Examples for objects of glass before and after using the Ray Trace preview Subtraction of Objects Subtraction of objects is a helpful tool to create complex furniture Similar to room elements subtracting areas from aroom you can subtract one or more objects from one other object Objects can be standard elements extrusion volumes furniture or imported SAT objects The resulting obj
329. y website and the online copy of this document at http www povray org poviegal html for the current email address of the team leader Unfortunately we cannot include it here as we have to change it from time to time due to spam email being sent to the address The following postal address is only to be used for official license business when emailing is impossible We do not provide technical support We will not mail you disks with updated versions Please do not send money If you want to know how to support us please see http www povray org supporting povray html POV Team C O Hallam Oaks P L PO Box 407 Williamstown Victoria 3016 Australia MESA Copyright C 1999 2003 Brian Paul All Rights Reserved THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IM PLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL BRIAN PAUL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Registered Trademarks Microsoft MS Windows Windows NT Win32 are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries Adobe Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems INC POV Ray Persistence of Vision POV Team and POV Help a
330. yed ETET peboes le oo oer als EARTE yi B NOEN ETTE i i gi ma a e M fl om bs Fn Fie Hmi EZE d pe iel a Li _ tee Ee bmi me Fig 30 Working with Wizards Visually represented result In order to display the calculated results click in the toolbar on the Single Sheet Output button Afterwards you will see a summary which displays all the important details on one page DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 32 DIALux Version 4 7 Jj Pret Preview Bm h ot Ml Hl A l TE cai laa a apm eran bamar aan ab fewer Pek ii Fes oe oe im Pea G mE Pe rmm preg Pe ee Room 1 Single Sheet Output im am TED E Haki ai P n AD bal mwa Mg bid JAN a Dali rsdn Wakai biii Deal 1 2 Wii pisia i mji one Eg ied Feed a aoa Pati Sii atai Caling G TE Af i Wik a m1 i a F Hei a An HRL TLE 13 Pea Deer dure Sere i oni fignranes Cavi ening be LS ole Seg Pret 2 Calg a h ie g Plone Oo Lumiere Pore List Tra Pacii Designation gk drean i i Ei i F pe F aO P FEE Laiki i E DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 33 DIALux Version 4 7 The DIALux User Interface DIALux has adopted the user interface of Windows XP Dynamic settings of the toolbar the new and much more comprehensive Guide simpler dialogues to guide t
331. you can limit the amount of the output For example with sloped ceilings there may be results for a number of surfaces that you are not interested in For all these surfaces you can disable the checkbox Result Output so that they will not appear in the output tree DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 262 DIALux Version 4 7 hs Seasaen E i Duan aie a COLERE EE ia p i ae Se E Fig 429 Limit result output Output Settings For many output types further settings can be specified Select the respective output in the output tree and change the settings in the corresponding Property Page in the Inspector i Ce it eee Gee ee Pe eee aiga i ia Diwan i ag Je e4 opopo i Lae Pere ee CE EL C Derg E pm P PAJ i at OE ig Fig 430 Output settings If you change the settings the Refresh View button is activated If you use this button the changes entered are applied in the output window The 3D rendering is generated using the observer position set in the CAD DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 263 Fixing the calculation grid in the output DIALux Version 4 7 ican EN Rann 30 View Fig 431 3D CAD at the top left for editing purposes and 3D rendering as output at the bottom right New Output in DIALux DIALux offers several new or enhanced output types since DIALux 4 Most of them refer to the new light controls Thus there are suitable outputs for control groups and light sc
332. you do not have much experience with CAD programs we recommend that you create your first projects with the help of our wizards Experienced users can skip this chapter PES S SS Ee Fig 17 DIALux Startup Dialogue After the installation DIALux always starts with a Welcome window In this window you can click with the left mouse button on DIALux Wizards If you do not see this Welcome dialogue any more you will find the wizards in the menu File gt Wizards 1 ile Edit wiew COD Paste Lur New Stro h Open Strg 0 Close Strg 5 CELE ELEI SR Tan l Lu T D Import d Export Page Printer Setup Print Preview oso cw Print Strg P Settings Last Projects Opened Exit Fig 18 Launch DIALux Wizard DIAL GmbH Ludenscheid page 25 DIALux Version 4 7 A worked example using the wizard follows for a L shaped room with a luminaire arrangement to provide 500 Ix on the work plane 75m 3 m Gm Woloone to the quick panning zard ie aire g pew agh an i DALE cect rnin Phe ikre Son Ge fetid Flom inion Dey i Daia ore places of leer Caii of Slee all Coot Fig 19 Working with Wizards Start Click on the Quick Planning Wizard and then the following steps will be executed Confirm each of your steps by clicking on Next Lee Peni A Si e ME eE hies po an op E a a rE ie LER Hie jie Ba aa Lam ba Hated pae m e a a anj he Rissa etiamne

DIALux Version 4.7

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents